Home

2015 FLEX Owner`s Manual

1. E D WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving Note The MyFord Touch system controls most of the audio features See the MyFord Touch chapter for more information A SOURCE Press this button to access different audio modes such as AM FM and A V Input 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Audio System 383 B Seek Reverse and Fast Forward e In radio mode select a frequency band and press one of these buttons The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction e In Sirius mode press these buttons to select the previous or next channel If a specific category is selected such as Jazz Rock or News use these buttons to find the previous or next channel in the selected category e In CD mode press these buttons to select the previous or next track C SOUND Press this button to access settings for Treble Midrange Bass Balance and Fade D TUNE and TUNE e In radio mode press these butto
2. Second Row Center Console If Equipped Available console features include A Cupholders B Flip forward armrest to provide a flat load floor C Utility compartment or refrigerator unit 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Storage Compartments 179 Console Refrigerator and Freezer If Equipped This feature will operate when the vehicle is on or in accessory mode Limit the time of use when the vehicle is in accessory mode to avoid draining the vehicle s battery Ford recommends only using this feature when the engine is running Flip the console lid forward then lift off the cover to open the cooling compartment Make sure to replace the cover after you using it This helps maintain a more consistent cooling temperature Refrigerator Briefly press and hold COOL The indicator light on the cool side of the switch will illuminate and the indicator light on the freeze side will glow when the refrigerator is active The temperature will cool to approximately 41 F 5 C Briefly press and hold COOL again to turn off the refrigerator Briefly press and hold FREEZE to change to freezer mode Freezer Briefly press and hold FREEZE Both indicator lights will illuminate when the freezer is active The temperature will cool to approximately 23 F 5 C Press FREEZE again to turn off the freezer Press COOL to change to refrigerator mode This feature turns off
3. CTA warns the driver of vehicles approaching from the sides when the transmission is in R Reverse Note BLIS is not designed to prevent contact with other vehicles or objects or to detect parked vehicles people animals or infrastructure fences guardrails trees etc It is designed to alert the driver to vehicles in the blind zones Note When a vehicle passes quickly through the blind zone typically fewer than two seconds the system does not trigger Using the Systems BLIS turns on when the engine is started and the vehicle is driven forward above 3 mph 5 km h it remains on while the transmission is in D Drive or N Neutral If shifted out of D Drive or N Neutral the system enters CTA mode Once shifted back into D Drive BLIS turns back on when the vehicle is driven above 3 mph 5 km h Note BLIS does not function in R Reverse or P Park or provide any additional warning when a turn signal is on 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 238 Driving Aids CTA detects approaching vehicles from up to 45 feet 14 meters away though coverage decreases when the sensors are blocked Reversing slowly helps increase the coverage area and effectiveness WARNING To help avoid personal injury NEVER use the CTA system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors and looking over your shoulder before backing out of a parking space CTA is not a repla
4. Play or Previous song If you are not listening to a Bluetooth audio device press the voice button and after the tone say Bluetooth Audio then Next song Pause Play or Previous song AN Inputs WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving WARNING For safety reasons do not connect or adjust the settings on your portable music player while your vehicle is moving WARNING Store the portable music player in a secure location such as the center console or the glove box when your vehicle is in motion Hard objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while your vehicle is moving 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 474 MyFord Touch If Equipped Your A V inputs allow you to connect an auxiliary audio video source such as a
5. Weather map If you have said Sports headlines Sports schedule or Sports scores you may say any of the commands in the Sports headlines Sports schedules and Sports scores commands chart Tf you have said Travel Link you may say any of the commands in the Travel Link chart Sports headlines sports schedules and sports scores voice commands Motorsports TO TRAVEL LINK 5 day weather Golf schedule NBA scores forecast Baseball headlines MLS headlines NFL headlines Baseball schedule MLS schedule NFL schedule Baseball scores College basketball Motor sports NHL headlines headlines schedule College basketball Motor sports scores schedule headlines College football My team headlines Weather schedule 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 490 MyFord Touch If Equipped College football My teams schedule Weather map scores WNBA headlines Golf headlines NBA headlines WNBA schedule Golf leaderboard NBA schedule WNBA scores Alerts e If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation touch the i Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab Press Alerts and
6. 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Auxiliary Power Points 175 AUXILIARY POWER POINTS WARNING Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter socket Gf equipped Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your warranty and can result in fire or serious injury Note If used when the engine is not running the battery will discharge There may be insufficient power to restart your engine Note Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power point This will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Note Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Note Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volts DC 180 watts or a fuse may blow Note Do not use the power point for operating a cigarette lighter element Note Improper use of the power point can cause damage not covered by your warranty Note Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use Run the engine for full capacity use of the power point To prevent the battery from being discharged e Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running e Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for extended periods Locations Power points may be found e near the floor in the front console bin on the passenger s side e in the center console storage compartment
7. Note The engine may continue cranking for up to 15 seconds or until it starts Note If you cannot start the engine on the first try wait for a short period and try again Vehicles with Keyless Start Note Do not touch the accelerator pedal 1 Fully press the brake pedal 2 Press the button The system does not function if e The key frequencies are jammed e The key battery has no charge If you are unable to start your vehicle do the following 1 Locate the key backup slot in the center console utility compartment 2 With the buttons facing the front passenger and the key ring at the rear of the console place the key into backup slot 3 With the key in this position press the brake pedal then the button to switch the ignition on and start your vehicle 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Starting and Stopping the Engine 185 Fast Restart Vehicles with Keyless Start The fast restart feature allows you to restart the engine within 20 seconds of switching it off even if a valid key is not present Within 20 seconds of switching the engine off press the brake pedal and press the button After 20 seconds have expired you can no longer start the engine without the key present inside your vehicle Once the engine has started it remains running until you press the button even if the system does not detect a valid key If you open and close a door while the en
8. Note When manual zoom is enabled only the centerline is shown Allows the driver to get a closer view of an object behind the vehicle The zoomed image keeps the bumper in the image to provide a reference The zoom is only active while the transmission is in R Reverse When the transmission is shifted out of R Reverse the feature automatically turns off and must be reset when it is used again Selectable settings for this feature are OFF and ON Press the zoom button to change the view The default setting for the manual zoom is OFF Rear Camera Delay When shifting the transmission out of R Reverse and into any gear other than P Park the camera image remains in the display until the vehicle speed reaches 6 mph 10 km h This occurs when the rear camera delay feature is on or until a radio button is selected Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF The default setting for the rear camera delay is OFF 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Cruise Control 227 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal USING CRUISE CONTROL WARNING Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic on winding roads or when the road surface is slippery This could result in loss of vehicle control serious injury or death WARNING When you are going downhill your vehicle speed may increase above the set speed
9. USING SNOW CHAINS WARNING Snow tires must be the same size load index speed rating as those originally provided by Ford Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle transfer case or power transfer unit failure Note The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 348 Wheels and Tires The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow However in some climates you may need to use snow tires and cables If you need to use cables it is recommended that steel wheels of the same size and specifications be used as cables may chip aluminum wheels Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains e If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle e Use only SAE Class S snow chains snow cables or equivalent on the front axle for P235 60R17 P235 60R18 and P235 55R19 equipped vehicles The use of snow chains snow cables or other traction assist devices that are larger than SAE Class S may cause damage to your vehicle s wheel house suspensio
10. 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 26 Child Safety Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren LATCH WARNING Never attach two child safety seats to the same anchor In a crash one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break causing serious injury or death WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points two lower anchors located where seat back and seat cushion meet called the seat bight and one top tether anchor located behind that seating position LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat For forward facing child seats the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat Your vehicle has LATCH lower anch
11. Delete a paired media device Press OK and scroll to select the device Press OK to confirm Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 430 SYNC Advanced Menu Options This menu allows you to access settings such as prompts language performing a master reset as well as returning to factory defaults 1 Press AUX and then MENU to access the Media Menu 2 Scroll until System Settings appears and select OK 3 Scroll until Advanced appears 4 Press OK and then scroll to select from the following When you select Prompts Have SYNC guide you via questions helpful hints or ask you for a specific action 1 Press OK to select and scroll to select between on or off 2 Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu Languages Choose from English Francais and Espanol The displays and prompts are in the selected language 1 Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages 2 Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display 3 If you change the language setting the display indicates that the system is updating When complete SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu Factory Defaults Return to the factory default settings This selection does not erase your indexed information phonebook call history text messages and paired devices 1 Press OK to select and then press OK again when Restore Defaults appears in the d
12. Important The towing vehicle s braking system is rated for operation at GVWR not at GCWR Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle The GCW must never exceed the GCWR Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options no cargo internal or external a tongue load of 10 1596 conventional trailer and driver only 150 Ib 68 kg Consult your authorized dealer or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer for more detailed information WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label WARNING Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations WARNING Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and or personal injury 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 254 Load Carrying Steps for determining the correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
13. J A Phone B Quick Dial C Phonebook D History E Messaging F Settings Hands free calling is one of the main features of SYNC Once you pair your phone you can access many options using the touchscreen or voice 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 476 MyFord Touch If Equipped commands While the system supports a variety of features many are dependent on your cellular phone s functionality At a minimum most cellular phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions e Answering an incoming call Ending a call Using privacy mode Dialing a number Redialing Call waiting notification Caller ID Other features such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download are phone dependent features To check your phone s compatibility see your phone s user manual and visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca Pairing Your Phone for the First Time WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may af
14. L Heated rear window Turns the heated rear window on and off See Heated windows amd mirrors later in this chapter for more information M Defrost Press the button to distribute air to the windshield vents and de mister Air distribution to instrument panel and footwell vents turn off You can use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 140 Climate Control AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL WITH MyTemp l H G F E D Note You can switch temperature units between Fahrenheit and Celsius See Settings in the MyFord Touch or MyLincoln Touch chapter A MyTemp Allows you to quickly adjust to a frequently used setting with a single touch Press or to increase and decrease the temperature Touch and hold MyTemp to save the current temperature To access the setting again touch the MyTemp indicator again B Power Fan speed control Press the button to turn the system on and off Switching off the climate control system prevents outside air from entering the vehicle Turn to increase or decrease the volume of air circulated in the vehicle C DUAL Press the button to allow the passenger to set their temperature independent of the driver temperature 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Climate Control 141 D Recirculated air Press the button to switch between outside air an
15. SD card and USB Port section of this chapter For a complete list of Browse voice commands see USB and SD card voice commands and Bluetooth audio voice commands in the following sections 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 456 MyFord Touch If Equipped Your voice system allows you to change audio sources with a simple voice command For example if you are listening to music on a USB device then want to switch to a satellite radio channel simply press the voice button on the steering wheel controls and say the name of the Sirius station such as the Highway The following voice commands are available at the top level of the voice session no matter which current audio source you are listening to such as a USB device or Sirius satellite radio Note This is only available when your MyFord Touch system language is set to North American English FM 87 9 107 9 gt 530 1710 gt lt 87 9 107 9 Play album lt name gt Play name song or album by artist name Play lt name gt Sports games This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to Sirius satellite radio The commands that have around the word means that the word is optional For example if you say Play Metallica this is the same as the voice command Play artist lt name gt AM and FM Touch the AM or FM tab to
16. SYNC Services Access the SYNC services portal where you can request various types of information traffic reports and directions 911 Assist Place an emergency call to a 911 operator for you after an accident if the feature is used properly Report your vehicle applications on your smartphone System Settings Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings add connect set as primary on off delete as well as Advanced menu listings prompts languages defaults master reset install application and system information Exit Phone Menu Exit the phone menu by pressing OK 1This is a phone dependent feature This is a phone dependent and speed dependent feature If equipped United States only If equipped United States and Canada only Text Messaging Note This is a phone dependent feature SYNC allows you to receive send download and delete text messages The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do not have to take your eyes off the road Receiving a Text Message Note This is a phone dependent feature Your phone must support downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages Note Forwarding a text message is a speed dependent feature and can only be done when the vehicle is traveling at 3 mph 5 km h or less Note Only one recipient is allowed per text message 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 405
17. See the SYNC or MyFord Touch chapter 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Steering Wheel 93 CRUISE CONTROL Type 1 Type 2 See the Cruise Control chapter for information on this feature 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 94 Steering Wheel INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL See the Information Displays chapter for more information Cluster Display Control Features f If equipped with MyFord system This control functions the same as the center control on the faceplate See MyFord system in the Audio Systems chapter MyFord Touch Use this control to adjust the right side of the cluster display Navigate through the screen and press OK to select See the MyFord Touch chapter HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED See the MyFord Touch chapter 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Pedals 95 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED WARNING Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving The control is located on the left side of the steering column Press and hold the appropriate control to move the pedals A Farther P gt B Closer A The pedal positions are saved and recalled with the memory feature if equipped Refer to the Seats chapter The pedals should only be adjusted when the vehicle is parked 2015 Flex 471 Owners
18. 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Audio System 387 SATELLITE RADIO INFORMATION IF EQUIPPED Satellite Radio Channels Sirius broadcasts a variety of music news sports weather traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels For more information and a complete list of Sirius satellite radio channels visit www siriusxm com in the United States www sirius ca in Canada or call Sirius at 1 888 539 7474 Note This receiver includes the eCos real time operating system eCos is published under the eCos License Satellite Radio Reception Factors Potential satellite radio reception issues Antenna For optimal reception performance keep the obstructions antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute Satellite radio signal Your display may show ACQUIRING to interference indicate the interference and the audio system may mute 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 388 Audio System Sirius Satellite Radio Service Note Sirius reserves the unrestricted ri
19. Before making the call e SYNC provides a short window of time about 10 seconds to cancel the call If you fail to cancel the call SYNC attempts to dial 911 e SYNC says the following or a similar message SYNC will attempt to call 911 to cancel the call press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel If you do not cancel the call and SYNC makes a successful call a pre recorded message plays for the 911 operator and then the occupant s in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator Be prepared 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 493 to provide your name phone number and location immediately because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically 911 Assist May Not Work If e Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash e The vehicle s battery or SYNC system has no power e The phones s previously paired or connected to the system are thrown from the vehicle 911 Assist Privacy Notice When you turn on 911 Assist it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash
20. FORD MOTOR COMPANY Customer Relationship Center 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 U S A Telephone 813 594 4857 FAX 813 390 0804 Email expcac ford com For customers in Guam the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands CNMI America Samoa and the U S Virgin Islands please feel free to call our Toll Free Number 800 841 FORD 3673 If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Puerto Rico contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY Customer Relationship Center 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 Telephone 800 841 FORD 8673 FAX 813 390 0804 Email prcac ford com www ford com pr 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 282 Customer Assistance If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the Middle East contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY Customer Relationship Center 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 Telephone 971 4 3326084 Toll Free Number of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia 800 8971409 Local Telephone Number of Kuwait 24810575 FAX 971 4 3327299 Email menacac ford com www me ford com If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to
21. GAW Gross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR Note For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle including all options equipment passengers and cargo The GVWR is shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position The GVW must never exceed the GVWR 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 252 Load Carrying e Example only MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXL ARGAWR XXXXLB XXXXKG WITH XXXXKG WITH TIRES XXXX X
22. New Vehicle Limited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle s New Vehicle Limited Warranty see the warranty information that is provided to you along with your owner s manual Special Instructions For your added safety your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls WARNING Please read the Supplementary Restraints System chapter Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury WARNING Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs However you must not compromise your own or others safety when using such equipment Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used particularly in emergency situations Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits Mobile communication equipment includes but is not limited to cellular phones pagers portable email devices text messaging devices and portable two way radios WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
23. Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 170 Universal Garage Door Opener If Equipped HOMELINK WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED WARNING Make sure that the garage door and security device are free from obstruction when you are programming Do not program the system with the vehicle in the garage WARNING Do not use the system with any garage door opener that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as required by U S Federal Safety Standards this includes any garage door opener manufactured before April 1 1982 Note Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming Note We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your vehicle you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons See Erasing the function button codes later in this section Note You can program a maximum of three devices To change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed you must first erase the current settings See Erasing the function button codes later in this section The universal garage door opener replaces the common hand held garage door opener with a three button transmitter that is integrated into the driver s sun visor The system includes two primary features a garage door opener and a platform for remote activation of devices with the home As well as being programmed fo
24. P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Scheduled Maintenance Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 556 Scheduled Maintenance Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Ho
25. Scheduled Maintenance 549 Multi point Inspection In order to keep your vehicle running right it is important to have the systems on your vehicle checked regularly This can help identify potential issues and prevent major problems Ford Motor Company recommends the following multi point inspection be performed at every scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps running great Accessory drive belt s Battery performance Engine air filter Exhaust system Suspension components for leaks or damage Exterior lamps operation Steering and linkage Fluid levels fill if necessary Tires including spare for wear and proper pressure For oil and fluid leaks Windshield for cracks chips or pits Half shaft dust boots Washer spray and wiper operation ok n Brake coolant recovery reservoir automatic transmission with an underhood dipstick and window washer If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister Replace as needed Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the multi point vehicle inspection It is a comprehensive way to perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle It is your checklist that gives you immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle You will know what has been checked what is okay as well as those things that may require future or immediate attention The
26. WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the transmission is securely latched in park P Failure to set the parking brake and engage park could result in vehicle roll away property damage or bodily injury To set the parking brake press the parking brake pedal down to its fullest extent To release the parking brake press the parking brake pedal down again 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Traction Control 213 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction If your vehicle begins to slide the system applies the brakes to individual wheels and when needed reduces engine power at the same time If the wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces the system reduces engine power in order to increase traction USING TRACTION CONTROL Note If your vehicle is equipped with MyKey it is possible to prevent turning the traction control system off See the MyKey chapter In certain situations for example stuck in snow or mud turning the traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin with full engine power Turn the traction control system off through the information display See the Information Displays chapter System Indicator Lights and Messages WARNING If a failure has been detected within the Traction Control System the stability control light will illumin
27. remove contact lenses if worn flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury e Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin If fuel is splashed on the skin or clothing promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation e Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism Breathing gasoline vapors or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction In sensitive individuals serious personal injury or sickness may result If fuel is splashed on the skin promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction FUEL QUALITY Note Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause powertrain damage and a loss of vehicle performance repairs may not be covered under warranty Choosing the Right Fuel Gasoline Engines Use only UNLEADED gasoline or UNLEADED gasoline blended with a maximum of 15 ethanol in your gasoline vehicle If your vehicle is a Flex Fuel Vehicle FFV it will have a yellow bezel placed over the fuel fill inlet Do not use e Fuels containing more than 15 ethanol or E 85 fuel e Fuels containing methanol e Fuels containing metallic based additives including manganese based
28. 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Introduction 11 SYMBOL GLOSSARY These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle ymbol Symbol Symbol Safety alert See Owner s Anti lock Ci ta system u es Brake fluid Brake system Rm Cabin air non M filter petroleum base Check fuel fa Child Safety Child seat cap Door Lock lower anchor and Unlock Child seat O Cruise Do not open tether anchor control am when hot Engine coolant temperature EN CUT s Fasten safety LJ Front airbag Front fog vis Fuel pump Fuse AN Hazard reset compartment warning flasher Heated rear window luggage compartment release 12 Introduction Symbol Symbol Symbol Lighting Low tire Maintain control pressure correct fluid warning level Parking aid Parking system brake system Power Power steering fluid windows front and rear Service Stability engine soon control Windshield ms Windshield defrost and washer and demist wiper DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle such as engine throttle steering or brake systems In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access
29. BT Devices Add Device 2 Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cellular phone is in the proper mode See your phone s manual if necessary e Select SYNC and a six digit PIN appears on your device 3 If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device it does not support Secure Simple Pairing To pair enter the PIN displayed on the touchscreen Skip the next step 4 When prompted on your phone s display confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cellular phone 5 The display indicates when the pairing is successful SYNC may prompt you with more phone options For more information on your phone s capability see your phone s user guide and visit the website Making Calls EE Press the voice button on your steering wheel controls When i prompted say Call lt name gt or say Dial then the desired number To end the call or exit phone mode press this phone button t Receiving Calls During an incoming call an audible tone sounds Call information appears in the display if it is available po Accept the call by pressing Accept on the touchscreen or by pressing this phone button on your steering wheel controls Reject the call by pressing Reject on the touchscreen or by pressing this phone button on your steering wheel controls Ignore the call by doing nothing SYNC logs it as a missed call 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 4
30. Confirmation prompts on Confirmation prompts off The system creates candidate lists when it has the same confidence level of several options based on your voice command When turned on you may be prompted with as many as four possibilities for clarification For example Say 1 after the tone to call John Doe at home Say 2 after the tone to call Johnny Doe on mobile Say 3 after the tone to call Jane Doe at home Or Say 1 after the tone to play John Doe Say 2 after the tone to play Johnny Doe Phone candidate lists on Phone candidate lists off Media candidate lists on Media candidate lists off Helpful Hints e Make sure the interior of the vehicle is as quiet as possible Wind noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from correctly recognizing spoken commands e After pressing the voice icon wait until after the tone sounds and Listening appears before saying a command Any command spoken prior to this does not register with the system 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 397 e Speak naturally without long pauses between words e At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by pressing the voice icon USING SYNC WITH YOUR PHONE Hands free calling is one of the main features of SYNC While the system supports a variety of features many are dependent on your cellular phone s functionali
31. INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE TELENAV SOFTWARE SOME STATES AND OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 6 Arbitration and Governing Law You agree that any dispute claim or controversy arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the Telenav Software shall be settled by independent arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered by the American Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara California The arbitrator shall apply the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association and the judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any court having jurisdiction Note that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator shall be binding upon both parties You expressly agree to waive your right to a jury trial This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California without giving effect to its conflict of laws provisions To the extent judicial action is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration both Telenav and you agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the County of Santa Clara
32. SOFTWARE s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content This action does not affect unprotected content When your DEVICE downloads licenses for protected content you agree that Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses Content owners may require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE to access their content If you decline an upgrade you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade Consent to Use of Data You agree that MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and systems suppliers their affiliates and or their designated agent may collect and use technical information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and services suppliers their affiliates and or their designated agent may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide customized services or technologies to you MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and systems suppliers their affiliates and or their designated agent may disclose this information to others but not in a form that personally identifies you e Internet Based Services Components The SOFTWARE may contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain Internet based services You acknowledge and agree that MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY thi
33. The system will not apply the brakes Change down a gear to assist the system in maintaining the set speed Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control serious injury or death Note Cruise control will disengage if your vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph 16 km h below your set speed while driving uphill The cruise controls are located on A the steering wheel cel Switching Cruise Control On Press the ON control up and release K The indicator will appear in the instrument cluster Setting a Speed 1 Accelerate to the desired speed 2 Press the SET control upward and release 3 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal The indicator will change colors in the instrument cluster 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 228 Cruise Control Changing the Set Speed Note If you accelerate by pressing the accelerator pedal the set speed will not change When you release the accelerator pedal you will return to the speed that you previously set e Press SET up or down and hold to increase or decrease the set speed Release the control when you reach the desired speed e Press SET up or down and release The set speed will change in approximately 1 mph 2 km h increments e Press the accelerator pedal or brake pedal until you reach the desired speed Press SET up and release Canceling the Set Speed Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal The set speed will
34. This screen displays either a facility photo if available or point of interest icons such as f Hotel om Coffeehouse LT Food amp Drink Nightlife e Attraction 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 514 MyFord Touch If Equipped This icon appears when your selection exists in multiple os categories within the system When you are viewing more information for hotels cityseekr also tells you if the hotel has certain services and facilities using icons Hotel services and facilities 2 Restaurant 24 Hr Room Service amp Business Center i Fitness Center amp Handicap Facilities amp Laundry t Refrigerator Wi Fi For restaurants cityseekr can provide information such as star rating average cost review handicap access hours of operation and website address For hotels cityseekr can provide information such as star rating price category review check in and check out times hotel service icons and website address Setting Your Navigation Preferences Select settings for the system to take into account when planning your route Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Navigation Map Preferences Breadcrumbs displays your vehicle s previously traveled route with white dots Turn this feature ON or OFF Turn List Format allows you to choose to have the system display your turn list Top to Bottom or Bottom to Top Parking POI Notificat
35. View categorized lists of voice commands To access Help using the voice commands press the voice button then after the tone say Help The system provides allowable voice commands for the current mode 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 507 CLIMATE Press the lower right corner on the touchscreen to access your climate control features Depending on your vehicle line and option package your climate screen may look different from the screen shown here A Power Touch to switch the system off and on Switching off the climate control system prevents outside air from entering the vehicle Passenger settings Touch DUAL to switch on the passenger temperature control Touch or to adjust the temperature Touch the heated seat icon to control the heated seat Touch the cooled seat icon to control the cooled seat Fan speed Touch or to adjust fan speed J Q e e oeeo Y Rear Touch to access the rear climate control Rear climate control settings appear at the bottom of the screen e Touch the power icon to turn the rear climate control functions off and on e Touch Rear Control to allow the rear seat passengers to adjust the rear climate settings Touch it again to prevent the rear seat passengers from adjusting the settings Rear Control automatically turns off when you use the touchscreen to adjust the rear climate settings
36. What s playing l lt name gt is a dynamic listing meaning that it could be the name of any desired group artist etc 2Voice commands which are only available in folder mode Voice commands which are not available until indexing is complete Voice command guide Autoplay Turn on to listen to music which has already been randomly indexed during the indexing process Turn off and the system does not begin to play any of your music until all media has all been indexed Indexing times can vary from device to device and also with regard to the number of songs being indexed Search Play Genre The system searches all the data from your indexed music and if available begins to play the chosen type of music You can only play genres of music which are present in the GENRE metadata tags that you have on your digital media player Similar Music The system compiles a playlist and then plays similar music to what is currently playing from the USB port using indexed metadata information Search Play The system searches for a specific Artist Track Album artist track album from the music indexed through the USB port 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 423 Refine This allows you to make your previous command more specific For example if you asked to search and play all music by a certain artist you could then say refine album and choose a spe
37. age and weight Child safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child WARNING All children are shaped differently The recommendations for safety restraints are based on probable child height age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety organizations or are the minimum requirements of law Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and consulting your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child and is compatible with and properly installed in your vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your provincial ministry of transportation or locate your local St John Ambulance office by searching for St John Ambulance on the internet or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 http www tc gc ca Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height age and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child WARNING Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle On hot days the temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior can r
38. anchors and top tether Rear facing child seat Rear facing child seat Forward facing child seat Forward facing child seat Note The child seat must rest tightly against the vehicle seat upon which it is installed It may be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint See the Seats chapter for information on head restraints 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Child Safety 37 CHILD SAFETY LOCKS The childproof locks are located on the rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door Setting the lock for one door will not automatically set the lock for both doors e Insert the key and turn to the lock position key horizontal to engage the childproof locks Insert the key and turn to the unlock position key vertical to disengage the childproof locks When these locks are set the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside The rear doors can be opened from the outside when the childproof door locks are set but the doors are unlocked 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 38 Safety Belts PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a crash which may result in serio
39. appears for a few seconds Note The code may not display until after any other warning messages first display 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Security 85 SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI THEFT SYSTEM Note The system is not compatible with non Ford aftermarket remote start systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection Note Metallic objects electronic devices or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues if they are too close to the key when starting your vehicle Prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine Switch the ignition off move all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart your vehicle if a problem occurs Note Do not leave a duplicate coded key in your vehicle Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle The system helps prevent the engine from starting unless you use a coded key programmed to your vehicle Using the wrong key may prevent your vehicle from starting A message may appear in the information display If you are unable to start your vehicle with a correctly coded key a malfunction has occurred A message may appear in the information display Automatic Arming Your vehicle arms immediately after you switch the ignition off Automatic Disarming Your vehicle disarms when you switch the ignition on with
40. contacts or recent phone call entries See the following chart for more specific examples Restricted Features Cellular Phone Pairing a Bluetooth phone phonebook contacts from a USB recent phone call entries System Functionality Editing settings while the rear view camera or Active Park Assist are active Wi Fi and Wireless Editing wireless settings Editing the list of wireless networks Videos Photos and Playing video wallpaper Text Messages Navigation Adding or Editing Address Book entries or Avoid Areas 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 448 MyFord Touch If Equipped Privacy information When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC SYNC creates a profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone This profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more efficiently Among other things this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book text messages read and unread and call history including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to SYNC In addition if you connect a media device SYNC creates and retains an index of media content supported by SYNC SYNC also records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent SYNC activity The log profile and other SYNC data may be used to improve SYNC and help diagnose any problems that may occur The cellular profile
41. folder T001 track to F253 T255 e Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation through the disc files If you are burning your own MP3 discs it is important to understand how the system reads the structures you create While various files may be present files with extensions other than mp3 only files with the mp3 extension are played other files are ignored by the system This enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety of tasks on your work computer home computer and your in vehicle system In track mode the system displays and plays the structure as if it were only one level deep all mp3 files play regardless of being in a specific folder In folder mode the system only plays the mp3 files in the current folder 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 376 Audio System MyFord SYSTEM A WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving Note Some features such as Sirius satellite radio
42. for example driven more than 1 mile 1 6 kilometers never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated Note If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive 2 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure 3 Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure Note If you overfill the tire release air by pressing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 4 Replace the valve cap 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 342 Wheels and Tires 5 Repeat this procedure for each tire including the spare Note Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires For T type mini spare tires see the Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information section Store and maintain at 60 psi 4 15 bar For full size and dissimilar spare tires see Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information under Changing a Road Wheel in this chapter Store and maintain at the
43. lens The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions These are examples of acceptable condensation e Presence of thin mist no streaks drip marks or droplets e Fine mist covers less than 50 of the lens These are examples of unacceptable moisture usually caused by a lamp water leak e Water puddle inside the lamp e Large water droplets drip marks or streaks present on the interior of the lens Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of unacceptable moisture are present 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 316 Maintenance Replacing headlamp bulbs AN WARNING Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children s reach Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated Note If the bulb is accidentally touched it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol before being used 1 Make sure headlamp switch is in the off position then open the hood 2 Reach in behind the headlamp assembly to access the bulb sockets and connectors 3 Locate the high beam low beam headlamp bulb electrical connector and remove it by squeezing the locking tab and pulling it straight out 4 Remove the bulb socket by turning it counterc
44. lt name gt 3 Supported Media Players Formats and Metadata Information SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including iPod Zune plays from device players and most USB drives Supported audio formats include MP3 WMA WAV and AAC It is also able to organize your indexed media from your playing device by metadata tags Metadata tags which are descriptive software identifiers embedded in the media files provide information about the file If your indexed media files contain no information embedded in these metadata tags SYNC may classify the empty metadata tags as Unknown In order to playback video from your iPod or iPhone if compatible you MUST have a special combination USB RCA composite video cable which you can buy from Apple When the cable is connected to your iPod or iPhone plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the USB port 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 473 Bluetooth Audio Your system allows you to stream audio over your vehicle s speakers from your connected Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To access press the lower left corner on the touchscreen then J select the BT Stereo tab Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands E If you are listening to a Bluetooth audio device press the voice uh button on the steering wheel control When prompted say Next song Pause
45. may not be available in your location Check with an authorized dealer A RADIO Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequency bands Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio functions B CD Press this button to listen to a CD Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select on screen options of Repeat or Shuffle 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Audio System 377 D Memory presets In radio mode store your favorite radio stations To store a radio station tune to the station then press and hold a preset button until sound returns In CD mode press one of these buttons to select a track Function buttons Select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode you are in such as Radio mode or CD mode E nj H I e e J TUNE In radio mode turn the control to manually search the frequency band In satellite radio mode turn the control to tune to the next or previous channel Reverse and Fast Forward AM FM CD Seek In radio mode select a frequency band and press one of these buttons The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction Press and hold one of these buttons to move quickly in that direction to the next strong radio station or memory preset In Sirius mode press one of these buttons to select the previous or next channel If you select a specific
46. media device index and development log will remain in the vehicle unless you delete it and are generally accessible only in the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected If you no longer plan to use SYNC or the vehicle we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all information stored in SYNC SYNC data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to the vehicle s SYNC module Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada will not access SYNC data for any purpose other than as described absent consent a court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada For further privacy information see the sections on 911 Assist if equipped Vehicle Health Report Gf equipped and Traffic Directions and Information if equipped 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 449 ACCESSING AND ADJUSTING MODES THROUGH YOUR RIGHT VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY IF EQUIPPED The display is located on the right side of your instrument cluster You can use your steering wheel controls to view and make minor adjustments to active modes without taking your hands off the wheel For example e In Entertainment mode you can view what is now playing change the audio source
47. separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The service is available e 24 hours a day seven days a week e For the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner s Manual portfolio Roadside assistance will cover e A flat tire change with a good spare except vehicles that have been supplied with a tire inflation kit e Battery jump start e Lock out assistance key replacement cost is the customer s responsibility e Fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors if not prohibited by state local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2 0 gallons 7 5 liters of gasoline or 5 0 gallons 18 9 liters of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle Fuel delivery service is limited to two no charge occurrences within a 12 month period e Winch out available within 100 feet 30 5 meters of a paved or county maintained road no recoveries e Towing Ford eligible vehicles will be towed to an authorized dealer within 35 miles 56 3 kilometers of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer If a member requests to be towed to an authorized dealer more than 35 miles 56 3 kilometers from the disablement location the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles 56 3 kilometers Roadside Assistance will include up to 200 coverage for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer If the towing vehic
48. subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel No Signal The signal is lost from The signal is blocked the Sirius satellite or When you move into Sirius tower to your an open area the vehicle antenna signal should return 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 467 Sirius troubleshooting tips Radio display Possible action Updating Update of channel No action required programming in The process may take progress up to three minutes Call SIRIUS Your satellite service is Contact Sirius at 1 888 539 7474 no longer available 1 888 539 7474 to resolve subscription issues None Found Check All the channels in the Use the channel guide Channel Guide selected channels are to turn off the Lock either skipped or or Skip function on locked that station Subscription Updated Sirius has updated the No action required channels available for your vehicle CD Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen and then select D the CD tab You can also advance and reverse the current track or current folder if applicable Repeat Touch this button to repeat the currently playing track all tracks on the disc or turn the feature off if already on Shuffle Touch this button to play the tracks or entire albums in random order or turn the feature off if already on Scan Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of all availab
49. such as AM FM and CD and scroll through memory presets e In Phone mode you can accept or reject an incoming call or make a call by choosing from select menus within the Phone menu e If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation you can view the current route or cancel a route Note If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation Compass appears in the display instead of Navigation If you press the right arrow to go into the Compass menu you can see the compass graphic The compass displays the direction in which the vehicle is traveling not true direction For example if the vehicle is traveling west the middle of the compass graphic displays west north displays to the left of west though its true direction is to the right of west 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 450 MyFord Touch If Equipped Audio Sources and Memory Presets Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right side of your steering wheel to scroll through the available modes You can make selections from the menu by using the OK button The selection menu expands and different options appear e Press OK to enter the mode e Press the left or right arrows to make adjustments within the chosen mode Small white arrows appear in the menu you are in which indicate that you can scroll in those directions to enter more menus e Press OK to confirm your selection Pressing the up and down arrow buttons in the current
50. when you release it 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 98 Lighting LIGHTING CONTROL A Off B Parking lamps instrument panel lamps license plate lamps and tail lamps C Headlamps e Push the lever toward the instrument panel to activate e Push the lever toward the instrument panel again or pull the lever towards you to deactivate Headlamp Flasher ePull toward you slightly to activate and release to deactivate 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Lighting 99 AUTOLAMPS If equipped WARNING The autolamps switch position may not activate the headlamps in all low visibility conditions such as daytime fog Always ensure that your headlamps are switched to auto or on as appropriate during all low visibility conditions Failure to do so may result in a collision When the lighting control is in the autolamps position the headlamps will automatically turn on in low light situations or when wipers are activated The headlamps remain on for a period of time after you switch the ignition off Use the information display controls to adjust the period of time that the headlamps remain on Note If your vehicle is equipped with autolamps it will have the windshield wiper activated headlamps The windshield wiper activated headlamps turn on within 10 seconds when you switch the windshield wipers on and the lighting control
51. your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel anti lock brake system ABS do not pump the brakes Refer to the Brakes chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti lock brake system Maintenance and Modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability For this reason Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts such as lift kits or stabilizer bars or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device such as ladder or luggage racks Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty increase your repair cost reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to off highway usage 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Brakes 211 GENERAL INFORMATION Note Occasional brake noise is normal If a metal to metal continuous grinding or continuous
52. 1 888 539 7474 Potential satellite radio reception issues Antenna For optimal reception performance keep the obstructions antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other materials as far away from the antenna as possible Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 466 MyFord Touch If Equipped Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute Satellite radio signal Your display may show ACQUIRING to interference indicate the interference and the audio system may mute Sirius troubleshooting tips Radio display Possible action Radio requires more No action required than two seconds to This message should produce audio for the disappear shortly selected channel Sat Fault SIRIUS There is an internal If this message does system failure module or system not clear shortly or failure present with an ignition key cycle your receiver may have a fault See your authorized dealer for service Invalid Channel The channel is no Tune to another longer available channel or choose another preset Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does Contact Sirius at not include this 1 888 539 7474 to channel
53. 10 minutes After the engine has been restarted and the AWD system has adequately cooled the AWD Off message will turn off and normal AWD function will return In the event the engine is not stopped the AWD Off message will turn off when the system cools and normal AWD function returns When driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures use L Low gear when possible L Low gear operation will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability Under severe operating conditions the A C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine Avoid driving at excessive speeds this causes vehicle momentum to work against you and your vehicle could become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle Remember you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution Mud and Water If you must drive through high water drive slowly Traction or brake capability may be limited When driving through water determine the depth avoid water higher than the bottom of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks if possible and proceed slowly If the ignition system gets wet the vehicle may stall Once through water always try the brakes Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
54. 2014 USA fus 496 MyFord Touch If Equipped You can also turn the outside air temperature display on and off It appears at the top center of the touchscreen next to the time and date The system automatically saves any updates you make to the settings Display You can adjust the touchscreen display through the touchscreen or by pressing the voice button on your steering wheel controls and when prompted say Display settings Press the Settings icon gt Display to access and make adjustments using the touchscreen e Brightness allows you to make the screen display brighter or dimmer e Auto DIM when set to On lets you use the Auto Dim Manual Offset feature When set to Off screen brightness does not change e Mode allows you to set the screen to a certain brightness or have the system automatically change based on the outside light level or turn the display off e If you select AUTO or NIGHT you have the options of turning the displays Auto Dim feature on or off and changing the Auto Dim Manual Offset feature e Auto Dim Manual Offset allows you to adjust screen dimming as the outside lighting conditions change from day to night This feature also allows you to adjust screen brightness using the instrument panel dimming control Edit Wallpaper e You can have your touchscreen display the default photo or upload your own Uploading Photos for Your Home Screen Wallpaper Note You cannot load photos direct
55. 322 Cleaning the engine llli 322 Cleaning the windows and wiper blades lille 323 Cleaning the interior 2 324 Cleaning the instrument panel and instrument cluster lens 324 Cleaning leather Seats cie Xe ae ok babe kee eee eS 325 Cleaning the alloy wheels 0 0000000000 eene 326 Vehicle Storage cusa end Los RE RS ate e ee Gee das es 327 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 8 Table of Contents Wheels and Tires 330 jii ORE 332 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS issus 348 Changing a road wheel llle 353 Technical specifications llle 359 Wheel lug nut ToFqUe scp avec ne xt RE REDE ERR ed 359 Capacities and Specifications 361 Engine specifications 2046 e05 e e p p RA 361 Engme drvebelt 42 5435 4 sonans e eo Usa eet icut op dica 361 Maintenance product specifications and capacities 362 Part numiberS ve Rowe aa Re Ra ee CELE ERE wee eee eae 366 Vehicle identification number 0 0 0 0 000000 eee 367 Vehicle certification label 0 0 00 0c ee eee 368 Transmission code designation 0 0 00000 ee ee eee 368 Accessories 369 Accessories oss aac RATE Hons dead e pU poate Rapid Rd we ah BA Wi Rc Se eae 369 Extended Service Plan 371 Audio System 374 MyFord M system a sca c4800n0ad Ads RET wee REESE 376 Satellite radio information 0 0 0 00000000 eee ee eee 387 Aupa
56. 57 If the airbag readiness light is lit do the following The driver and adult passengers should check for objects lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat If there are lodged objects or cargo is interfering with the seat take the following steps to remove the obstruction e Pull the vehicle over Turn the vehicle off Driver and adult passengers should check for any objects lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat e Remove the obstruction s if found Restart the vehicle e Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light in the instrument cluster is no longer illuminated If the airbag readiness light in the instrument cluster remains illuminated this may or may not be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system Do not attempt to repair or service the system Take your vehicle immediately to an authorized dealer If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer Assistance section of this owner s manual SIDE AIRBAGS WARNING Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag Failure to follow these instructions may increase the
57. Advance Dbae B 2 64 6 ed s ee bere eo Sante food done Seed Parking Aids SENSING syste cs goad chia eee o Geo ae ES EAS the Active park assisto nos ox a XR RS Ye ee A EG Rear view camera system llle Cruise Control Using cruise control llli ees Using Adaptive Cruise Control lille 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 6 Table of Contents Driving Aids 237 Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert OTA o dua btn td oene ey doce sep 484 bbee S CY 237 Collision warning system llle 241 DLECIING 4 608 onto ape eps Ea ee ee ee Oo ea eats es debes 245 Load Carrying 247 Cargo Nes veg Rea ae BR EG Rd ded du dede m ee ep 247 Roof racks and load carriers 0 00 000000 eee eee eae 247 Vehicle loading d eee ganas oh x XR re Gols e d a Ree aca 248 Towing 256 Trailer TOWNS x i3 6 cit Shas ae ER RR AUREUUEG E ARX UE Ape E 256 Wrecker towing cee EE a EE ees 264 Recreational towing s gss ca 0 ee nee 265 Driving Hints 267 Economical driving i i suum bons boob eddy wee ge bees 267 HOOP MAUS 2 elas 2 cack bac es xe ouem slc Ga a ee Bd 268 Roadside Emergencies 270 Getting roadside assistance 1 ee es 270 Hazard warning flashers 0 0 0 0000000 272 Fuel cut off Switch lt 2 du ee decre uu ode dee wy Veg e eT E 272 Jump starting the vehicle 0 0 0 0 ee 273 Customer Assistance 276 Reporting safety defects U S o
58. CONTROL A Fan Speed Turn to increase or decrease the fan speed Select O to switch the rear climate system fan off B Overhead Distributes air through the overhead vents C Overhead Floor Distributes air through the overhead vents and floor vents D Floor Distributes air through the floor vents E Temperature control Controls the temperature of the air circulated in the rear of the vehicle Turn to select the desired temperature 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 144 Climate Control F Passenger side heated seat controls if equipped Press to switch the heated seats off and on See Heated seats in the Seats chapter for more information G REAR LOCK Illuminates when the rear climate system is being controlled by the front controls The rear climate controls do not work when this is illuminated H Driver side heated seat controls if equipped Press to switch the heated seats off and on See Heated seats in the Seats chapter for more information GENERAL OPERATING TIPS General Hints Note Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to fog up Note You may feel a small amount of air from the footwell air vents regardless of the air distribution setting Note To reduce humidity build up inside your vehicle do not drive with the system switched off or with recirculated air always switched on Note Do not place objects under the front seats as this may i
59. Doing so will defeat the function of the weight distributing hitch which may cause unpredictable handling and could result in serious personal injury When hooking up a trailer using a weight distributing hitch always use the following procedure 1 Park your vehicle without the trailer on a level surface 2 Measure the height of the top of your vehicle s front wheel opening on the fender This is H1 Attach the trailer to your vehicle without the weight distributing bars connected Measure the height of the top of your vehicle s front wheel opening on the fender a second time This is H2 Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars so that the height of the front fender is approximately halfway between H1 and H2 6 Check that the trailer is level If not level adjust the ball height accordingly and repeat Steps 3 6 Sv oe Safety Chains Note Never attach safety chains to the bumper Always connect the safety chains to the hook retainers of your vehicle hitch To connect the safety chains cross them under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning tight corners Do not allow the chains to drag on the ground 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Towing 261 Trailer Brakes WARNING Do not connect a trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle s brake system Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances
60. Extended Service Plan With Ford ESP you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs Up to 1 000 Covered Vehicle Components There are four Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage Ask your authorized dealer for details 1 PremiumCARE Our most comprehensive coverage With over 1 000 covered components this plan is so complete that we generally only discuss what s not covered 2 ExtraCARE Covers 113 components and includes many high tech items 3 BaseCARE Covers 84 components 4 PowertrainCARE Covers 29 critical components Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by all authorized Ford dealers in the U S and Canada It is the only extended service plan authorized and backed by Ford Motor Company That means you get e Reliable quality service at any Ford or Lincoln dealership e Repairs performed by factory trained technicians using genuine parts Rental Car Reimbursement Ist day Rental Benefit You take advantage of replacement transportation if your vehicle is at your authorized dealer for same day covered repairs Extended Rental Benefits If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs you are eligible for rental car coverage including bumper to bumper warranty repairs and Field Service Actions 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 372 Extended Service Plan Roadside Assistance Exclusive 24 7 roadside assistance in
61. FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT REVENUE CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS OR ANY OTHER DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA ANY DEFECT IN THIS DATA OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY EVEN IF HERE OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Some States Territories and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations so to that extent the above may not apply to you Export Control You agree not to export from anywhere any part of the Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with and with all licenses and approvals required under applicable export laws rules and regulations including but not limited to the laws rules and regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U S Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security of the U S Department of Commerce To the extent that any such export laws rules or regulations prohibit HERE from complying with any of its obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data such failure shall be excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement Entire Agreement These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between HERE and its licensors including their licensors and suppliers and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof and supersed
62. Force the seat down with extra weight for example by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt for standard safety belt or pulling down on the lap belt for inflatable safety belt in order to force slack from the belt This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the extra weight of the child is added to the child restraint It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to your vehicle Sometimes a slight lean toward the buckle will provide extra help to remove remaining slack from the belt e Standard safety belt v e 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Child Safety 25 e Inflatable safety belt 9 Attach the tether strap if the child seat is equipped See Using Tether Straps later in this chapter 10 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path T and attempt to move it side to side 7 and forward and back There should L ew be no more than 1 inch 2 5 centimeters of movement for proper installation Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a Child Passenger Safety Technician
63. Fuel Economy increase fuel economy Engine Shuts Off in Displays when the engine is getting ready to XX Seconds Press OK shut off You can press OK on the left steering to Override wheel button to override the shut down AWD Messages Action Description AWD Off Displayed when the AWD system has been automatically disabled to protect itself This is caused by operating the vehicle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system is overheating The AWD system will resume normal function and clear this message after driving a short distance with the road tire re installed or after the system is allowed to cool Check AWD Displayed in conjunction with the Throttle Control Transmission AWD light when the AWD system is not operating properly If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 132 Information Displays Battery and Action Description Charging System Messages Check Charging Displayed when the charging system needs System servicing If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Turn Power Off to Displayed when the battery management Save Battery system determines that e the battery is at a low state of charge or e the ignition has been in accessory position or on position with the engine off for approximately 45 minutes
64. Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 96 Wipers and Washers WINDSHIELD WIPERS Note Fully defrost the windshield before switching on the windshield wipers Note Make sure you switch off the windshield wipers before entering a car wash Note Clean the windshield and wiper blades if they begin to leave streaks or smears If that does not resolve the issue install new wiper blades Note Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield Rotate the end of the control away from you to increase the speed of the wipers Rotate toward you to decrease the speed of the wipers Speed dependent Wipers If Equipped When your vehicle speed increases the interval between wipes will decrease when intermittent wipe is selected RAIN SENSING WIPERS IF EQUIPPED Note Wet road conditions may result in inconsistent or unexpected wiping or smearing Lower the sensitivity switch to normal or high speed wiping or turn the wipers off to reduce smearing Note Turn off the wipers before entering a car wash Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity to one of the interval moisture settings The wipers will not cycle until moisture is detected on the windshield The wiper speed will vary based on the amount of moisture detected on the windshield and the sensitivity se
65. HD7 channels You may see the HD logo appear if the station has a digital broadcast 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 459 e Memory presets allow you to save an active channel as a memory preset Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station Sound returns when finished When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset the sound mutes before the digital audio plays because the system has to reacquire the digital signal e Note As with any saved radio station you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station s reception area HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential Reception Issues Reception area Station blending If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area the station may mute due to weak signal strength If you are listening to HD1 the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again However if you are listening to any of the possible HD2 through HD7 multicast channels the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again When the system first receives a station aside from HD2 HD7 multicast stations it first plays the station in the analog version Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio statio
66. Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Parking Aids 219 Using Active Park Assist Press the button the touch screen AUTO displays a message and a corresponding graphic to indicate it s searching for a parking space p Use the turn signal to indicate which side of the vehicle you want the system to search on Note If the turn signal is not on the system automatically searches on the vehicle s passenger side When a suitable space is found the touch screen displays a message and a chime sounds Slow down and stop at approximately position A then follow the instructions on the touch screen Note You must observe that the selected space remains clear of obstructions at all times in the maneuver Note Vehicles with overhanging loads e g a bus or a truck street furniture and other items may not be detected by active park assist You must ensure the selected space is suitable for parking Note The vehicle should be driven as parallel to other vehicles as possible while passing a parking space Note The system always offers the last detected parking space i e if the vehicle detects multiple spaces while you are driving it offers the last one Note If driven above approximately 20 mph 35 km h the touch screen shows a message to alert the driver to reduce vehicle speed 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 220 Parking Aids Automatic Steering
67. P and ignition off after you close the door your vehicle will search for an intelligent access key in the passenger compartment If your vehicle finds a key all of the doors will immediately unlock and the horn will sound indicating that a key is inside You can override the smart unlock feature and intentionally lock the intelligent access key inside your vehicle To do this lock your vehicle after you have closed all the doors by e using the keyless entry keypad e pressing the lock button on another intelligent access key e touching the locking area on the handle with another intelligent access key in your hand When you open one of the front doors and lock your vehicle using the power door lock control all doors will lock then unlock if e the ignition is on or e the ignition is off and the transmission is not in P 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Locks 77 Autolock Feature If Enabled The autolock feature will lock all the doors when e all the doors are closed e the ignition is on e you shift into any gear putting your vehicle in motion and e your vehicle reaches a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h The autolock feature repeats when e you open then close any door while the ignition is on and the vehicle speed is 9 mph 15 km h or lower and e your vehicle then reaches a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h Autounlock Feature If Enabled The autounlock feature wi
68. Printing October 2014 USA fus Child Safety 23 4 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it P e Po e Standard safety belt buckle e Inflatable safety belt buckle 5 To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode do the following e Standard safety belt grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 24 Child Safety e Inflatable safety belt grasp the lap portion of the inflatable safety belt and pull upward until all of the belt is pulled out Note Unlike the standard safety belt the inflatable safety belt s unique lap portion locks the child seat for installation The ability for the shoulder portion of the belt to move freely is normal even after the lap belt has been put into the automatic locking mode 6 Allow the belt to retract to remove slack The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode 7 Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode you should not be able to pull more belt out If the retractor is not locked repeat Steps 5 and 6 8 Remove remaining slack from the belt
69. The controls are located on the steering wheel At startup the system sets the gap to the last selected setting Once activated you can deactivate the system at any time by pressing the brake pedal pressing the steering wheel OFF control or pressing the CNCL control In addition you can temporarily increase the vehicle speed above the current speed by manually pressing on the accelerator pedal The controls for using your cruise control are located on the steering wheel 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 230 Cruise Control Setting Adaptive Cruise Control 1 Press and release ON The information display will show the gray indicator light current gap setting and SET The system is set to standby mode 2 Accelerate to the desired speed 3 Press SET upward and release The vehicle speed is stored in the memory me The information display will show a green indicator light current gap setting and desired set speed 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal ch 5 A lead vehicle graphic will illuminate if there is a vehicle detected in front of you Note When adaptive cruise control is active the speedometer may vary slightly from the set speed displayed in the information display Following a Vehicle WARNING When following a vehicle in front of you your vehicle will not decelerate automatically to a stop nor will your vehicle always decelerate quickly enou
70. Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear 11 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Wheels and Tires 333 Traction AAA BC WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Temperature A B C WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separ
71. When a new message arrives an audible tone sounds and the display indicates you have a new message You have these options 1 Press the voice button wait for the prompt and say Read Message to have SYNC read the message to you 2 Press OK to receive and open the text message or do nothing and the message goes into your text message inbox Press OK again and SYNC reads your message aloud as you are not able to view the message You can then also choose whether you d like to reply or forward the message 3 Press OK and scroll to choose between e Reply to Text Message Press OK to access and then scroll through the list of pre defined messages to send e Forward Text Message Press OK to forward the message to anyone in your Phonebook or Call History You can also choose Enter Number Sending Downloading and Deleting Your Text Messages Text messaging is a phone dependent feature If your phone is compatible SYNC allows you to receive send download and delete text messages 1 Press the phone button 2 Scroll until Text Message appears and press OK 3 Scroll to select from the following options Send Text Message enables you to send a new text message based on a pre defined set of 15 messages Download Unread Msgs allows you to download your unread messages only to SYNC To download the messages press OK to select The display indicates your messages are being downloaded When complete SYNC takes you to your in
72. You cannot erase individual buttons 1 Press and hold the outer two function buttons simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lights above the buttons flash rapidly 2 When the indicator lights flash release the buttons The codes for all buttons are erased Reprogramming a single button To program a device to a previously trained button follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired button Do NOT release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the button follow Step 1 in the Programming section For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Universal Garage Door Opener If Equipped 173 Programming HomeLink to a Genie Intellicode 2 garage door opener Note The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter must already be programmed to operate with the garage door opener Programing the transmitters To program HomeLink to the transmitter you must first put the transmitter into programming mode To do this A Red LED B Green LED 1 Press and hold one of the buttons on the hand held transmitter for 10 seconds The LED light will change from green to green and red 2 Press the same button twice to confirm the change to Programming mode If done properly the LED light will appear red 3 Hold the transmitter within 1 3 inches 2 8
73. a coded key Replacement Keys Note Your vehicle comes with two integrated keyhead transmitters or two intelligent access keys The integrated keyhead transmitter functions as a programmed ignition key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle as well as a remote control The intelligent access key functions as a programmed key that operates the driver door lock and activates the intelligent access with push button start systems as well as a remote control 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 86 Security If your programmed transmitters or standard SecuriLock coded keys integrated keyhead transmitters only are lost or stolen and you do not have an extra coded key you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences See an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys Programming a Spare Integrated Keyhead Transmitter Note A maximum of eight coded keys can be programmed to your vehicle Only four of these eight can be integrated keyhead transmitters You can program your own integrated keyhead transmitters or standard SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle This procedure will program both the engine immobilizer key code and the remote entry portio
74. and front passenger seats e Front passenger sensing system e Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in this chapter Note The passenger sensing system will deactivate the passenger seat mounted side airbag if it detects an empty passenger seat The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags ry 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Supplementary Restraints System 59 SAFETY CANOPY CURTAIN AIRBAGS WARNING Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying curtain airbag Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The curtain airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the curtain airbags its fuses the A B C or D pillar trim or the headliner on a vehicle containing curtain airbags as you could be seriously injured or killed Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING All
75. as the same way you California remix featuring are saying it Jennifer Nettles e f the songs are saved in all CAPS you have to spell them LOLA requires you to say Play L O L A e Do not use special characters in the title as the system does not recognize them 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 437 Voice command issues cause s SYNC does not understand or is calling the wrong contact when I want to make a call 2015 Flex 471 e You may be using the wrong voice commands OR e You may not be saying the name exactly as it is saved OR e Contacts in your phonebook may be very short and similar or they may contain special characters OR e Your phonebook contacts may be saved in CAPS e Review the phone voice commands at the beginning of the phone section e Make sure you are saying the contacts exactly as listed For example if a contact is saved as Joe Wilson say Call Joe Wilson e The system works better if you list full names such as Joe Wilson rather than Joe e Do not use special characters such as 123 or ICE as the system does not recognize them e If contacts are saved in CAPS you have to spell them JAKE requires you to say Call J A K E Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 438 SYNC Possible solution s cause s AppLink Mobile An AppLink e Ensure you have a c
76. available Press OK to select then press OK again to confirm 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 403 Call History Allows you to access any previously dialed received or missed calls while your phone has been connected to the system 1 Press OK to select 2 Scroll to select from Call History Incoming Call History Outgoing or Call History Missed Press OK make your selection 3 Press OK or the phone button to call the desired selection Note The system attempts to automatically re download your phone book and call history each time your phone connects to SYNC if the auto download feature is on and your Bluetooth enabled cellular phone supports this feature Phonebook Allows you to access your downloaded phonebook 1 Press OK to confirm and enter If your phonebook has fewer than 255 listings they appear alphabetically in flat file mode If there are more they are organized into alphabetical categories 2 Scroll until the desired contact appears then press OK 3 Press OK or the phone button Text Message Enables you to send download and delete text messages Phone Settings Allows you to view your phone s status set ring tones select your message notification change phone book entries and automatically download your cellular phone among other features 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 404 SYNC
77. because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components If you have run out of fuel You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine On restarting crank time will be a few seconds longer than normal With keyless ignition just start the engine Crank time will be longer than usual Normally adding 1 gallon 3 8 liters of fuel is enough to restart the engine If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade more than 1 gallon 3 8 liters may be required The service engine soon indicator may come on For more information on the service engine soon indicator see Warning Lamps and Indicators in the Instrument Cluster chapter 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 192 Fuel and Refueling Refilling with a Portable Fuel Container WARNING Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container or aftermarket funnel into the capless fuel system This could damage the fuel system and its seal and may cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of filling the tank which could result in serious personal injury WARNING Do not try to pry open or push open the capless fuel system with foreign objects This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others Note Do not use aftermarket funnels they will not work with the capless fuel system and can dama
78. behind the vehicle This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen In some vehicles the guidelines may disappear once the trailer tow connector is engaged Note The camera may not operate correctly under the following conditions e Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not operating e The camera s view is obstructed by mud water or debris Clean the lens with a soft lint free cloth and non abrasive cleaner e The rear of the vehicle is hit or damaged causing the camera to become misaligned Guidelines and the Centerline Note Fixed guidelines and active guidelines if equipped are only available when the transmission is in R Reverse A Active guidelines if equipped A BC D E B Centerline C Fixed guideline Green zone D Fixed guideline Yellow zone A E Fixed guideline Red zone NY F Rear bumper hear 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Parking Aids 225 If your vehicle is equipped with active guidelines they are only shown with fixed guidelines To use active guidelines turn the steering wheel to point the guidelines toward an intended path If the steering wheel position is changed while reversing the vehicle might deviate from the original intended path The fixed and active guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel position When the steering wheel
79. by the Telenav Software instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver places 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 536 Appendices you in an unsafe situation or directs you into an area that you consider to be unsafe do not follow such instructions c do not input destinations or otherwise manipulate the Telenav Software unless your vehicle is stationary and parked d do not use the Telenav Software for any illegal unauthorized unintended unsafe hazardous or unlawful purposes or in any manner inconsistent with this Agreement e arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary for use of the Telenav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that they will not interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation of any safety device such as an airbag You agree to indemnify and hold Telenav harmless against all claims resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the Telenav Software in any moving vehicle including as a result of your failure to comply with the directions above 2 Account Information You agree a when registering the Telenav Software to provide Telenav with true accurate current and complete information about yourself and b to inform Telenav promptly of any changes to such information and to keep it true accurate current and complete 3 Software License Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agr
80. capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 5 x 99 kg 5x 13 5 kg 635 495 67 5 72 5 kg 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Load Carrying 255 e Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 Ib 635 kg cargo and luggage capacity You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past 2 years Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down you have room for 12 100 Ib 45 kg bags of cement Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home If you and your friend each weigh 220 Ib 99 kg the calculation would be 1 400 2 x 220 12 x 100 1 400 440 1 200 240 Ib No you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 12 x 45 kg 635 198 540 103 kg You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 Ib 104 kg If you remove 3 100 Ib 45 kg cement bags then the load calculation would be 1 400 2 x 220 9 x 100 1 400 440 900 60 Ib Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 9 x 45 kg 635 198 405 32 kg The above calculations also assume that the loads are positio
81. category such as Jazz Rock or News use these buttons to find the previous or next channel in the selected category Press and hold one of these buttons to move quickly in that direction to the next channel or category In CD mode press one of these buttons to select the previous or next track Press and hold one of these buttons to move quickly in that direction within the current track OK and arrow buttons Press the up and down or left and right arrow buttons to browse menu selections Press OK to confirm menu selections Eject Press this button to eject a CD Power and Volume Press this button to switch the system off and on Turn it to adjust the volume CLOCK Press this button to access the clock setting Use the center arrow controls to change the hours and minutes K SOUND Press this button to adjust settings for Treble Midrange Bass Balance and Fade 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 378 Audio System L MENU Press this button to access different audio system features See Menu structure later in this section M PHONE Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC system See the SYNC chapter for more information N AUX Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between devices you plug into the input jack or USB port See Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter O SIRIUS Press this button to listen to Sirius sate
82. centimeters of the button on the sun visor you want to program 4 Press and hold both the programmed Genie button on the hand held transmitter and the button on the sun visor you want to program The indicator light on the sun visor will flash rapidly when the programming is successful Note the Genie transmitter will transmit for up to 30 seconds If HomeLink does not program within 30 seconds the Genie transmitter will need to be pressed again If the Genie transmitter LED displays green and red release the button until the LED turns off before pressing the button again Once HomeLink has been programmed successfully the Genie transmitter must be changed out of program mode To do this 1 Press and hold the previously programmed Genie button on the hand held transmitter for 10 seconds The indicator light will change from red to red and green 2 Press the same button twice to confirm the change If done correctly the LED will turn green 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 174 Universal Garage Door Opener If Equipped Programming HomeLink to the Genie Intellicode garage door opener motor Note You may need a ladder to access the garage door opener motor To program HomeLink to the garage door opener motor 1 Press and hold the PROGRAM NSS eco button on the garage door opener Bu SS motor until both blue LED s turn on SA 2 Release the PROGRAM button Only the smaller r
83. compounds e Fuels containing the octane booster additive methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Fuel and Refueling 191 e Leaded fuel The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law Note Use of any fuel other than recommended fuel can cause powertrain damage impair the emission control system or cause loss of vehicle performance Any damage to vehicle that is caused by use of fuel not recommended will not be covered under warranty Octane Recommendations 3 5L V6 TiVCT Engines We recommend regular unleaded gasoline with a pump R M 2 octane rating of 87 Some stations offer fuels posted as regular with an octane rating below 87 particularly in high altitude areas We do not recommend fuels with octane levels below 87 3 5L V6 EcoBoost Engines We recommend regular unleaded gasoline with a pump R M 2 octane rating of 87 Some stations offer fuels posted as regular with an octane rating below 87 particularly in high altitude areas We do not recommend fuels with octane levels below 87 To provide improved performance we recommend premium fuel for severe duty usage such as trailer tow Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly However if it knocks heavily while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating contact an authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage RUNNING OUT OF FUEL Avoid running out of fuel
84. does not e You may be e Review the media voice understand the using the wrong commands at the beginning of name of a song or voice commands the media section artist OR e Say the song or artist exactly e You may not be Jas listed If you say Play Artist saying the name Prince the system does not exactly as it is play music by Prince and the saved OR Revolution or Prince and the e The system New Power Generation may not be e Make sure you are saying the reading the name complete title such as the same way you California remix featuring are saying it Jennifer Nettles e f the songs are saved in all CAPS you have to spell them LOLA requires you to say Play L O L A e Do not use special characters in the title as the system does not recognize them 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 527 Possible solution s cause s SYNC does not e You may be e Review the phone voice understand oris using the wrong commands at the beginning of calling the wrong voice commands the phone section contact when I OR e Make sure you are saying the want to make a e You may not be contacts exactly as listed For call saying the name example if a contact is saved as exactly as it is Joe Wilson say Call Joe saved OR Wilson e Contacts in e The system works better if your phonebook you list full names such as Joe may be very short Wilson rat
85. does not require the use of a locking clip Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with combination lap and shoulder belts Note Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat Note The lock off device on some child restraints may not accommodate the shoulder portion of the inflatable safety belt Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint regarding the necessary and proper use of the lock off device In some instances these devices have been provided only for use in vehicles with safety belt systems that would otherwise require a locking clip 1 Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 22 Child Safety 2 After positioning the child safety seat in the proper seating position do the following e Standard safety belt pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together behind the belt Y tongue e Inflatable safety belt grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together behind the belt tongue 3 While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st
86. e Touch or to adjust the temperature To adjust fan speed touch or next to the fan icon Touch Rear again to close the rear controls Closing the rear climate control functions does not affect their current settings 508 MyFord Touch If Equipped Recirculated air Touch to turn the recirculated air on or off which May reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior May help reduce odors from reaching the interior Engages automatically when MAX A C is selected May be engaged manually in any airflow mode except defrost May turn off in all airflow modes except MAX A C to reduce fog potential F MAX A C Touch to cool your vehicle with recirculated air Touch again for normal A C operation MAX A C e Distributes air through instrument panel vents Is more economical and efficient than normal A C mode May help reduce odors from entering your vehicle e e G A C Touch to turn the air conditioning on or off e Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency e Engages automatically in MAX A C defrost and floor defrost H AUTO Touch to engage automatic operation then set the temperature using the temperature control The system automatically controls e Fan speed e Airflow distribution e A C on or off e Outside or recirculated air e e e e e j I Rear defroster Touch to turn the rear window defroster and heated mirrors on J Defrost Touch to clear t
87. e on the rear of the center console e in the rear cargo area on the left rear trim panel 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 176 Auxiliary Power Points 110 Volt AC Power Point If Equipped WARNING Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power point whenever the device is not in use Do not use any extension cord with the 110 volt AC power point since it will defeat the safety protection design Doing so may cause the power point to overload due to powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the 150 watt load limit and could result in fire or serious injury Note The cap should always be closed whenever the power point outlet is not in use Note The power point will turn off after 13 minutes if the ignition is on without the engine running Keep the engine running to use the power point The 110 volt AC power point outlet is used for powering electrical devices that require up to 150 watts Exceeding the 150 watt limit will cause the power point to cut off the power temporarily to provide overload protection The power point is located on the back of the center console The power point is not designed for the following electric appliances they may not work properly e Cathode ray tube type televisions e Motor loads such as vacuum cleaners electric saws and other electric power tools compressor driven refrigerators etc e Measuring devices that process precise
88. economy computer later in this section for more information MyKey Distance if key is programmed Distance traveled when a programmed key is in use MyKey Information Number of MyKeys and admin keys programmed Coolant Temp The engine coolant indicator will change colors indicating blue for cool gray for normal and red for hot If the engine coolant temperature exceeds the normal range stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and let the engine cool Driver Assist Traction Control check enabled default uncheck disabled Blind Spot check enabled default uncheck disabled Collision High Normal or Low Warning Chimes not selectable if using a MyKey MyKey disabled Control disabled Trailer Sway check enabled default uncheck 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 122 Information Displays Settings Display Select your applicable language Units Distance Miles and Gallons or km L or L 100km Temperature Fahrenheit F or Celsius CC Convenience Autolamp Off or number of seconds Delay Compass Display Calibrate Gf Hold OK to Calibrate equipped Zone 1 15 DTE Normal or Towing Calculation Easy Entry Exit check enabled uncheck disabled Locks Autolock Autounlock All Doors or Driver First Unlock Oil life Reset Set XXX Switch Enabled or Disabled Liftgate Remote Start Auto or La
89. eoueulnjieq YstH AjIS09StA MOT F LOC pJ03 3j 151030 N Sutsn spueuruo291 P10 CT 970 Zo H 6 8 a T cOTN HSM TIO Joss adwo9 9A TSE gio 10sse 1duroo Q GI NA JULIOSUJOY Dvd 19191030 CT 80 Zo H 677 jue1osuge1 D v ourguo 1sooqoo5 G g SX GOT A TEZ oe quedo8 Joy 9A TSE Pedea nA d epey 3J 191030 N SX IUD A Prg jue1o8uge1 D v ourguo 3sooqoo TGE uorjeogioods juo peAmbo A 3 i Ayede suro3 p04 1oqumu Ied p4o q JO oureu 31ed po q i V 6IgAIW HSA Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 2015 Flex 471 USA fus 365 Capacities and Specifications Teuuosied pegipenb Aq ATUO p9orAJ9S 9q 0 SI W JS S JULIOSLIJOI Suruornipuoo Iy Ainfut Teuosiod osneo ued urojs s JURIOSLIJol Suruorrpuoo Ie y Suruod oinssoid YSU 1opun eper M 3ue1eSrge4 surequoo W JS S JURIOSLIJOI Suruonrpuoo are oum 9NINSIVM MO 9q SUTUTEM 99g gporyoa Mod ut peddmbo Aqpeurstuio edA3 3uepooo 91 PPV SUI9 S S uoisstura pue eutgue MOA Jo sqjuouraJmboJ ay JAIU JOU op SO S eur uorjeogreo qv s amp e dsrp ose oqe ou ssepun AIOS9 e9 IMO IO TS WS NS SV POPLI spo amp 10893e0 qy osn jou oq p40 q 19quinu gred puo q JO oureu yed p4o q Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 2015 Flex 471 USA fus 366 Capacities and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS Engine element BXT 65 650 BXT 65 750 Oil filter FL 500 S FL 500 S Windshield wiper WW 2103 right hand side blade WW 2
90. exit delay to one of the following settings e Off e 10 seconds e 20 seconds e 120 seconds Note You can also adjust the time delay using the display controls in the instrument cluster See the Information Displays chapter 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Lighting 101 DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS IF EQUIPPED WARNING Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather The Daytime Running Lamp DRL system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision The system switches the headlamps on with a reduced output vehicles equipped with halogen headlamps or turns the front fog lamps on vehicles equipped with HID headlamps To switch the system on 1 Switch the ignition on 2 Switch the lighting control to the off autolamp or parking lamp position 3 Make sure the transmission selector lever is not in position P 4 Make sure the parking brake is disengaged AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL IF EQUIPPED The system will automatically turn on your high beams if it is dark enough and no other traffic is present When it detects an approaching vehicle s headlights a preceding vehicle s tail lamps or street lighting the system will turn off the high beams low beams remain on before they distract other drivers Note If
91. for high speed driving e Drive at reasonable speeds traveling at 55 mph 88 km h uses 15 less fuel than traveling at 65 mph 105 km h e Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size e Use the recommended engine oil e Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance There are also some things you may not want to do because they may reduce your fuel economy e Sudden or hard accelerations e Rev the engine before turning it off e dle for periods longer than one minute e Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings e Use the air conditioner or front defroster e Use the speed control in hilly terrain e Rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving e Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a trailer e Carry unnecessary weight approximately 1 mpg 0 4 km L is lost for every 400 pounds 180 kilograms of weight carried 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 268 Driving Hints e Add particular accessories to your vehicle e g bug deflectors rollbars or light bars running boards ski racks e Drive with the wheels out of alignment DRIVING THROUGH WATER WARNING Do not drive through flowing or deep water as you may lose control of your vehicle Note Driving through standing water can cause vehicle damage Note Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter Before driving through standing water check the depth Never drive through water that i
92. fuel gauge indicates empty Note The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank e Turn the ignition off before fueling an inaccurate reading results if the engine is left running e Use the same fill rate low medium high each time the tank is filled e Allow no more than two automatic click offs when filling Results are most accurate when the filling method is consistent Calculating Fuel Economy Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1000 miles 1600 kilometers of driving this is your engine s break in period a more accurate measurement is obtained after 2000 miles 3000 miles 3200 kilometers 4800 kilometers Also fuel expense frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are not accurate ways to measure fuel economy 1 Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading 2 Each time you fill the tank record the amount of fuel added 3 After at least three to five tank fill ups fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading 4 Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading 5 Calculate fuel economy as follows Standard Divide miles
93. fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity This can cause a fire if you are filling an ungrounded container WARNING Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene which is a cancer causing agent WARNING When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck Never smoke while refueling Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes WARNING Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle from its full inserted position when refueling Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel e Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle e Always turn off the vehicle before refueling e Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury If fuel is swallowed call a physician immediately even if no symptoms are immediately apparent The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 190 Fuel and Refueling Avoid inhaling fuel vapors Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation In severe cases excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes If fuel is splashed in the eyes
94. fus 160 Seats If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the cooled seats are on the feature will turn itself off You will need to reactivate it Note When the heated or cooled front seat is active you will be able to hear the fan operating inside the seat This is normal Climate Controlled Seat Air Filter Replacement If Equipped The climate controlled seat system includes air filters You must replace them periodically See the scheduled maintenance information Locate the filters under each front seat and access them from the second row foot well area Move the front seats all the way forward and to the full up positions to ease access To remove an air filter 1 Turn the vehicle off 2 Push up on the outside rigid edge of the filter and rotate counterclockwise once the tabs are released then remove the filter To install a filter 1 First position the filter in its housing making sure that the far forward end is all the way up in the housing 2 Push in on the center of the outside edge of the filter and rotate up into the housing until it clips into position 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Seats 161 REAR SEATS Second Row Seats Recline Adjustment WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat safety belt res
95. fus Wheels and Tires 331 Note Your all wheel drive vehicle is not intended for off road use This feature gives your vehicle some limited off road capabilities in which driving surfaces are relatively level obstruction free and otherwise similar to normal on road driving conditions Operating your vehicle under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty With the all wheel drive option power will be delivered to the front wheels and distributed to the rear wheels as needed This increases traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot The system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator For all wheel drive vehicles a spare tire of a different size other than the tire provided should never be used A dissimilar spare tire size other than the spare tire provided or major dissimilar tire sized between the front and rear axles could cause the system to stop functioning and default to front wheel drive How Your Vehicle Differs from Other Vehicles Crossover vehicles can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways Your vehicle may be e Higher to allow higher load carrying capacity e Shorter to give it the capability to approach inclines All other things held equal a shorter wheelbase may make your veh
96. gaming systems or a personal camcorder fe o m by connecting RCA cords not included to these input jacks The jacks are yellow red and white and are located either behind a small access door on the instrument panel or in your center console You can also use the A V inputs as an auxiliary input jack to play music from your portable music player over your vehicle s speakers Plug in your 1 8 inch 3 5 millimeter RCA adapter into the two left A V input jacks red and white Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen and then select A V In To use the auxiliary input jack feature make sure that your portable music player is designed for use with headphones and that it is fully charged You also need an audio extension cable with stereo male 1 8th inch 3 5 millimeter connectors at one end and a RCA jack at the other 1 Switch off the engine radio and portable music player Set the parking brake and put the transmission in position P 2 Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output of your player and the other end into the adapter in one of the two left A V input jacks white or red inside the center console 3 Press the lower left corner on the touchscreen Select either a tuned FM station or a CD if there is a CD already loaded into the system 4 Adjust the volume as desired 5 Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to the maximum 6 Press the lower left corner o
97. greatly increases If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use Ford also recommends its use 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 32 Child Safety BOOSTER SEATS WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a crash Note Some booster seat safety belt guides may not accommodate the shoulder portion of the inflatable safety belt Use a belt positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat generally children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall are greater than age four 4 and less than age twelve 12 and between 40 pounds 18 kilograms and 80 pounds 36 kilograms and upward to 100 pounds 45 kilograms if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight 8 a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or 80 pounds 36 kilograms Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when the child is seated without a booster seat e Can the child sit all the way back against their vehicle seat with knees bent comfortably at the edge o
98. heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters There is a risk of electrical shock Note The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below O F 18 C The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant This allows the climate control system to respond quickly The equipment includes a heater element installed in the engine block and a wire harness You can connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A C electrical source We recommend that you do the following for safe and correct operation e Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter s Laboratory or Canadian Standards Association This extension cord must be suitable for use outdoors in cold temperatures and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors it could result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard e Use as short an extension cord as possible e Do not use multiple extension cords 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 188 Starting and Stopping the Engine e Make sure that when in operation the extension cord plug and the heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water This could cause an electric shock or fire e Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area clear of combustibles e Make sure the heater heater cord and extension cord are firmly co
99. higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label 6 Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak 7 Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts or bulges Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves Check the tire and valve stems for holes cracks or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking cuts bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear If internal damage to the tire is suspected have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced For your safety tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Inspect all your tires including the spare frequently and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist Tire Wear When the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 millimeters tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning Built in treadwear indicators or wear bars which look like narrow strips of smooth ru
100. in the center console and has the following features A A V inputs B SD card slot C USB ports ENS For more information see the MyFord Touch chapter 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 392 SYNC a S A AN 3 A N 2 O O _ e WNC Powered by Microsoft SYNC is an in vehicle communications system that works with your Bluetooth enabled cellular phone and portable media player This allows you to Make and receive calls Access and play music from your portable music player Use 911 Assist Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services Traffic Directions amp Information if equipped Use applications such as Pandora and Stitcher via SYNC AppLink if applicable Access phonebook contacts and music via voice commands Stream music from your connected phone Text message Use the advanced voice recognition system USB device charging if your device supports this 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 393 GENERAL INFORMATION Make sure you review your device s manual before using it with SYNC Support The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you cannot answer on your own Monday Saturday 8 30am 9 00pm EST Sunday 10 30am 7 30pm EST In the United States call 1 800 392 3673 In Canada call 1 800 565 3673 Times are subject to change due
101. in the following chart If you are not listening to the radio press the voice button and after the tone say Radio then any of the commands in the following chart lt 87 9 107 9 gt lt 87 9 107 9 gt HD lt 530 1710 gt AM AM lt 530 1710 gt FM autoset preset OP OS If available Tf you have said Tune see the following Tune chart lt 87 9 107 9 gt lt 87 9 107 9 gt HD lt gt lt 530 1710 gt FM lt 679 1070 gt Hb e SCS Tf available AM autoset preset lt gt FM 2 preset lt gt 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 462 MyFord Touch If Equipped Sirius Satellite Radio If Activated Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen then select the D SIRIUS tab Presets Save a channel by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas There is a brief mute while the radio saves the channel Sound returns when finished ALERT Save the current song artist or team as a favorite The system alerts you when it plays again on any channel Replay Replay audio on the current channel You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you have remained tuned to the current station Changing stations erases the previous audio ho in replay mode Press and release the seek buttons to hear the previous or next song e Press and hold the seek buttons to rever
102. in use and the MyKey speed limit is on Near Vehicle Top Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the Speed MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is near the selected top speed Check Speed Drive Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the Safely optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds preselected speed Buckle Up to Unmute Displayed when a MyKey is in use and Audio Belt Minder is activated Could Not Program Displayed when an attempt is made to Integrated Key program a spare key using two existing MyKeys Reverse and the park aid is disabled Reverse and the park aid is disabled Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the rear park aid status 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Information Displays 137 Passenger Sensing Action Description System Message Occupant Sensor Displayed when objects are by the passenger BLOCKED Remove seat After the objects are moved away from Objects Near the seat if the warning stays on or continues Passenger Seat to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Reminder Messages Action Description Steering column lock Displays when you need to turn the steering Remove and re insert wheel in order to disengage the steering lock key while turning wheel to unlock Shift to Park Displayed when the engine is turned off and shift select lever is in any position other than P Park vehicle have
103. into Parking Space Note If vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph 10 km h the system turns off and you need to take full control of the vehicle Note If a maneuver is interrupted before completion the system turns off and you need to full take control of the vehicle In some instances after an interruption a message may appear that would allow you to resume the maneuver With hands off the wheel and nothing obstructing its movement and the transmission in R Reverse the vehicle steers itself as instructions to safely move the vehicle back and forward in the space are displayed in the touch screen While reversing the touch screen displays a message instructing the driver to check their surroundings for safety reasons and to back up slowly accompanied by a corresponding graphic K e When you think your vehicle has enough space in front and behind it or you hear a solid tone from the parking aid accompanied by a touchscreen display message and a chime bring your vehicle to a complete stop Esa When automatic steering is finished the touch screen displays a message indicating that the active park assist process is done The driver is responsible for checking the parking job and making any necessary corrections before putting the transmission in P Park 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Parking Aids 221 Deactivating the Park Assist Feature The system can be deactivated
104. is currently playing More Info displays information such as current track artist name album and genre Options allows you to view and adjust various media settings e Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for e Bass e Midrange e Treble e Balance and Fade e DSP Digital Signal Processing e Occupancy Mode e Speed Compensated Volume Note Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings e Media Player Settings allows you to select more settings which is under Media Player See Settings e Device Information displays software and firmware information about the currently connected media device e Update Media Index indexes your device each time you connect it to make sure you have the latest voice commands available for all media on the device Browse allows you to view the contents of the device It also allows you to search by categories such as genre artist or album If you want to view song information such as Title Artist File Folder Album and Genre touch the on screen album art You can also touch What s Playing to hear how the system pronounces the current band and song This can be helpful when using voice commands to make sure the system correctly plays your request 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 471 SD Card and USB Voice Commands E If you are listening to a USB device or an SD card press the i voice button on the
105. kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ib 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity e Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 Ib 635 kg cargo and luggage capacity You decide to go golfing Is there enough load capacity to carry you 4 of your friends and all the golf bags You and four friends average 220 Ib 99 kg each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 Ib 13 5 kg each The calculation would be 1 400 5 x 220 5 x 30 1 400 1 100 150 150 Ib Yes you have enough load
106. listen to the radio To change between AM and FM presets just touch the AM or FM tab Memory Presets Save a station by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station Sound returns when finished 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 457 HD Radio Touch this button to turn HD Radio on The light on the button illuminates when the feature is on HD Radio allows you to receive radio broadcasts digitally where available providing free crystal clear sound See HD Radio information later in this chapter Scan Touch this button to go to the next strong AM or FM radio station The light on the button illuminates when the feature is on Options Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for Bass Midrange Treble Balance and Fade DSP Digital Signal Processing Occupancy Mode Speed Compensated Volume Note Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings Set PTY for Seek Scan allows you to select a category of music you would like to search for You can then choose to either seek or scan for the stations playing that category RDS Text Display allows you to view the information broadcast by FM stations AST allows you to have the system automatically store the six strongest stations in your current location TAG Button is available when HD Radio is on and allows you to tag a song to
107. low tire pressure Tire Pressure Monitor Displays when the tire pressure monitoring Fault system is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer Tire Pressure Sensor Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is Fault malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Wheels and tires chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 138 Climate Control MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL A mua ON EE oeoo o cooo coocoo AE 9 re TEMP TEMP R ge j pee e J l H G A Power Press the button to turn the system on and off Switching off the climate control system prevents outside air from entering the vehicle B Air distribution control Press these buttons to turn airflow from the windshield instrument panel or footwell vents on or off The system can distribute air through any combination of these vents C A C Press the button to turn air conditioning compressor on or off Use air conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency D Recirculated air Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air When recirculated air is selected the air currently in
108. lt name gt on mobile OR cell Call history outgoing Phone book lt name gt on Other 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 399 Call history missed Call lt name gt at work OR Call lt name gt in office Dial 4 1 2 1These commands do not require you to say Phone first These commands are not available until phone information is completely downloaded using Bluetooth See MENU table below 4See DIAL table below Phone settings set phone ringer Phone settings set ringer 1 Phone settings set ringer 2 Phone settings set ringer 3 Text message inbox Words in are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system to understand the command 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 400 SYNC Phone book commands When you ask SYNC to access a phone book name number etc the requested information appears in the display to view Press the phone button and say Call to call the contact 411 four one one 911 nine one one Note To exit dial mode press and hold the phone button or press MENU to go to the PHONE menu Making Calls Press the voice icon and when prompted say 1 Say Call lt name gt or Dial then the desired number 2 When the system confirms the number say Dia
109. lug wrench 12 Replace the flat tire with the spare tire making sure the valve stem is facing outward Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered 13 Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 14 Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown See Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications later in this chapter for the proper lug nut torque w specification 15 Install the wheel cover 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 358 Wheels and Tires Stowing the Tire and Jack 1 Fully collapse the jack fold the lug wrench socket into the handle and place the jack and wrench into the felt bag as shown Place the extension bolt or L shaped bolt into the external pocket of the felt bag Position the jack as shown to make sure that the locating holes in the jack base can be placed on the locating tabs of the jack mounting bracket in the spare tire tub 2 Securely close the wrench compartment and the jack bag using the Velcro straps 3 Place the jack kit on the angled bracket in the spare tire tub using the locating tabs to position the jack correctly 4 Insert the straight end of the jack retention NS bracket through the eyelet of the angled bracket S and swing the retention bracket over the jack With the jack in place place the looped end of the reten
110. more listings To expand these listings press the in front of the point of interest listing Personal Care Services When programming a point of interest destination the system allows you to sort the resulting lists alphabetically by distance or by cityseekr listings if available Pressing the Search Areas button allows you to search for points of interest nearby near a city or state or near a destination if a route is active Pressing the Search By Name button allows you to directly enter the point of interest name into the system by using the keyboard 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 513 cityseekr If Available Note cityseekr point of interest information is limited to approximately 912 cities 881 in the United States 20 in Canada and 11 in Mexico cityseekr when available is a service that provides more information about certain a i i points of interest such as restaurants J hotels and attractions H k When you have selected a point of C tys e e r interest the location and information appear such as address and phone number If cityseekr lists the point of interest more information is available such as a brief description hotel check in and checkout times or restaurant hours Press More Information for a longer review a list of services and facilities the average room or meal price as well as the website link
111. occupants of your vehicle including the driver should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system and curtain airbag is provided Failure to properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death WARNING To reduce risk of injury do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the curtain airbag WARNING If the curtain airbags have deployed the curtain airbags will not function again The curtain airbags including the A B C or D pillar trim and headliner must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the curtain airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 60 Supplementary Restraints System The Safety Canopy will deploy during significant side crashes or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor The Safety Canopy is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal behind the headliner above each row of seats In certain sideways crashes or rollover events the Safety Canopy will be activated regardless of which seats are occupied The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact crashes and rollover events P EE The system consists bi y lt e Safety canopy curtain airbags k X 2D T fitted above
112. of having a collision greatly increase Electric brakes and manual automatic or surge type trailer brakes are safe if you install them properly and adjust them to the manufacturer s specifications The trailer brakes must meet local and federal regulations The rating for the tow vehicle s braking system operation is at the gross vehicle weight rating not the gross combined weight rating Separate functioning brake systems are required for safe control of towed vehicles and trailers weighing more than 1500 pounds 680 kilograms when loaded Trailer Brake Controller Connector If Equipped The connector is located under the instrument panel above the brake pedal 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 262 Towing Trailer Lamps WARNING Never connect any trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle s tail lamp wiring this may damage the electrical system resulting in a fire Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible for assistance in proper trailer tow wiring installation Additional electrical equipment may be required Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles Make sure all running lights brake lights turn signals and hazard lights are working Before Towing a Trailer Practice turning stopping and backing up to get the feel of your vehicle trailer combination before starting on a trip When turning make wider turns so the trailer wheels clear c
113. of your vehicle is as quiet as possible Wind noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from correctly recognizing spoken commands e After pressing the voice icon wait until after the tone sounds and Listening appears before saying a command Any command spoken prior to this does not register with the system e Speak naturally without long pauses between words e At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by pressing the voice icon 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 452 MyFord Touch If Equipped Accessing a List of Available Commands e If you use the touchscreen press the Settings icon gt Help gt Voice Command List e If you use the steering wheel control press the voice icon After the tone speak your command clearly This command is only available when your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system and the navigation system SD card is in the card slot This command is only available when you have an active Sirius satellite radio subscription Voice Settings Voice settings allow you to customize the level of system interaction help and feedback The system defaults to standard interaction that uses candidate lists and confirmation prompts as these provide the highest level of guidance and feedback Interaction Mode Novice mode provides detailed interaction and guidance while the advanced mode has less audible i
114. operating properly Refer to the Fuses chapter If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly the following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P Park 1 Apply the parking brake turn the ignition off and remove the key 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Transmission 203 2 Remove the cup holder insert 3 Using a screwdriver or similar tool release the tab to the access door and remove 4 Locate the brake shift interlock lever on the passenger side of the shifter assembly 5 Apply the brake pedal Using a screwdriver or similar tool press down and hold the brake shift interlock lever while pulling the gearshift lever out of the P Park and into the N Neutral 6 Install the access door and cup holder inset in reverse order 7 Apply brake pedal start the vehicle and release the parking brake If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or Snow Note Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Note Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear 2015 Flex 471 Owners Gui
115. or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle Additionally when your vehicle is in for service or repair Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access or share among them data for vehicle improvement purposes For U S only Gf equipped if you choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities and that the diagnostic information may be used for any purpose See the SYNC chapter for more information 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Introduction 13 Event Data Recording This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing
116. participate in the arbitration process An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within 40 days after you file your claim with the BBB You are not bound by the decision and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute and decision are admissible in the court action Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision Ford is then bound by the decision and must comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter BBB AUTO LINE Application Using the information provided below please call or write to request a program application You will be asked for your name and address general information about your new vehicle information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership Upon receipt the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955 5100 or writing to BBB AUTO LINE 3033 Wilson Boulevard Suite 600 Arlington Virginia 22201 BBB AUTO LINE applicati
117. point then adjust the setting as necessary 3 Select the instrument panel air vents using the air distribution buttons Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather lisi el control climate control 1 Select the instrument panel and Press the defrost button footwell air vents positions through the air distribution control 2 Press the A C button Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting Use 72 F 22 C as a starting point then adjust the setting as necessary 3 Adjust the temperature control Direct the instrument panel side to the desired setting air vents toward the side windows 4 Adjust the fan speed to the Close the instrument panel highest setting vents 5 Direct the instrument panel side air vents toward the side windows Close the instrument panel vents 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Climate Control 147 HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS IF EQUIPPED Heated Rear Window Note The ignition must be switched on to use this feature Press the button to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog Press the button again within 10 minutes to switch it off It switches off automatically after 10 minutes or when you switch the ignition off Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the rear window This may cause damage to the heated grid lines Your warranty does not cove
118. preferences eene 514 WOE ieri eoe 398 Trailer Brake Voice recognition 450 Controller Integrated 261 Trailer sway control 257 W Transaxle gH fluid refill capacities 362 Woming Hants a a is Ma lubricant specifications 362 Washer fluid 308 309 Transmission Water Driving through 268 brake shift interlock BSI 202 Windows fluid checking and adding DOWEL ssdxvisetndnictiactenenent 105 automatic rasistisen 304 rear wiper washer 97 Turm signal tee 103 Windshield washer fluid and WIDGES 3 eeersaes citur S 96 U checking and adding Tiki s vere ao raro 308 309 USB Ports 5 ettet 391 469 replacing wiper blades 311 Using privacy mode 401 Wrecker towing 264 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus
119. safety belts it is very important that they continue to sit properly Properly seated occupants sit upright lean against the seat back and center themselves on the seat cushion with their feet comfortably extended on the floor Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event For example if an occupant slouches lies down turns sideways sits forward leans forward or sideways or puts one or both feet up the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased Children and Airbags WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back Children must always be properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a crash 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 54 Supplementary Restraints System FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM WARNING Even with Advanced Restraints Systems children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death WARNING Sitting improperly out of position or with the se
120. says the following or a similar message SYNC will attempt to call 911 to cancel the call press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel If the call is not cancelled and a successful call is made a pre recorded message is played for the 911 operator then the occupant s in the vehicle is able to talk with the operator Be prepared to provide your name phone number and location immediately because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically 911 Assist May Not Work If e Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware was damaged in a crash e The vehicle s battery or SYNC system has no power e The phone s paired and connected to the system was thrown from the vehicle 911 Assist Privacy Notice Once 911 Assist is set on it may disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators the vehicle location and or other details about the vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not turn the feature on 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 415 Vehicle Health Report WARNING Always follow scheduled main
121. select and scroll between Add Contacts Press OK to add more contacts from your phone book Push the desired contact s on your phone See your phone s user guide on how to push contacts Delete Phonebook Press OK to delete the current phone book and call history When Delete Phonebook appears press OK to confirm SYNC takes you back to the Phone Settin Download Phonebook Press OK to select and press OK again when Confirm Download appears Auto Download Automatically download your phone book each time your phone connects to SYNC Press OK to select When Auto Download On appears press OK to have your phonebook automatically downloaded each time Select Off to NOT download your phonebook every time your phone connects to SYNC Your phonebook call history and text messages can only be accessed when your specific phone is connected to SYNC Note Downloading times are phone and quantity dependent Note When auto download is on any changes additions or deletions saved since your last download are deleted Exit the current menu 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 409 System Settings System Settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu features Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the menu options The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add connect delete and set a phone as primary as well as turn your Bluetooth feature on and of
122. side of the housing 3 Carefully separate the cover from the housing 4 Remove the air filter element from the housing 5 Wipe the cover and the housing clean to remove any dirt or debris and to make sure the cover seals to the housing 6 Install a new air filter element Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the housing and the cover This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly seated 7 Lower the driver s side of the cover and slide the three tabs on the cover into the three slots in the housing 8 Lower the passenger s side of the cover Engage the two clamps to secure the cover to the housing 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 314 Maintenance ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant If your vehicle has been in an accident an authorized dealer should check the alignment of your headlamps Vertical Aim Adjustment 1 Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away e 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 3 25 feet 7 6 meters e 4 Horizontal reference line 2 Measure the height of the headlamp bulb center from the ground and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height a piece of masking tape wor
123. spare if equipped Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company WARNING Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat build up and internal damage to the tire It also may result in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of vehicle control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of th
124. streets highways and off road Crossover vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions WARNING Crossover vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must e Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers e Drive at safe speeds for the conditions e Keep tires properly inflated e Never overload or improperly load your vehicle e Make sure every passenger is properly restrained WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt All occupants must wear seat belts Children and infants must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection Study your owner s manual for specific information about equipment features instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury All Wheel Drive System If Equipped WARNING Do not become overconfident in the ability of all wheel drive vehicles Although an all wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations it will not stop any faster than two wheel drive vehicles Always drive at a safe speed 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA
125. switch is in the autolamps position They will turn off approximately 60 seconds after you switch the windshield wipers off The headlamps will not turn on by wiper activation e During a single wipe e When the wipers are on to clear washer fluid during a wash condition e If the wipers are in intermittent mode 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 100 Lighting INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER e Tap the top or bottom of the control to brighten or dim all interior lit components incrementally e Press and hold the top of the control to activate the dome on feature This will turn on the interior courtesy lights Fully press and hold the bottom of the control to turn off the interior courtesy lights HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY You can set the delay time to keep the headlamps on for up to three minutes after the ignition is turned off Follow the steps below to change the delay time Steps 1 through 6 must be done within 10 seconds Turn the ignition off Turn the lighting control to the autolamp position Turn the lighting control to the off position 1 2 3 4 Turn the ignition on 5 Turn the ignition off 6 Turn the lighting control to the autolamp position The headlamps and parking lamps will turn on 7 Turn the lighting control to the off position when the desired delay time has been reached The headlamps and parking lamps will turn off You can set the headlamp
126. system Low tire Possible cause Customer action required pressure warning light Solid warning Tire s 1 Make sure tires are at the proper light under inflated pressure See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter 2 After inflating your tires to the manufacturer s recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label located on the edge of driver s door or the B Pillar the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph 82 km h before the light turns off Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function For a description on how the system functions see When Your Temporary Spare Tire is Installed in this section TPMS If the tires are properly inflated malfunction and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 352 Wheels and Tires Low tire Possible cause Customer action required pressure warning light Flashing Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel warning light and tire assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function For a description on how the system functions see When Your Temporary Spare Tire is Installed in this section TPMS If the tires are properly inflated malfunction and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on contact your authorize
127. take off units with synthetic fluid and light duty trucks equipped with Ford design axles are lubricated for life do not check or change fluid unless a leak is suspected service is required or the assembly has been submerged in water During long periods of trailer towing with outside temperatures above 70 F 21 C and at wide open throttle for long periods above 45 mph 72 km h non synthetic rear axle fluids should be changed every 3000 miles 4800 kilometers or three months whichever comes first This interval can be waived if the axle is filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford specification WSL M2C192 A part number F1TZ 19580 B or equivalent Add friction modifier XL 3 EST M2C118 A or equivalent for complete refill of Traction Lok rear axles see Technical specifications in the Capacities and Specifications chapter for details Police Taxi and Livery vehicle axle maintenance Change rear axle fluid every 100000 miles 160000 kilometers Rear axle fluid change may be waived if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford specification WSL M2C192 A part number FITZ 19580 B or equivalent Add four ounces 118 mL of additive friction modifier XL 3 EST M2C118 A or equivalent for complete refill of Traction Lok rear axles The axle fluid should be changed anytime the axle has been submerged in water California fuel filter replacement If the vehicle is registered in California the California Air Re
128. that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Ford Motor Company To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to Attp www safercar gov or write to Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue Southeast Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS CANADA ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform Transport Canada using their toll free number 1 800 333 0510 or online at http www tc gc ca eng roadsafety menu htm 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 284 Fuses CHANGING A FUSE Fuses WARNING Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire If electrical components in y
129. the Data except on the condition that you may transfer the Data and all accompanying materials on a permanent basis if a you retain no copies of the Data b the recipient agrees to the 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Appendices 541 terms of this End User License Agreement and c you transfer the Data in the exact same form as you purchased it by physically transferring the original media e g the CD ROM or DVD you purchased all original packaging all Manuals and other documentation Specifically Multi disc sets may only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided to you and not as a subset thereof Additional License Limitations Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by HERE in a separate written agreement and without limiting the preceding paragraph your license is conditioned on use of the Data as prescribed in this agreement and you may not a use this Data with any products systems or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles capable of vehicle navigation positioning dispatch real time route guidance fleet management or similar applications or b with or in communication with including without limitation cellular phones palmtop and handheld computers pagers and personal digital assistants or PDAs This Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time changing circ
130. the arbitrator s award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces For more information without charge or obligation call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1 800 207 0685 or visit www camvap ca GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U S AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle contact our Customer Relationship Center The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage Ford Motor Company or Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the United States 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Customer Assistance 281 If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Asia Pacific Region Sub Saharan Africa U S Virgin Islands Central America the Caribbean and Israel contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact
131. the engine coolant to be drained the system to be flushed or the engine coolant to be replaced e DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle Make sure the correct coolant is used Mixing of engine coolants may harm your engine s cooling system The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling system components and may void the warranty e n case of emergency a large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in order to reach a vehicle service location In this instance the cooling system must be drained chemically cleaned with Motorcraft Premium Cooling System Flush and refilled with engine coolant as soon as possible Water alone without engine coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion overheating or freezing 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 300 Maintenance e Do not use alcohol methanol brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing e Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant Unscrew the cap slowly Any pressure will escape as you unscrew the cap Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford specification See Capacities and Specifications for more information Whenever coolant has been added the coolant level in the cool
132. the radar signals from the sensor have been obstructed The sensor is located behind a fascia cover near the driver side of the lower grille A vehicle ahead cannot be detected and the system will not function when the radar signals are obstructed The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message being displayed The surface of the radar in the Clean the grille surface in front of grille is dirty or obstructed in the radar or remove the object some way causing the obstruction The surface of the radar in the Wait a short time It may take grille is clean but the message several minutes for the radar to remains in the display detect that it is no longer obstructed Heavy rain or snow is interfering Do not use the system in these with the radar signals conditions because it may not detect any vehicle ahead 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 236 Cruise Control Swirling water or snow or ice on Do not use system in these the surface of the road may conditions because it may not interfere with the radar signals detect any vehicle ahead You are in a desert or remote area Wait a short time or switch to with no other vehicles and no normal cruise control roadside objects Due to the nature of radar technology it is possible to get a blockage warning and not be blocked This can happen for example when driving in sparse rural or desert environments A f
133. the screen changes to Avoid Areas Edit you can press Delete at the bottom right of the screen Map Mode Press the green bar in the upper right area of the touchscreen to view map mode Map mode shows advanced viewing comprised of both 2D city maps as well as 3D landmarks when available 2D city maps show detailed outlines of buildings visible land use and land elements and detailed railway infrastructure for the most essential cities around the globe These maps also contain features such as town blocks building footprints and railways 3D landmarks appear as clear visible objects that are typically recognizable and have a certain tourist value The 3D landmarks appear in 3D map mode only Coverage varies and improves with updated map releases Change the appearance of the map display by repeatedly pressing the arrow button in the upper left corner of the screen It toggles between three different map modes Heading up North up and 3D Heading up 2D map always shows the direction of forward travel to be upward on the screen This view is available for map scales up to 2 5 miles 4 kilometers The system remembers this setting for larger map scales but shows the map in North up only If the scale returns below this level the system restores Heading up N North up 2D map always shows the northern direction to be upward on the screen 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus M
134. the service you are receiving follow these steps 1 Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling or servicing authorized dealer 2 If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved contact the Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager 3 If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center In order to help serve you better please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Your telephone number home and business e The name of the authorized dealer and city where located e The vehicle s current odometer reading In some states you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state s warranty laws Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states In the United States a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or to the extent allowed by state law before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 278 Customer Assistance or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurc
135. the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder To adjust the shoulder belt height 1 Squeeze the button and slide the height adjuster up or down 2 Release the button and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 44 Safety Belts SAFETY BELT WARNING LIGHT AND INDICATOR CHIME A This lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the eam driver s safety belt has not been fastened when the vehicle s ignition is turned on Conditions of Operation The driver safety belt is not The safety belt warning light buckled before the ignition illuminates 1 2 minutes and the switch is turned to the on warning chime sounds 4 8 seconds position The driver safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled while the indicator warning chime turn off light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding The driver safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled before the ignition indicator chime remain off switch is turned to the on position SAFETY BELT MINDER This feature supplements the safety belt warning function by providing additional reminders that intermittently sound a tone and illuminate the safety belt warning light when you are in the driver seat or you have a front seat passenger and a safety belt is unbuckled The system uses information from the fron
136. the trim panels over La fp eT the front and rear side windows dm s identified by a label or wording on the headliner or roof pillar trim e A flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow air curtain deployment e Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness LM indicator See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator in this chapter Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seats The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window opening The design and development of the Safety Canopy included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags including the Safety Canopy 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Supplementary Restraints System 61 CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR WARNING Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of your vehicle including frame bumper front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the airbag system increasing the risk of injury Do not modify the front end of your vehicle Your vehicle has a collection of crash and oc
137. their original positions when e You place the transmission in neutral N or park P e You switch the keyless ignition on or put the key in the ignition switch Switch the Easy Entry Exit feature on or off through the information display settings menu See the Information Displays chapter HEATED SEATS IF EQUIPPED WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury The heated seats will only function when the ignition is in the on position Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly To operate the heated seats Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off Warmer settings are indicated by more indicator lights 20
138. then choose from any of the following services e View the message e Delete the message e Delete All messages This screen displays any system messages such as an SD card fault Note The system alerts you to any messages by turning the information icon yellow After you read or delete the messages the icon returns to white Calendar e If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation touch the i 2 Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab Press Calendar You can view the current calendar by day week or month 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 491 911 Assist If Equipped WARNING Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a crash the system will not dial for help which could delay response time potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash WARNING Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash the system or phone may be damaged or non functional WARNING Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or damaged in a crash
139. to activate when the vehicle sustains frontal or sideways deceleration sufficient to cause the restraints control module to deploy a safety device or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 62 Supplementary Restraints System The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the restraints control module determined the accident conditions such as crash severity belt usage were not appropriate to activate these safety devices e The design of the front airbags is to activate only in frontal and near frontal crashes not rollovers side impacts or rear impacts unless the crash causes sufficient frontal deceleration e The design of the safety belt pretensioners and rear inflatable safety belts is to activate in frontal near frontal and side crashes and in rollovers e The design of the side airbags is to inflate in certain side impact crashes Side airbags may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation e The design of the Safety Canopy is to inflate in certain side impact crashes or rollover events The Safety Canopy may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation or a
140. to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not turn the feature on Vehicle Health Report If Equipped United States Only WARNING Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions regularly inspect your vehicle and seek repair for any damage or problem you suspect Vehicle Health Report supplements but cannot replace normal maintenance and vehicle inspection Vehicle Health Report only monitors certain systems electronically monitored by your vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other system such as brake lining wear Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle damage and serious injury Note Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to use Visit www SYNCMyRide com to register There is no fee or subscription associated with Vehicle Health Report but you must register to use this feature Note This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your mobile phone Before running a report review the Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice Note In order to allow a break in period for your vehicle you may not be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has reached 200 miles 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 494 MyFord Touch If Equipped Note Cellula
141. to review to download my phone dependent your phone s compatibility phonebook feature OR e Try turning off the device e Possible phone resetting the device or removing malfunction the device s battery then trying again e Try pushing your phonebook contacts to SYNC by using the Add Contacts feature e Use the SYNCmyphone feature available on the website The system says Limitations on e Try pushing your phonebook Phonebook your phone s contacts to SYNC by using the Downloaded but capability Add Contacts feature my phonebook in e If the missing contacts are SYNC is empty or stored on your SIM card try is missing moving them to the device contacts memory e Remove any pictures or special ring tones associated with the missing contact 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 433 Phone issues cause s I am having trouble connecting my phone to SYNC Text messaging is not working on SYNC 2015 Flex 471 e This is a phone dependent feature OR e Possible phone malfunction e This is a phone dependent feature OR e Possible phone malfunction e Go to the website to review your phone s compatibility e Try turning off the device resetting the device or removing the device s battery then trying again e Try deleting your device from SYNC deleting SYNC from your device and trying again e Check the security and auto accept prompt alw
142. tow right hand stop turn p relay E e ee E SS PoC Notued O a meni seris 5 I e Ran senso NNNM Rain sensor Canister vent solenoid EcoBoost engines 47 15A Washer pump Sj Front park lamps a JNa used ES M Pies a 51 Powertrain control module Injector power monitor non EcoBoost engines 22 e o Set used NE Trailer tow left hand stop turn lamps relay 8 O o Neused O 55 wipes relay L8 T ame rue testor Fuel pump re 20A Left high intensity discharge i m 58 10A Alternator sensor Po 10A Brake on off switch 60 10A Trailer tow back up lamps 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 288 Fuses Fuse or relay Fuse amp Protected components number rating 0 jJNtued O L amp ie weed E Rear o J Notusd used Powertrain control module vehicle power relay 20A Vehicle power 2 Oxygen sensor heater Mass airflow sensor Variable camshaft timing solenoid Canister vent solenoid Canister purge solenoid 68 20A Vehicle power 4 ignition coils C J Vehicle power 1 PCM 15A Vehicle power 3 coil A C clutch relay Fan control relays Variable air conditioning compressor Auxiliary transmission warmup Turbo charge waste gate control Electronic compressor bypass valve f
143. traveled by gallons used Metric Multiply liters used by 100 then divide by kilometers traveled Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving city or highway This provides an accurate estimate of the vehicle s fuel economy under current driving conditions Additionally keeping records during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy In general lower temperatures mean lower fuel economy 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 196 Fuel and Refueling EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire WARNING Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly e Use only the specified fuel listed e Avoid running out of fuel e Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving especially at high speeds e Have the
144. tunnel and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac sensors Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death WARNING Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics It is always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage Activation of the AdvanceTrac system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this could reduce the operator s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If your AdvanceTrac system activates SLOW DOWN 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Stability Control 215 The AdvanceTrac system helps you keep control of your vehicle when on a slippery surface The electronic stability control portion of the system helps avoid skids and lateral slides and the traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction See the Traction Control chapter for details on traction control system operation A Vehicle without AdvanceTrac skidding off its intended route B Vehicle
145. using the highest sensitivity setting where possible Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer and later system warnings Refer to the Information Displays chapter for instructions on reducing the sensitivity 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Driving Aids 243 Blocked Sensors If a message regarding a blocked sensor appears in the information display the radar signals from the sensor have been obstructed The sensors are located behind a fascia cover near the driver side of the lower grille When the sensors are obstructed a vehicle ahead cannot be detected and the collision warning system does not function The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message being displayed The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains in the display Heavy rain spray snow or fog is interfering with the radar signals Swirling water or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere with the radar signals 2015 Flex 471 Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object causing the obstruction Wait a short time It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed The collision warning system is temporarily disabled Collision warning should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather co
146. warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by your vehicle manufacturer A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized is inappropriate for your child s height age or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while your vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a crash which may result in serious injury or death WARNING Never use pillows books or towels to boost a child They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a crash WARNING Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat These objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 36 Child Safety WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a crash WARNING To avoid risk of injury do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children Use any attachment method as indicated be low by X Safety Safety belt and _ belt Restraint LATCH Type lower
147. wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter F 95 Indicates the tire s load index It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry You may find this information in your owner s manual If not contact a local tire dealer Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law G H Indicates the tire s speed rating The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions The ratings range from 81 mph 130 km h to 186 mph 299 km h These ratings are listed in the following chart Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law M Note For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph 240 km h tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph 299 km h tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Wheels and Tires 337 H U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire me
148. wheels on the ground see the following instructions If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground e Tow only in the forward direction Release the parking brake Place the transmission in position N Do not exceed 65 mph 105 km h Start the engine and allow it to run for five minutes at the beginning of each day and every six hours thereafter With the engine running and your foot on the brake shift into position D and then into position R before shifting back into position N 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Driving Hints 267 BREAKING IN You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 miles 480 kilometers During this time your vehicle may exhibit some unique driving characteristics Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000 miles 1600 kilometers Vary your speed frequently and change up through the gears early Do not labor the engine Do not tow during the first 1000 miles 1600 kilometers ECONOMICAL DRIVING Fuel economy is affected by several things such as how you drive the conditions you drive under and how you maintain your vehicle There are some things to keep in mind that may improve your fuel economy e Accelerate and slow down in a smooth moderate fashion e Drive at steady speeds without stopping e Anticipate stops slowing down may eliminate the need to stop e Combine errands and minimize stop and go driving e Close the windows
149. when the desired selection appears in the display If you change the language setting the display indicates that the system is updating When complete SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu Factory Defaults Return to the factory default settings This selection does not erase your indexed information phonebook call history text messages and paired devices 1 Press OK to select and then press OK again when Restore Defaults appears in the display 2 Press OK to confirm Master Reset Completely erase all information stored on SYNC phonebook call history text messages and paired devices and return to the factory default settings Press OK to select The display indicates when complete and SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu Install Application Install applications you have downloaded Press OK and scroll to select Press OK to confirm System Info Access the Auto Version number as well as the FPN number Press OK to select MAP Profile This is a Bluetooth component which can further help your phone with the exchange of text messages Exit the current menu 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 412 SYNC SYNC APPLICATIONS AND SERVICES IF EQUIPPED Note In order for the following features to work your cellular phone must be compatible with SYNC To check your phone s compatibility visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca e SYN
150. window Po IBA Memory seat Second row seats fs Passenger side front window 4 Battery saver relay interior demand lamps and seat power 5 20A Smartamplifer 6 5A J Not used spare T 5A Power mirror switch Driver door module Driver seat module Keypad 8 10 Ss Power liftgate sd Power liftgate 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Fuses 291 number rating susci transceiver module Run accessory relay Front wiper motor relay display Interior lighting Puddle lamps Backlighting Backup lamp 18 10A Third row power seats Start button run indicator Keypad illumination Brake shift interlock Powertrain control module wake up Anti theft system P 10A jNetused spre 22 30A Homreay LA M Instrument cluster LL E e control module I3 iba ieste release Ignition switch Push button start switch Intelligent access module Not used spare Radio Global positioning system module 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 292 Fuses number rating park lamps Front side markers Trailer tow controller 32 15A Driver window switch and motor Power lock switches Moonroof 110V AC power point Interior rearview mirror Not used spare 10A Blind spot monitor 2nd row heated seats Reverse sensing system Rearview camera Heads up display Climate con
151. 15 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 158 Seats Second Row Heated Seats If Equipped WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly To operate the heated seats Press the heated seat button located on the rear of the floor console to cycle through the various heat settings and off Warmer settings are indicated by more indicator lights 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Seats 159 CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS IF EQUIPPED Heated Seats WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness dia
152. 30 X 10 C143 2b 079 10 ZIdST OZ MS OX9 TIO Jojo pue g oneuug aoutSuo 9A TFE CSW SAO 0ZMS OX OSM AVS 3J 1910 0 X 10 qSO 0ZMS OX pao 19qumu 41ed pIo JO oureu 31ed po q A TO 1030 X ooyuAS AmA Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 2015 Flex 471 USA fus Capacities and Specifications 364 AyUCIICM pIOJ INOA AQ por2A00 30U SI Jey VseUTep outguo 0 peer prnoo pue Kressooouun ore Aou eurguo INOA ur SoAHrppe ro eutSuoe ejueuro ddns osn jou oO SOUISUD OUT OSeS 10 JIEN uoreouno Tdv 9uj s amp ejdstrp pue sqjuouroumbod NS IdV SJOOU Jey pels jrsoostA popueuiruioo98 JO IO eurgue ue SN 03 e qejdoooe OSTE st 3 suoneorroeds pIo 199W yey SPO 3uepeAmbo IO s ro ourguo 3je1310 0 X VSN 0 poustsop uooq seq USU MOK Sut 10 SUNYI OAV PMY 107 Jo eop pezuotpne no IIS egeurep uorssrursuerd osneo ABUL prj popueuruo294 y ueuj Joujo pmp Aue JO Sf TeA19 UI 92IAI9S 31291102 BY auruiIojop 03 WOMDUWALO UL BDUDUAIUWUL PaINpayos 0 19Joy pm AT NOOUAI OSN Apuo prnous AT NOOUMW ember yey suorssmusuer orpeulogny segueqo pmp SUMP Area ALU junour enjoy Ayoedeo py Ap oyeurxoiddy odmnqrej o qrssod pue ogeurep uro1s s yLIq ur 3 nso4 ACU sperio1eur ayo I0 sjonpoud umo o1jed Joyes VTP ULM uomeurumquo Arp pue uea pm exe1q deay sprepuejs ooueurrojJed pJo ay JoowW Jou pue oouteulJ0JIod oxeiq popeJ8op asneo ABW pm pepueuruioo2ad y UR 19470 pmg Aue Jo SN zV 8929 N SSA Surjeeur juepeAmbo 10 pmq4 oxeig
153. 301 left hand side WW 1202 rear We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts com for scheduled maintenance These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance emissions and durability Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE USCAR 36 For spark plug replacement contact an authorized dealer Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals Refer to scheduled maintenance information 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Capacities and Specifications 367 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number is located on the driver s side instrument panel ME Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number The Vehicle Identification Number VIN contains the following information G Assembly plant A World manufacturer identifier X xxxxxx B Brake system Gross Vehicle p Weight Rating GVWR Restraint DEF XXX Devices and their location C Make vehicle line series body type G H D Engine type E Check digit F Model year A C H Production sequence number 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide g
154. 4 USA fus 390 Audio System AUXILIARY INPUT JACK AN WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving 4 WARNING For safety reasons do not connect or adjust the settings on your portable music player while your vehicle is moving AN WARNING Store the portable music player in a secure location such as the center console or the glove box when your vehicle is moving Hard objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while your vehicle is moving The auxiliary input jack allows you to connect and play music from your portable music player through your vehicle speakers You can use any portable music player designed for use with headphones Your audio extension cable must have male Vs inch 3 5 millimeter connectors at each end 1 Switch off the engine radio and portable music player Set the parking brake and pu
155. 49 different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfun
156. 5 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 407 Accessing Your Phone Settings These are phone dependent features Your phone settings allow you to access and adjust features such as your ring tone text message notification modify your phone book and also set up automatic download 1 Press the phone button 2 Scroll until Phone Settings appears then press OK 3 Scroll to select from the following options When you select You can Phone Status See the provider name signal power battery power and roaming status of your connected phone Press OK to select and scroll to view the information When done press OK again to return to the phone status menu Set Ringer Select which ring tone sounds during an incoming call one of the system s or your phone s 1 Press OK to select and scroll to hear Ringer 1 Ringer 2 Ringer 3 and Phone Ringer 2 Press OK to select Note If your phone supports in band ringing your phone s ringer sounds when Phone Ringer is chosen Message Notification Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when a text message arrives 1 Press OK to select and scroll between Message Notification On or Message Notification Off 2 Press OK to select 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 408 SYNC Modify Phonebook Modify the contents of your phone book such as add delete download Press OK to
157. 58 Towing Your vehicle may tow a trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your vehicle configuration on the following chart towing class weight drive Class I drive Class I drive Class I drive Class III drive Class III 3 5L GTDI all wheel 9622 Ib 4366 kg 4500 Ib 2042 kg eam Mm ee For towing trailers up to 3500 pounds 1588 kilograms use a weight carrying hitch and ball which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue loads through your vehicle s underbody structure For towing trailers over 3500 pounds 1588 kilograms up to 4500 pounds 2042 kilograms we recommend you use a weight distributing hitch to increase front axle load while towing For towing trailers up to 4500 pounds 2042 kilograms use a weight carrying hitch and ball which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue loads through your vehicle s underbody structure 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Towing 259 ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS POR these guidelines for safe towing Do not tow a trailer until you drive your vehicle at least 1000 miles 1600 kilometers e Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer e See the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper installation and adjustment specifications e Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer See your scheduled maintenance informat
158. 62 fluid specification 362 Advanced menu options CA prompts languages defaults Selectshift SST E 200 master reset installing Auxiliary Input Jack 465 applications anni 410 Auxiliary input jack Line in 390 Ee supplemental restraint 52 Auxiliary powerpoint 175 and child safety seats SOMNI 53 A V inputs SEENE EENES n9 eia 391 473 description sseseseeeees 52 disposal ssseeeeee 62 B driver airbag anexos 52 passenger airbag 52 Battery sss 309 side airbag 1st 52 57 acid treating emergencies 309 jumping a disabled battery 273 Air cleaner filter 312 313 366 maintenance free 309 Air conditioning 138 replacement specifications 366 manual heating and air SET VICIAG Sres eerie eIn 309 conditioning system 138 Blind Spot Information Air filter Cabin use 147 XI P 237 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 564 Index Booster seats ssseseess 33 ia E S cette tete es 326 Brak s seasann nia 2911 Wiper blades sss 323 antr loclk acinis 212 Climate control see Air anti lock brake system on conditioning or Heating 138 warning light s s brake warning light 5 5 Climate voice Commands srs a fluid checking and adding 308 Clo
159. 7 483 System settings ssss 498 T Temperature control see Climate control 138 140 142 507 Text messaging 404 479 Text messaging sending downloading deleting 405 407 Third row power fold seat 167 Tilt steering wheel 90 91 TES E 332 333 353 alignment 535 erste aereo 346 CAN OY p 332 CHANGING 4s rs 353 355 checking the pressure 342 inflating ssssssssese 340 lapel esunsun 339 Teplaelng estt to 344 YOUAGING ie oone s 347 safety practices 346 sidewall information 335 snow tires and chains 347 spare bre tree isi ses 353 terminology 5 recie 333 tire Srade8 xoci aen 333 tread WEE eese 332 342 Touchscreen features CIMAS V aas cinerea 507 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 570 Index TOMINE Ju epe 256 264 265 V recreational towing 265 Trailer Brake Vehicle health report 415 493 Controller Integrated 261 Vehicle Identification Number trailer towing aN ane aces 256 VIN EEE E Wave E TUB E l paO odo Rede 367 WLECKED sees 264 Vehicle loading 248 Traction control 14 2 nmm 213 Ventilating your vehicle 187 Traffic Directions and irn commands in media m InfOrmiatlOD assisen skes 417 IPSIS qeu agite quitedimadquf eng Voice commands in phone ioo
160. 70 oet ngs MyKey ues sue dr eR pas dears RUP SD en ce we 70 Crealllg ius wd e EAT eR CR EEE SES d S ELS S debe ob vedo 71 CVC AIAN e p Ss dan bench peut stage a takes dh a ah et es ata cds eee ees pede aia Sion tae 72 Systemi Status 2 fsx dna Poe eas hae ese dagen wee aed doy Ys 72 Remote start MyKey 0 0 ccc ee eee T2 Troubleshooting MyKey 000000 ce eee eee 73 Locks 74 Locking and unlocking 0 0 0000 eee ee eee 74 SecuriCode keyless entry keypad 2 0 0 0 00000 eee eae 82 Security 85 SecuriLock passive anti theft system 0 0 00 000 0005 85 Antet alan 24235 Seen aed hee tee SPs doe eee ed ead 88 Steering Wheel 90 Adjusting the steering wheel llle 90 Steering wheel controls vc ear wed ed a ee eS Be EE Ee 92 Pedals 95 Adjustable pedals guo ose ead bees PRESS eek ace eed 95 Wipers and Washers 96 Windshield wipers lllsee es 96 Rain sensing Wipers 4 60 06 0444 e enews Sed de Yd Rd AE aed Windshield washers 0 0 0 0 00 cc ee eee Rear window wiper and washer 0 0000 e eee 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Table of Contents 3 Lighting 98 Lighting Controls o s4 0 head eh SM RRS RE REE aE SS xs 98 AUtOlAMDS 5 ci 4 2 9 oh es Sa One a dea t ER Ree Ease haw eK 99 Instrument lighting dimmer sosser serea 0000002 e eee 100 Headlamp exit delay 0 0 ee nee 100 Daytime runni
161. 78 MyFord Touch If Equipped Phone Menu Options Press the top left corner on your touchscreen to select from the following options Phone Touch this button to access the on screen numerical pad to enter a number and place a call During an active call you can also choose to e Mute the call e Put it on hold e Turn on privacy returns the call to your cellular phone e Join two calls e End the call Quick Dial Set up favorite contacts from your phonebook or history folder Phonebook Touch this button to access and call any contacts in your previously downloaded phone book The system places the entries in alphabetical categories summarized at the top of the screen To turn on contact picture settings if your device supports this feature press Phone gt Settings gt Manage Phonebook gt Download photos from Phonebook gt On History After you connect your Bluetooth enabled phone to SYNC you can access any previously dialed received or missed calls You can also choose to save these to your Favorites or to Quick Dial Note This is a phone dependent feature If your phone does not support downloading call history using Bluetooth SYNC keeps track of calls made with the SYNC system Messaging Send text messages using your touchscreen See Text messaging later in this section Settings Touch this button to access various phone settings such as turning Bluetooth on and off managing your phonebook and m
162. 82 Playing music by artist album genre playlist tracks similar sse 426 POI categories sssee 512 Point of Interest POI 512 Power distribution box SES FUSES ceci oett 285 Power door locks 74 Power liftgate ssssss 80 Power mirrors 106 Powerpoint sesssss 175 Power steering 245 fluid checking and adding 308 fluid refill capacity 362 fluid specifications 362 Power Windows ss 105 Privacy information 394 448 Push button start system 182 Putting a call on off hold 401 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 568 Index Q Safety belts E A E E sud see Safety restraints 40 43 oem e syeritatituum Safety defects reporting 283 R Safety information 393 446 Safety restraints 40 41 43 Belt Minder 44 extension assembly 43 for adults ssssss 40 41 tor children erts 20 inflatable safety belt 46 Rear heated seats 158 Occupant Classification Rear view camera SensOF ssseeeeeen 54 display cea cossecistu rao pud 222 498 safety belt maintenance 48 Bear window seat belt maintenan
163. C 56 on Lincoln Black Label Presidential or Reserve Leathers because it can damage these and other semi aniline leather seating fabrics It can also damage surrounding microfiber accent surfaces To clean Lincoln Black Label Presidential or Reserve Leather first vacuum the seats to remove loose dirt Then wipe the leather with a clean soft cloth dampened with lukewarm water and a mild soap Wipe the leather again with a slightly damp cloth to remove soap residue and dry with a soft cloth To maintain the leather s resiliency it should be cleaned whenever soiled CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS Note Do not use chrome cleaner metal cleaner or polish on wheels and wheel covers A clearcoat paint finish coats aluminum wheels and wheel covers In order to maintain their condition e Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits of dirt and brake dust accumulation Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water when you have completed the cleaning process e To remove tar and grease use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover e Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers e Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers e Industrial strength heavy duty cleaners or cleaning chemicals in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt could wear away the clearcoat finish over time 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1s
164. C Services if equipped United States only Provides access to traffic directions and information such as travel horoscopes stock prices and more e 911 Assist Can alert 911 in the event of an emergency e Vehicle Health Report Gf equipped United States only Provides a diagnostic and maintenance report card of your vehicle 911 Assist WARNING Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on prior to a crash the system will not dial for help which could delay response time potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash WARNING Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash the system or phone may be damaged or non functional WARNING Always place your phone in a secure location in the vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a crash Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly Note SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident Note Before setting this feature on ensure that you read the 911 Assist privacy notice later in this section for important information Note If 911 Assist is turned on or off by any user that setting applies for all paired
165. CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote The Gracenote logo and logotype and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Gracenote Gracenote End User License Agreement EULA This device contains software from Gracenote Inc of 2000 Powell Street Emeryville California 94608 Gracenote 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 544 Appendices The software from Gracenote the Gracenote Software enables this device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music related information including name artist track and title information Gracenote Data from online servers Gracenote Servers and to perform other functions You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote s providers If so all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote Gracenote Content Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non commercial use only You agree not to assign copy transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data except in a Tag associated wi
166. California The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply 7 Assignment You may not resell assign or transfer this Agreement or any of your rights or obligations except in totality in connection with your permanent transfer of the Telenav Software and expressly conditioned upon the new user of the Telenav Software agreeing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement Any such sale assignment or transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result in immediate termination of this Agreement without liability to Telenav in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of the Telenav Software Notwithstanding the foregoing Telenav may assign 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Appendices 539 this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice provided the assignee remains bound by this Agreement 8 Miscellaneous 8 1 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between Telenav and you with respect to the subject matter hereof 8 2 Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement Telenav retains all right title and interest in and to the Telenav Software including without limitation all related intellectual property rights No licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this Agreement are intended to or shall be granted or conferred by imp
167. E ON THE DEVICE WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE This EULA grants you the following license e You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICE and as otherwise interfacing with systems and or services provide by or through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and service providers 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Appendices 529 DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS Speech Recognition If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition component s you should understand that speech recognition is an inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent in the process Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process Limitations on Reverse Engineering Decompilation and Disassembly You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble nor permit others to reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation Limitations on Distributing Copying Modifying and Creating Derivative Works You may not distribute copy make modifications to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable
168. FA8J 194321 AA FSC MIX Paper FSC C102270 Table of Contents 1 Introduction 10 Child Safety 18 Installing child seats suae ee Ra a RE e xw 20 Booster S6dlS 22 3 Screener deor e ed ee dor a bbe ees 32 Child seat positioning lt s s sess lille 35 Child Safety loGKS seniai ote eS RS Cis EV Eu 37 Safety Belts 38 Fastening the safety belts 2l 40 Safety belt height adjustment 0 0 0 0 0000s 43 Safety belt warning light and indicator chime 44 Dalety belt r tnader 2 ig so ce he ur ae oA Se eee es 44 Rear inflatable safety belt 2 0 0 0 0 000 eee eee 46 Child restraint and safety belt maintenance 48 Personal Safety System 49 Supplementary Restraints System 50 Driver and passenger airbags 0 000020 eee eee 52 Front passenger sensing system llle 54 Side alrDags oa dea eek RUE be HW Ea ee ha E Y ee ee eS 57 Safety canopy curtain airbags 2 llle 59 Crash sensors and airbag indicator 0 00000 eee eae 61 Airbag disposal vv 9 ces d RESTI S PAY Shae dons 62 Keys and Remote Control 63 General information on radio frequencies 000005 63 Remote coRbEOl 2 4 6 0 248 4 case p xe S ewhadadadeataad 64 KEYS uses Ree D PER RUPES Oud Yung Ob NV RET URN e eques 64 Replacing a lost key or remote control 000000005 69 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 2 Table of Contents MyKey
169. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly Note The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident Note Before setting this feature on make sure that you read the 911 Assist privacy notice later in this section for important information Note If any user turns 911 Assist on or off that setting applies for all paired phones If 911 Assist is turned off either a voice message plays or a display message or icon comes on or both when your vehicle is started after a previously paired phone connects Note Every phone operates differently While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones some may have trouble using this feature If a crash deploys an airbag excludes knee airbags and rear inflatable safety belts if equipped or activates the fuel pump shut off your SYNC equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth enabled phone You can learn more about the 911 Assist feature visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca e For information on airbag deployment see the Supplementary Restraints System chapter e For information on the fuel pump shut off see the Roadside Emergencies chapter 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 492 MyFord Touch If Equipped Setting 911 Assist On If your vehicle i
170. Guide in Vehicle When kept in the vehicle the User s Guide will be a ready reference for you and other users unfamiliar with the Windows Automotive based system Please make certain that before using the system for the first time all persons have access to the User s Guide and read its instructions and safety information carefully WARNING Operating certain parts of this system while driving can distract your attention away from the road and possibly cause an accident or other serious consequences Do not change system settings or enter data non verbally using your hands while driving Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations This is important since while setting up or changing some functions you might be required to distract your attention away from the road and remove your hands from the wheel General operation Voice Command Control Functions within the Windows Automotive based system may be accomplished using only voice commands Using voice commands while driving allows you to operate the system without removing your hands from the wheel 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 534 Appendices Prolonged Views of Screen Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while you are driving Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention Even occasional sho
171. IDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Index 563 911 Assist ooo 412 491 All Wheel Drive AWD driving off road 204 A Ambient mood lighting 497 ABS see Brakes PNE 219 AMIEM inni merat 456 Antifreeze USB pom nee YOW qgg see Engine coolant s 298 Anti lock brake system Accessing call history phone book during active call 401 see Brakes ssccsissiegiassastanteciecenee 212 Anti theft system 85 88 BCC your calendar Glive 490 aune the le aw 85 88 Accessing your media menu disarming a triggered system 88 feat fes xsisasieseticiieeeecaeies 423 A i h Audio system Eu poe IMENU 402 Single CD 376 381 382 Audio system Accessory delay 106 ues adit oso 316 381 382 Active call menu options 401 AM Automatic transmission Active Park Assist 218 driving an automatic Adaptive Cruise Control 298 uae D aa is uid adding siirsi erresis Adding pairing a phone 477 fig ud NANI MEN 304 Advanced menu options 410 430 fluid refill capacities 3
172. ION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Copt Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 560 Scheduled Maintenance Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Scheduled Maintenance 561 EXCEPTIONS There are several exceptions to the Normal Schedule They are listed below Normal vehicle axle maintenance Rear axles and power
173. NC an access point for a phone or a computer when turned on This forms the local area network within your vehicle for things such as game playing file transfer and internet browsing Press for more information Gateway Access Point Settings allows you to view and change settings for using SYNC as the internet gateway Gateway Access Point Device List allows you to view recent connections to your Wi Fi system 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 505 USB Mobile Instead of using Wi Fi your system can also Broadband use a USB mobile broadband connection to access the internet You must turn on your mobile broadband device on your personal computer before connecting it to the system This screen allows you to set up what is your typical area for your USB mobile broadband connection USB mobile broadband settings may not display if the device is already on You can select the following Country Carrier Phone Number User Name and Password Bluetooth Settings Shows you the currently paired devices as well as giving you your typical Bluetooth options to connect disconnect set as favorite delete and add device Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG Prioritize Choose your connection methods and change Connection Methods them as needed You can select to Change Order and have the system either always attempt to connect using a USB mobil
174. NY ANY THRID PARTY SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS MS MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL MS MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND OR THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U S TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS U S 250 00 e THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Appendices 533 End user notice Microsoft Windows Mobile for Automotive Important Safety Information This system Ford SYNC contains software that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license agreement Any removal reproduction reverse engineering or other unauthorized use of the software from this system in violation of the license agreement is strictly prohibited and may subject you to legal action Read and follow instructions Before using your Windows Automotive based system read and follow all instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual User s Guide Not following precautions found in this User s Guide can lead to an accident or other serious consequences Keep User s
175. OTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Appendices 545 EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE CONTENT GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND OR CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR IN THE CASE OF GRACENOTE CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED GRACENOTE IS NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT NEITHER GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER Gracenote 2007 Vehicle with SYNC only FCC ID KMHSG1G1 IC 1422A SG1G1 Vehicle with SYNC and MyFord Touch or MyLincoln To
176. Power button Release both buttons after 2 3 seconds Please allow a few minutes for the reset to complete After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC system 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 442 MyFord Touch If Equipped GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving A Phone B Navigation or Information if your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation C Climate D Settings E Home F Information G Entertainment This system uses a four corner strategy to provide quick access several vehicle features and settings The touchscreen provides easy interaction with your cellular phone multimedia climate control and navigation system The corners display any active modes within those menus such as phone status or the climate temperature 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 443 Note Some featu
177. Refer to the MyKey chapter Using the Rear Sensing System The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in R As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the rate of the audible warning increases When the obstacle is fewer than 12 inches 30 centimeters away the warning sounds continuously If a stationary or receding object is detected farther than 12 inches 30 centimeters from the side of the vehicle the tone sounds for only three seconds Once the system detects an object approaching the warning sounds again A Coverage area of up to 6 feet f N 2 meters from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper A cN k 4 b bmi Ss The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in R e and moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph 5 km h or less e but not moving and a moving object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of 3 mph 5 km h or less e and moving at a speed of less than 3 mph 5 km h and a moving object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph 5 km h 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 218 Parking Aids ACTIVE PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED WARNING This system is designed to be a supplementary park aid It may not work in all conditions and is not intended to replace the driver s attention and judgment The driver is responsible for avoiding ha
178. Ride com to register and check your eligibility for complimentary services Standard phone and message rates may apply Subscription may be required You must also have the active SYNC Services Bluetooth enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the system in order to connect to and use SYNC Services See Using SYNC with your phone for pairing instructions Note This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your mobile phone Make sure your mobile phone is not blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services Note The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions Any navigation features are provided only as an aid Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver if you would be placed in an unsafe situation or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of errors changes in roads traffic conditions or driving conditions Note When you connect the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle s current location travel direction and speed to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches you request Furthe
179. SIN je191030 A juta2riqn 207 pue Surjexjouoq 3je194030 N 9seor8 UMYT aseary osodunq nmgy pij aeg IPA 1070W IJULUWOJM dJ uSIH A3ISOOSIA MOT p LOC 3J 4910 0 A juop peAmbo JO oureu 31ed po q CI6870 Zo 8I IST D qd ep z IO TD sqzenb 9 TT UOISSNUSUCI GG 19 CI 0D syzenb GOT UOISSTUSUCI G9 JIOAI9SQ9I1 UO NIW pue Xv N Usemjogq Ayede CAN T99UA IY pmp ALda WN I9Jsuej I2M0d OAL I99UA TV PMY TerjuoJogrp Jeoq gc pin UOISSTUISUPJ oryeurogny S1Ioput 4o y o Soyo 97S pue yun sxoen yeas yo pooy Aremrmxne YOI pooy yoy 100q PM oxeag SNOILVOIJIO3dS 1VOINHO3 L Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 2015 Flex 471 USA fus 363 Capacities and Specifications epeueg pmj ISEM cV 9TH8IA HSA prenisputA Amend umuq epeue CSM onaiaisowa pmg q pue q g V LE OXO 3uexegrg uiu seguo I9useA PPUSPUM CS zT ZE 9Z I9USeA p 9TUSpUtA UIDIUIOIq 3J 494030 A CTF 02 ue Jon CTO ST 3b 2ST 6d PPAL6N SSM poppet urgu epeued g TAS 9A9 quejoop ezeoqnuy ysooqooy 9A IGE gluepooo usuy CS a TIde OA ogueJ 3Je1910 0 X T6 2D suenb zer outguo 9A TFE V 9P60ZIN SSM n GISHT OSMS OX0 Qo wa awe IIIJ 10 C148 2b 079 ZIdSTOEMS OXO urgu NE TO 1030 JX puo g oneuu s CSA SAO OEMS OX OEMS AVS 176100109 ysoogooy 9A TSE 10 gSO 06MS OX V SP60CIN SSM jg HO UISUG j TO Jojo 2reuju amp g AmA epeue ZISAT OZMS OXO 0Z M9 AVS 3J1910
180. Turn the ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery This message will clear once the vehicle has been started and the battery state of charge has recovered Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will allow faster battery state of charge recovery Contact Dealer possible Factory Mode Contact Contact your authorized dealer as soon as Dealer possible BLIS Messages Blindspot Not Displayed when the blind spot information Available Sensor system cross traffic alert system sensors are Blocked See Manual blocked Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve Blindspot System Fault Displayed when a fault with the blind spot information system has occurred Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Cross Traffic Not Displayed when the blind spot information Available Sensor system cross traffic alert system sensors are Blocked blocked Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Information Displays 133 Cross Traffic System Displayed when a fault with the cross traffic Fault alert system has occurred Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Vehicle Coming From Displayed when the blind spot information X system with cross traffic alert CTA system is operating and senses a vehicle Messages LOW brake system should be inspected immediately Check Brake System Displayed when the brake system needs ser
181. USA fus 118 Instrument Cluster Service engine soon The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Normally the service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present However if after 15 seconds the service engine soon light blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing See the Readiness for inspection maintenance I M testing in the Fuel and Refueling chapter Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on board diagnostics system OBD IT has detected a malfunction Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in the Fuel and Refueling chapter If the light is blinking engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter Drive in a moderate fashion avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration and have your vehicle serviced immediately by an authorized dealer WARNING Under engine misfire conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter the fuel system interior floor coverings or other vehicle components possibly causing a fire Have an authorized dealer service your vehicle immediately Speed control if equipped RTT The speed control system indicator light changes color to indicate what mode the system
182. Uv 138 140 142 instrument panel n o 324 rear window esses 147 INCEPTION 2 nce eed 324 Dipstick plastic parts wo cece 321 automatic transmission WASHING eie pte te etel ta 320 hil siio e 304 WAXINE Pr 322 engirie Oll ecrire etre 297 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Index 565 Display settings cece 496 F Driveb lt 2 oes 361 i nd Driving under special Fail safe cooling conditions 203 205 208 Fleet MyKey programming 7O SANA Me oada 207 snow and LCE f 209 Floor T als aineen 268 through water 207 268 Fluid capacities 362 Dual automatic temperature Four Wheel Drive vehicles control DATO 140 142 driving off road 205 E ErGeeZzer cossin 179 Fuel Electronic message center 120 CAP usos EDU ME 194 Electronic stability control TUNE 215 capacity T DE seh stes tete vesti ene nra 362 choosing the right fuel 190 BETE TUIE p TUAE filler funnel 191 jump starting oo ees 273 filling your vehicle running out of fuel 191 with fuel oain 194 Emergency brake filter specifications 308 366 see Parking brake 212 fuel pump shut off 272 ission enniral sv Ste ous 1 octane rating 191 361 Heston sonal e X qualiby iiti eas
183. Wash e If tar or grease spots are present use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 322 Vehicle Care WAXING Regular waxing is necessary to protect the paint on your car from the elements We recommend that you wash and wax the painted surface once or twice a year When washing and waxing park your vehicle in a shaded area out of direct sunlight Always wash your vehicle before applying wax e Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives e Follow the manufacturer s instructions to apply and remove the wax e Apply a small amount of wax in a back and forth motion not in circles e Do not allow wax to come in contact with any non body low gloss black colored trim The wax discolors or stains the parts over time such as Bumpers Grained door handles Side mouldings Mirror housings e Windshield cowl area e Do not apply wax to glass areas e After waxing your car s paint should feel smooth and be free of streaks and smudges REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match your vehicle s color Take your color code printed on a sticker in the driver s door jamb to an authorized dealer to make sure you get the correct color e Before repairing minor paint damage use a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover to remove particles such as bird droppings tree sap insect deposits tar spots road
184. When opening The system stops when it detects an obstacle and a tone will sound three times Remove the obstacle to operate the liftgate 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 82 Locks Resetting the Power Liftgate The liftgate may not operate properly and you may need to reset it if any of the following conditions occur e A low voltage or dead battery e Disconnected battery e The liftgate is manually closed and left ajar Cunlatched To reset the power liftgate 1 Disconnect the battery for 20 seconds then reconnect the battery 2 Manually close and fully latch the liftgate 3 Power open the liftgate by using the remote control or the instrument panel button SECURICODE KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD IF EQUIPPED The keypad located near the driver window is invisible until touched and then it lights up so you can see and touch the appropriate buttons Note If you enter your entry code too fast on the keypad the unlock function may not work Enter your entry code again more slowly You can use the keypad to e lock or unlock the doors e recall memory features e enable or disable the autolock and autounlock e arm and disarm the anti theft alarm You can operate the keypad with the factory set 5 digit entry code This code is located on the owner s wallet card in the glove box and is available from an authorized dealer You can also create up to three of your own 5 digit person
185. When problems that may cause the left or right indicator not to illuminate only the information display message faults appear Switching the Systems Off and On One or both systems can be switched off temporarily by using the information display control refer to the Information Display chapter When you switch off the Blind Spot Information System you will not receive alerts and the information display will display a system off message The yellow alert indicator in the outside mirror will also flash twice The system switches back on whenever you switch the ignition on You can also have one or both systems switched off permanently at an authorized dealer Once switched off the system can only be switched back on at an authorized dealer COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED WARNING This system is designed to be a supplementary driving aid It is not intended to replace the driver s attention and judgment or the need to apply the brakes This system does NOT activate the brakes automatically Failure to press the brake pedal to activate the brakes may result in a collision WARNING The collision warning system with brake support cannot help prevent all collisions Do not rely on this system to replace driver judgment and the need to maintain distance and speed 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 242 Driving Aids Note The system does not detect warn or respond to potential collisions
186. XXXXXX TIRES RIMS XXQOCXX RIMS AT XXX kPa PSLCOLD AXX KPa XX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX EXT PNT XX RO XX DSO we TINTTR TIPPS TR TAXLE TTR SPR XXXXX XXX XX X XX XXX XX XXXX00000000 XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX MFD BY F BY FORD MC MOTOR 0 x XXXx LB XKKKG ome SNC e N A GAWR ng AR XXXX 8 WITH AVEC Tints PNEUS fXXXXX XXXX XXXX XXxXXX RIMS JANTES XXxXXX AT A kPa PSI LPC iani COLD A FROID xoxx xx JUMELEES VIN XXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE 200900 aa aii OX Aun m lil INTTR TTP PS TR TANE mi SPR X XX X XXXX XXX O 000000000000 XXX D000 000000XX WARNING Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle loss of control and personal injury 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Load Carrying 253 GCW Gross Combined Weight is the weight of the loaded vehicle GVW plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage
187. XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE XXXX XXXXX XXXXX EXTPNT XX XXXXXX LRC X DSO _XXXX WB TINTTR ITP PS TR TM ap SPR 1 XXXX XXX x XX X XXXX XX 000000000000 mY 9 XXXX XXXXXXX XX You can find a transmission code on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The following table tells you which transmission each code represents 6 speed automatic transmission 6F50 6 speed automatic transmission 6F55 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Accessories 369 ACCESSORIES For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle please contact an authorized dealer or visit our online store at www Accessories Ford com United States only Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly authorized dealer installed Ford Genuine Accessory found to be defective in factory supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories Ford Motor Company will warrant your accessory through the warranty that provides the greatest benefit e 24 months unlimited mileage e The remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty Contact an authorized dealer for details and a copy of the warranty Exterior style e Bug shield e Splash guards e Deflectors e Graphics e Spoiler Interior style e Ambient lighting eRear seat entertainment eDoor sill plates with logo e Backlit door sill plates eFloor ma
188. aa Ru RAM Sev aaO du Power Seats 5 esa ec e pea pu ow eae A XERCY TS FK BERG De Memory fUHCLlOl daeeco emi exa eh doREGU GGRO dae ae ee Rog Heat d seats 34 ure 94 esu EE He dw SRS e GaSe Heated and ventilated seats 2 000 000 0002 eee ee eee Rear seats i ea aes anae eee eens Universal Garage Door Opener If Equipped HomeLink wireless control system 0 0 aaaea aa Auxiliary Power Points Storage Compartments Center Console 2 vex ere 4 hae OR eS e a e hc ae E ae EUR Overhead console d eae e ERE VRAT EIE ed Starting and Stopping the Engine Ignition SWIUGD pi aue his ane p eR e ee we Cer uc ei RR PER dtes Engine block heater iss serm Rr oe IE Y DE RD 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 138 138 140 143 147 147 148 149 149 150 153 154 156 157 159 161 170 171 175 178 Table of Contents Fuel and Refueling Fuel quality usua dxem teET4ee RR Ree eR ES Running out of fuel ses er eg aes Refuelmg x4 ese eem xtX SE bd Ape ia a Fuel consumption s oes eeir 000 cee eee Transmission Automatic transmission 0 000000 eee ae All Wheel Drive If Equipped All wheel dies uude REP Choo eee S044 Brakes Brakes ede ne AAS DER EERE EMA HS Hints on driving with anti lock brakes Parking brake us wean wees xe S ER EA Traction Control Traction Control 0000000000000 000000 eee Stability Control
189. abled or in unlimited mode I cannot program the e The key or fob used to start the vehicle configurable settings does not have admin privileges e No MyKeys are created See Creating a MyKey I cannot clear the e The key or fob used to start the vehicle MyKeys does not have admin privileges e No MyKeys are created Refer to Creating a MyKey key dealer Security No MyKey functions e An admin fob is present at engine start with intelligent access e No MyKey has been created See Creating a key push button MyKey start MyKey distances do e The MyKey user is not using the MyKey not accumulate e An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys e The key system has been reset 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 74 Locks LOCKING AND UNLOCKING You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock and unlock your vehicle Power Door Locks The power door lock control is located on the driver and front passenger door panels A Unlock A 5 B Lock B e Remote Control You can use the remote control anytime your vehicle is not running Unlocking the Doors Two Stage Unlock A Press the button to unlock the driver door Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors The turn signals will flash Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control for four seconds to disable or enable two stag
190. access door in the g instrument panel To access and play music U U D from your card press the lower left corner of the touchscreen and then select SD Card from the list on the left side of the screen SD logo is a trademark of SD 3C EP m LLC y The ports are located either in the center E m USB Port console or behind a small access door in the instrument panel To access and play music from your device press the lower left corner of the touchscreen and then select the USB tab OX XO This feature allows you to plug in media playing devices memory sticks flash drives or thumb drives and charge devices if they support this feature In order to playback video from your iPod or iPhone if compatible you must have a special combination USB RCA composite video cable which you can buy from Apple When you connect the cable to your iPod or iPhone plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the USB port 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 470 MyFord Touch If Equipped Playing Music from Your Device Note The system is capable of indexing up to 30 000 songs Insert your device and select the SD Card or USB tab once the system recognizes it You can then select from the following options Repeat replays the currently playing song or album Shuffle plays music on the selected album or folder in random order Similar Music allows you to choose music similar to what
191. acturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in your vehicle Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt the lower anchors of the LATCH system or both you can attach the top tether strap The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions shown from top view e Second row bucket seats and i i i third row passenger side v he 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Child Safety 29 e Second row bench seats and third row passenger side Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether anchors Note If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off your vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat Keeping the child seat just touching your vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash ja Route the tether strap Second row outboard seat positions Route the child safety seat tether strap over the seat back under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts If needed remove the head restraint to imp
192. air to the windshield vents and de mister Air distribution to instrument panel and footwell vents turn off You can use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 142 Climate Control AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL WITH SONY AUDIO SYSTEM Note You can switch temperature units between Fahrenheit and Celsius See Menu features in the MyFord Touch or MyLincoln Touch chapter A Defrost Press the button to distribute air to the windshield vents and de mister Air distribution to instrument panel and footwell vents turn off You can use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice B Heated rear window Turns the heated rear window on and off See Heated windows and mirrors later in this chapter for more information If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors this button turns them on also C AUTO Press the button to turn on automatic operation Select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system adjusts fan speed air distribution air conditioning operation and selects outside air or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature You can also use the AUTO button to turn off dual zone operation by pressing and holding the button for more than two seconds D CLIMATE Press the button to turn the system on and off Switchi
193. al entry codes 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Locks 83 Programming a Personal Entry Code To create your own personal entry code 1 Enter the factory set code 2 Press the 1e2 on the keypad within five seconds 3 Enter your personal 5 digit code You must enter each number within five seconds of each other 4 For memory recall feature enter the sixth digit 1e2 to store driver 1 settings or 3e4 to store driver 2 settings Note Pressing 5e6 7 8 or 9 0 keypad numbers as a sixth digit will not recall a driver memory setting Note The factory set code cannot be associated with a memory setting 5 The doors will lock and then unlock to confirm that programming is complete You may also program a personal entry code through the MyFord Touch system Refer to the MyFord Touch chapter Tips e Do not set a code that uses five of the same number e Do not use five numbers in sequential order e The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal code Erasing a Personal Code 1 Enter the factory set 5 digit code 2 Press and release 1e2 on the keypad within five seconds 3 Press and hold 192 for two seconds This must be done within five seconds of completing Step 2 All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5 digit code will work 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 84 Locks Anti Scan Feat
194. alse blocked condition will either self clear or clear after a key cycle Switching to Normal Cruise Control WARNING Normal cruise control will not brake due to slower vehicles Always be aware of which mode is selected and apply the brakes when necessary You can manually change from adaptive cruise control to normal cruise control through the information display The cruise control indicator light will replace the adaptive cruise control indicator light if normal cruise control is selected The gap setting will not be displayed the system will not automatically respond to lead vehicles and automatic braking will not be activated The system will default to adaptive cruise control when the engine is started 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Driving Aids 237 BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM BLIS WITH CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT CTA IF EQUIPPED A N WARNING To help avoid injuries NEVER use the BLIS as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors and looking over your shoulder before changing lanes BLIS is not a replacement for careful driving BLIS aids the driver in detecting vehicles that may have entered the blind spot zone A The detection area is on both sides of the vehicle extending rearward from the exterior mirrors to approximately 10 feet 8 meters beyond the bumper The system alerts you if certain vehicles enter the blind spot zone while driving
195. an also manually Force Close the app by going to the phone s settings menu selecting Apps then finding the particular app and choosing Force stop Don t forget to restart the app afterwards then select Find New Apps on SYNC e On an iPhone with iOS7 to force close an app double tab the home button then swipe up on the app to close it Tab the home button again then select the app again to restart it After a few seconds the app should then appear in SYNC s Mobile App s Menu 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 440 SYNC cause s My Android There is a Reset the Bluetooth on your phone is bluetooth bug on phone by turning it off and then connected my some order turning Bluetooth back on If app s are versions of the you are in your vehicle SYNC running I Android OS that should be able to automatically restarted them may cause apps reconnect to your phone if you but I still cannot that were found press the Phone button find any apps on your previous vehicle drive to not be found again if you have not turned off bluetooth My iPhone phone The USB Unplug the USB cable from the is connected my connection to phone wait a moment and plug app is running I SYNC may need the USB cable back in to the restarted the app to be reset phone After a few seconds the but I still cannot app should appear in SYNC s find it on SYNC Mobile Apps Menu I
196. ant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle If necessary add enough prediluted engine coolant to bring the coolant level to the proper level Recycled Engine Coolant Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant since a Ford approved recycling process is not yet available D Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner Follow your community s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids Severe Climates If you drive in extremely cold climates e It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer increase the coolant concentration above 50 e A coolant concentration of 60 will provide improved freeze point protection Engine coolant concentrations above 60 will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage If you drive in extremely hot climates e It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer decrease the coolant concentration to 40 e A coolant concentration of 40 will provide improved overheat protection Engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the freeze and corrosion protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage Vehicles driven year round in non extreme climates should use prediluted engine coolant for optimum cooling system and engine protection 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing Octobe
197. any of the above locations register your vehicle identification number VIN and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations amp Global Growth Initiatives by emailing expcac ford com If you are in another foreign country contact the nearest authorized dealer In the event your inquiry is unresolved communicate your concern with the dealership s Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager If you require additional assistance or clarification please contact the respective Customer Relationship Center as previously listed Customers in the U S should call 1 800 392 3673 ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio contact Helm Incorporated at HELM INCORPORATED 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth Michigan 48170 Attention Customer Service Or to order a free publication catalog call toll free 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 a m 6 00 p m EST Helm Incorporated can also be reached by their website www helminc com Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card check or money order 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Customer Assistance 283 Obtaining a French Owner s Manual A French owner s manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by contacting Helm Incorporated using the contact information listed previously in this section REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS U S ONLY If you believe
198. any of your favorite places if programmed Fuel Prices Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle s location or on an active navigation route Movie Listings Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their show times if available Weather Touch this button to view the nearby weather current weather or the five day forecast for the chosen area Select Map to see the weather map which can show storms radar information charts and winds Select Area to select from a listing of weather locations Sports Info Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety of sports You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier access The score automatically refreshes when a game is in progress Ski Conditions Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area Sirius Travel Link Voice Commands Note In order to use Sirius Travel Link your vehicle must be equipped with navigation and your navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot EE Press the voice button on the steering wheel controls and when us prompted say any of the following Travel Link voice commands B day weather forecast Sports scores Fuel prices Traffic Movie listings Travel Link 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 489 Travel Link voice commands Sports headlines Sports schedule
199. any painted surface if these substances come in contact with your vehicle wash it off as soon as possible e Remove any exterior accessories before entering a car wash Stripes or Graphics if equipped Do not use a commercial or high pressure wand on the surface or edge of stripes and graphics This can cause damage to the film and cause the edge of the film to peel away from the vehicle surface Exterior Chrome Note Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface Note Do not use chrome cleaner metal cleaner or polish on wheels and wheel covers e Wash the vehicle first using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash e Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner Apply the product as you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes then wipe off the haze with a clean dry rag e Do not apply cleaning product to hot surfaces and do not leave cleaning product on chrome surfaces for a period of time exceeding that which is recommended e Note Using other non recommended cleaners can result in severe and permanent cosmetic damage Underbody Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts Use only approved products to clean plastic parts e For routine cleaning use Motorcraft Detail
200. ar the engine This decal also lists engine displacement Please consult your warranty information for complete emission warranty information On board Diagnostics OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine s emission control system This system is commonly known as the on board diagnostics system OBD II The OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards The OBD II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle When the service engine soon indicator illuminates the OBD II system has detected a malfunction Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate Examples are 1 The vehicle has run out of fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 2 Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 3 The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed See Easy Fuel No Cap Fuel System in this chapter 4 Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry out After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present the service engine soon indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started A driving cycle consists
201. arm will trigger 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 90 Steering Wheel ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving Note Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position See Sitting in the Correct Position in the Seats chapter 1 Unlock the steering column 2 Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position 2 4 _ L zi 3 Lock the steering column 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Steering Wheel 91 Power Tilt and Telescope Steering Column If Equipped WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving Note Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position Refer to Sitting in the Correct Position in the Seats chapter Use the control on the side of the steering column to adjust the position To adjust e tilt press the top or bottom of the control e telescope press the front or rear of the control Easy Entry and Exit Feature When you switch the ignition off the steering column will move to the full up and forward position to allow extra room to exit your vehicle The column will return to the previous setting when you switch on the ignition You can enable or disable this feature in the information display See General Information in the Information Displays chapter Memory Feature You can save and recall t
202. arning This feature is designed to increase durability and provide consistent shift feel over the life of the vehicle A new vehicle or transmission may have firm shifts soft shifts or both This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation Additionally whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed the strategy must be relearned Brake shift interlock WARNING Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working WARNING When doing this procedure you will be taking the vehicle out of park which means the vehicle can roll freely To avoid unwanted vehicle movement always fully set the parking brake prior to doing this procedure Use wheel chocks if appropriate WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer Note See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P Park when the ignition is on unless the brake pedal is pressed If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P Park with the ignition on and the brake pedal pressed it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle s brake lamps are not
203. ase the floor latches Make sure that there are no objects on the seat cushion that may restrict the seatback from folding flat 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 164 Seats 3 To return the seatback to the floor from tumbled position rotate the seat down until you hear it latching to the floor 4 To return the seatback to the upright position e Lift the seatback toward the rear of the vehicle and e Rotate the seatback until you hear a click locking it in the upright position Note The seatback will not raise if the rear latch hooks are not properly engaged to the floor striker If the seatback does not raise repeat steps 3 and 4 Third Row Seat Exit 1 Pull the strap located on the back of the second row seat This will fold the seat back forward Pull the strap a second time to tumble the seat forward allowing easy exit from the third row seat es Note The seat back must be folded flat in order to release the floor latches Make sure that there are no objects on the seat cushion that may restrict the seat back from folding flat 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Seats 165 2 To return the seatback to the floor from tumbled position rotate the seat down until you hear it latching to the floor 3 To return the seatback to the upright position e Lift the seatback toward the rear of the vehicle and e Rotate
204. ase the programmed HomeLink button and then begin programming your garage door opener See below for Steps 5 7 If the indicator light flashes rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light the HomeLink button is not programmed yet Do the following Press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release the hand held transmitter button every two seconds The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly once the HomeLink function button recognizes and accepts the hand held transmitter s radio frequency signal 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 172 Universal Garage Door Opener If Equipped After programming the HomeLink button follow Steps 5 7 as listed below to program your garage door opener Note You may need a ladder to reach the unit and you may need to remove the cover or lamp lens on your garage door opener 5 Press the learn button on the garage door opener motor and then you have 30 seconds to complete the next step 6 Return to your car 7 Press and hold the function button you want to program for two seconds then release Repeat this step Depending on your brand of garage door opener you may need to repeat this sequence a third time To program additional buttons repeat Steps 1 4 For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Erasing the Function Button Codes Note
205. ases if vehicle speed is too high the system may turn on multiple times gradually reducing vehicle speed This feature applies your vehicle brakes at individual wheels and if necessary reduces engine power If the trailer begins to sway the stability control light flashes The first thing to do is slow your vehicle down then pull safely to the side of the road and check for proper tongue load and trailer load distribution See the Load Carrying chapter for specific loading information RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS Note Do not exceed the trailer weight for your vehicle configuration listed in the chart below Note Make sure to take into consideration trailer frontal area Do not exceed e 20 feet 1 86 meters trailer frontal area if your vehicle can tow a Class I trailer e 40 feet 3 72 meters trailer frontal area if your vehicle can tow a Class III trailer Note For high altitude operation reduce the gross combined weight by 296 per 1000 feet 300 meters starting at the 1000 foot 300 meter elevation point Note Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers over a specified weight Be sure to check state regulations for this specified weight The maximum trailer weights listed may be limited to this specified weight as your vehicle s electrical system may not include the wiring connector needed to use electric trailer brakes 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 2
206. at back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seat back with your feet on the floor WARNING To reduce the risk of possible serious injury Do not stow objects in seatback map pocket or hang objects off seatback if a child is in the front passenger seat Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console Check the passenger airbag indicator lamp for proper airbag status Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the passenger seat sensing system WARNING Any alteration or modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system which could seriously increase the risk of injury or death This system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger seat and safety belt to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or not The front passenger sensing system uses a passenger airbag status indicator which will illuminate indicating that the front passenger frontal airbag is either ON enabled el G or OFF disabled The indicator lamp is located in the center stack of the instrument panel Note When the ignition is first turned on the passenger airbag status ind
207. ate in frontal near frontal and side crashes and in rollovers The safety belt pretensioners at the front seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body when activated This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety belts In frontal crashes the safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or if the crash is of sufficient severity together with the front airbags 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 40 Safety Belts FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS The front outboard and rear safety restraints in your vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts 1 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle e 2 To unfasten press the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle ral f Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy A N WARNING Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and the safety belt properly fastened The lap portion of the safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips The shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the chest Pregnant women should also follow this practice See the following figure 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Safety Belts 41 Pregnant wo
208. ate on the windshield in certain instances when using adaptive cruise control and or the collision warning system It will also illuminate momentarily when you start your vehicle to make sure the display works High beams Es Illuminates when the high beam headlamps are on Low fuel RTT Illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at or near empty Liftgate ajar RTT Illuminates when the ignition is on and liftgate is not c completely closed 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Instrument Cluster 117 Low tire pressure warning Illuminates when your tire pressure is low If the light remains 5 on at start up or while driving the tire pressure should be checked When the ignition is first turned to on the light will illuminate for 3 seconds to ensure the warning light is functional If the light does not turn on or begins to flash contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible Low washer fluid RTT AEN lllunminates when the windshield washer fluid is low Park lamps Illuminates when the park lamps are on Powertrain malfunction reduced power RTT Illuminates when a powertrain or an AWD fault has been ri detected Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Safety belt Reminds you to fasten your safety belt A Belt Minder chime 4 will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014
209. ate steadily Verify that the Traction Control System was not manually disabled using the information display control If the stability control light still illuminates steadily have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Operating your vehicle with Traction Control disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death The stability control light temporarily illuminates on engine Pdl Start up and flashes when a driving condition activates the stability system e The stability control off light temporarily illuminates on engine H EE start up and stays on when the traction control system is turned off or if a problem occurs in the stability system When the traction control system is turned off or on a message appears in the information display showing system status 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 214 Stability Control PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION WARNING Vehicle modifications involving braking system aftermarket roof racks suspension steering system tire construction and wheel or tire size may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the AdvanceTrac system In addition installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac system Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console the
210. ately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 139 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Glossary of Tire Terminology e Tire label A label showing the OE Original Equipment tire sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry e Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Also referred to as DOT code 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 334 Wheels and Tires e Inflation pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire e Standard load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at set pressure For example For P metric tires 35 psi 2 4 bar or 36 2 5 bar depending on tire s
211. ation Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Navigation then select 9 from the following Map Preferences Turn breadcrumbs on and off Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or bottom to top Route Preferences Preferred Route allows you to choose to have the system display the Shortest Fastest or most Ecological route first If you set Always Use Preferred Route to Yes the system uses the selected route type to calculate only one route to the desired destination Always Use Preferred Route bypasses route selection in destination programming The system only calculates one route based on the preferred route setting Eco Time Penalty allows you to select a low medium or high cost for the calculated Eco Route The higher the setting the longer the time allotment is for the route Have the system avoid freeways Have the system avoid tollroads Have the system avoid ferries or car trains Have the system use high occupancy vehicle lanes Navigation Have the system use guidance prompts Preferences Have the system automatically fill in State Province information 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 502 MyFord Touch If Equipped Traffic Preferences Have the system display areas where roadwork occurs driving conditions may occur and ice on the road may occur Have the system display any smog alerts announcements automatically Avoid Areas Enter specific a
212. ay e Try turning off the device resetting the device or removing the device s battery then trying again e Make sure you are using the manufacturer s cable e Make sure the USB cable is properly inserted into the device and the vehicle s USB port e Make sure that the device does not have an auto install program or active security settings Make sure you are not leaving the device in your vehicle during very hot or cold temperatures Make sure the device is connected to SYNC and that you have pressed play on your device e Make sure that all song details are populated e Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass storage to MTP class 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 525 Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services Traffic Directions and Information issues cause s I received a text e Your account that the Vehicle may not be Health Report is not activated website OR activated on the e This is a free feature but you must first register online to use it e Make sure that your VIN is correctly listed in your account e You may have the wrong VIN vehicle identification number listed I am unable to The preferred When you register your account retrieve the report dealer information you must list a preferred dealer If on the website or did not load one is already listed try selecting I receive a syste
213. ay apply when reporting The system allows you to check your vehicle s overall health in the form of a diagnostic report card The vehicle health report contains valuable information such as e Vehicle Diagnostic Information e Scheduled maintenance e Open Recalls and Field Service Actions e Unserviced items from vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer You can run a report after the vehicle has been running a minimum of 60 seconds by pressing the voice button and saying Vehicle health report or pressing the phone button 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 416 SYNC To run a report using the phone button 1 Press the phone button to enter Phone Menu 2 Scroll until Vehicle Health is selected and press OK 3 Scroll to select from the following options Vehicle Health Report options User Preferences Automatic Reports Press OK and select on Press OK to select or off Select On to have SYNC automatically and enter the menu prompt you to run a health report at certain Scroll to select from mileage intervals Note You must first turn this feature on before you can select the mileage intervals at which you would like to be prompted Mileage Intervals Press OK Scroll to select between 5000 7500 or 10000 mile intervals and press OK to make your selection Run Report Press OK for SYNC to run a health report of your vehicle s diagnostic systems and send the re
214. ays settings relative to the SYNC Bluetooth connection on your phone e Update your device s software firmware e Turn off the Auto phonebook download setting e Go to the website to review your phone s compatibility e Try turning off the device resetting the device or removing the device s battery then trying again Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 434 SYNC Possible Possible solution s cause s I am having trouble connecting my device SYNC does not recognize my device when I turn on the car Bluetooth audio does not stream SYNC does not recognize music that is on my device Possible device malfunction This is a device limitation e This isa phone dependent feature OR e The device is not connected e Your music files may not contain the proper artist song title album or genre information OR e The file may be corrupted OR e The song may have copyright protection which does not allow it to play e Try turning off the device resetting the device or removing the device s battery then trying again e Make sure you are using the manufacturer s cable e Make sure the USB cable is properly inserted into the device and the vehicle s USB port e Make sure that the device does not have an auto install program or active security settings Make sure you are not leaving the device in your vehicle during very hot or cold temperatures Make sure
215. bar greater than the maximum pressure a Ford dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 feet 8 66 meters away from the tire wheel assembly Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability Important Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle The two front tires or two rear tires should generally be replaced as a pair The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels originally installed on your vehicle are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system If the tire pressure monitoring system indicator is flashing the system is malfunctioning Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your tire pressure monitoring system or some component of the system may be damaged 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 346 Wheels and Tires Safety Practices WARNING If your vehicle is stuck in snow mud or sand do not rapidly spin the tires Spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and in
216. bber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 millimeters When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars the tire is worn out and must be replaced 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Wheels and Tires 343 Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional Tires can be damaged during off road use so inspection after off road use is also recommended WARNING Age Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather storage conditions and conditions of use such as load speed inflation pressure the tires experience throughout their lives In general tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear However heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used U S DOT Tire Identification Number Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifie
217. ber 2014 USA fus 14 Introduction Note Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies to SYNC or its features please note the following Once 911 Assist if equipped is enabled set ON 911 Assist may through any paired and connected cell phone disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or in certain vehicles the activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location such as latitude and longitude and or other details about the vehicle or crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not activate the 911 Assist feature See your SYNC chapter for more information Additionally when you connect to Traffic Directions and Information if equipped U S only the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle s current location travel direction and speed vehicle travel information only to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches that you request If you do not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information do not activate the service For more information see Traffic Directions and I
218. betes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury The heated seats will only function when the engine is running Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly To operate the heated seats Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off Warmer settings are indicated by more indicator lights If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the heated seats are on the feature will turn itself off You will need to reactivate it Cooled Seats The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running To operate the cooled seats A C Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle through the various cooling settings and off Cooler settings are indicated by more indicator lights 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA
219. box Delete All Messages allows you to delete current text messages from SYNC not your phone To delete the messages press OK to select The display indicates when all your text messages have been deleted and SYNC returns you to the text message menu Note SYNC does not automatically download all of your unread text messages at every ignition cycle as it does with call history and phonebook if automatic download is set to on Return exits the current menu when you press OK If you select Send Text Message 1 Press OK to select If the system detects your phone does not support this feature Unsupported appears in the display and SYNC returns to the main menu 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 406 SYNC Scroll to cycle through the message options in the following chart Press OK when the desired selection is in the display The system now needs to know who to send the message to Scroll to cycle through Phonebook or Call History entries You can also select Enter Number to audibly enter a desired number 5 Press OK to enter the desired menu and scroll to select the specific contact 6 Press OK when the contact appears and press OK again to confirm when the system asks if you would like to send the message Each text message is sent with the following signature This message was sent from my Ford or Lincoln E QI Pre defined text message options py Why 201
220. button to enter the Phone Menu Scroll until Services appears in the display Press OK to confirm and enter the Services menu The display indicates the system is connecting Press OK SYNC initiates the call to the Services portal Once connected follow the voice prompts to request your desired Service such as Traffic or Directions You can also say What are my choices to receive a complete list of available services from which to choose 6 To return to the Services menu say Services or for help say Help Receiving Turn by Turn Directions One oho 1 When connected to SYNC Services say Directions or Business search To find the closest business or type of business to your current location just say Business search and then Search near me If you need further assistance in finding a location you can say Operator at any time within a Directions or Business search to speak with a live operator You may also be prompted to speak with an operator when the automatic system has difficulty matching your voice request The live operator can assist you by searching for businesses by name or by category residential addresses by street address or by name or specific street intersections Operator Assist is feature of your SYNC Services subscription For more information on Operator Assist visit www SYNCMyRide com support 2 Follow the voice prompts to select your destination Once your destina
221. can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice commands See the media voice commands o connect using the system menu Plug the device into the vehicle s USB port Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu Scroll until Select Source appears and press OK Scroll to select USB and press OK Depending on how many digital media files are on your connected device Indexing may appear in the radio display When indexing is complete the screen returns to the Play Menu 6 Press OK and scroll through selections of e Play All Artists Albums Genres Playlists Tracks Explore USB Similar Music Return OU Go RO 53 When the desired selection appears in the display press OK to build your desired music selection 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 421 What s Playing EE At any time when a track is playing you can press the voice icon and ask the system What s playing The system reads the metadata tags if populated of the playing track to you Media Voice Commands EE Press the voice icon and when prompted say USB then any i of the following Play genre lt name gt Refine album lt name gt Refine artist lt name gt 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 422 SYNC Search song lt name gt Search track lt name gt Shuffle off Shuffle on
222. ce set the parking brake and activate hazard flashers 2 Place the transmission in park P and turn the engine off If the third row seat is stowed in the floor you will need to unstow it to access the spare tire and jack 3 Remove the carpeted floor panel located in the rear of the vehicle then remove the wing nut that secures the spare tire by turning it counterclockwise 4 Lift and remove the spare tire from the trunk 5 Remove the second wing nut that secures the jack retention bracket by turning it counterclockwise Then remove the jack kit from the vehicle 6 Remove the jack L shaped bolt and the wrench from the felt bag Fold down X the wrench socket to use to loosen the gt lug nuts and to operate the jack 7 Block the diagonally opposite D wheel Qa md 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Wheels and Tires 357 8 Remove the wheel cover with the lug wrench tip and loosen each wheel lug nut one half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground 9 The vehicle jacking points are shown here and are depicted on the warning label on the jack Note Jack at the specific locations to avoid damage to the vehicle 10 Put the jack in the jack notch next to the tire you are changing Turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground 11 Remove the lug nuts with the
223. ce PUT 48 defroster ss iis iag jap OE DEBE ES quise x Receivi Safety restraints ECan a text LATCH anchors ausscebiatsesnss 26 In8SSaBe niari Rin 404 480 i Safety seats for children 20 Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for Safety Compliance children UMP 20 Certification Label 368 Refrigerator sesiis 179 Satellite Radio 376 462 Relays sssssseete 284 285 Scheduled Maintenance Guide R Normal Scheduled emote entry system Maintenance and Log 551 illuminated entry 78 locking unlocking doors 74 75 SD CAFO siepi 391 469 510 replacing the batteries 65 Seat belts Remote start climate see Safety restraints 40 OPEFALON i d cerei eror 148 Seats sss 161 Reverse sensing system 217 child safety seats 20 Roadsid 270 climate control 160 oadside assistance easy access easyout feature 156 Roof Tack une etes tee tene 247 front seats 153 154 159 heated ssssessess 157 158 ferences ossessi Monti preferences ai memory seat ss 66 156 S second row seats 161 164 third row seats 164 166 167 Safety Belt Maintenance 48 Second row power fold seat 162 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Index 569 SecuriCode key
224. ce while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving Note In order to use Sirius Travel Link your vehicle must be equipped with navigation and your navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot Note A paid subscription is required to access and use these features Go to www siriusxm com travellink for more information Note Visit www siriusxm com traffic and click on Coverage map and details for a complete listing of all traffic areas covered by Sirius Travel Link Note Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible for any errors or inaccuracies in the Sirius Travel Link services or its use in vehicles When you subscribe to Sirius Travel Link it can help you locate the best gas prices find movie listings get current traffic alerts view the current weather map get accurate ski conditions and see scores to current sports games 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 488 MyFord Touch If Equipped e If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation touch the i Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab Traffic On Route and Traffic Nearby Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route nearby your vehicle s current location or near
225. cement for careful driving In this first example the left sensor is only partially obstructed zone coverage is nearly maximized Zone coverage also decreases when parking at shallow angles Here the left sensor is mostly obstructed zone coverage on that side is severely limited 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Driving Aids 239 System Lights and Messages ee The BLIS and CTA systems illuminate a yellow alert indicator in the outside mirror on the side of the vehicle the approaching vehicle is coming from Note The alert indicator dims when nighttime darkness is detected CTA also sounds an audible alarm and a message appears in the information display indicating a vehicle is coming from the right or left CTA works with the reverse sensing system which sounds its own audible alarm see the Parking Aids chapter System Sensors AN WARNING Just prior to the system recognizing a blocked condition and alerting the driver the number of missed objects will increase To help avoid injuries NEVER use the BLIS as a replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors and looking over your shoulder before changing lanes BLIS is not a replacement for careful driving Note It is possible to get a blockage warning with no blockage present this is rare and known as a false blockage warning A false blocked condition either self corrects or clears after a key cycle The s
226. certain likelihood of rollover AIRBAG DISPOSAL Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Airbags must be disposed of by qualified personnel 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Keys and Remote Control 63 GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The term IC before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet 10 meters Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater range A decrease in operating range could be caused by e weather conditions e nearby radio towers e structures around your vehicle e other vehicles parked next to your vehicle The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by other short distance radio transmissions for example amateur radios medical equipment wireless headphones remote controls and alarm systems If the frequen
227. cial item as that term is defined at 48 C F R FAR 2 101 is licensed in accordance with this End not User License Agreement and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the following Notice of Use and be treated in accordance with such Notice NOTICE OF USE CONTRACTOR MANUFACTURER SUPPLIER NAME HERE CONTRACTOR MANUFACTURER SUPPLIER ADDRESS 425 West Randolph Street Chicago IL 60606 This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 and is subject to the End User License Agreement under which this Data was provided 1987 2013 HERE All rights reserved If the Contracting Officer federal government agency or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided herein the Contracting Officer federal government agency or any federal official must notify HERE prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data Wi Fi hotspot data provided by JiWire 2013 JiWire Gracenote Copyright CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 2000 2007 Gracenote Gracenote Software copyright 9 2000 2007 Gracenote This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 773 6 161 1382 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593 and other patents issued or pending Some services supplied under license from Open Globe Inc for U S Patent 6 304 523 Gracenote and
228. cies are jammed you will not be able to use your remote control You can lock and unlock the doors with the key Note Make sure your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended Note If you are in range the remote control will operate if you press any button unintentionally Intelligent Access If Equipped The system uses a radio frequency signal to communicate with your vehicle and authorize your vehicle to unlock when one of the following conditions is met e You touch the inside of the front exterior door handle e You press the luggage compartment button e You press a button on the transmitter If excessive radio frequency interference is present in the area or if the transmitter battery is low it may be necessary to mechanically unlock your door You can use the mechanical key blade in your intelligent access key to open the driver door in this situation Refer to Remote Control in this chapter for more information on the location and use of the mechanical key blade 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 64 Keys and Remote Control REMOTE CONTROL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters IKTs If Equipped G3AOWSY 38 OL NOLLAVO XEvVOO AINO HAWOLSND A8 WAIN NA Use the key blade to start your vehicle and unlock or lock the driver door from outside your vehicle The transmitter portion functions as the remote control Note Your vehicle s keys came with a secu
229. cific album from the list to view If you then select Play the system only plays music from that specific album Press the voice icon and when prompted say Bluetooth Audio and then any of the following Media Menu Features The media menu allows you to select your media source how to play your music by artist genre shuffle repeat etc and also to add connect or delete devices 1 Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu 2 Scroll to cycle through When you select Play Menu Play your music by artist album genre playlists tracks similar music or to simply play all You can also choose to Explore USB to view the supported digital music files on your playing device See Play Menu later in this section for more information 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 424 SYNC Select Source SYNC USB Press OK to access music plugged into your USB port You can also plug in devices to charge them if supported by your device Once connected the system indexes any readable media files The time required to complete this depends on the size of the media content being indexed If Autoplay is on you can access media files randomly as they are indexed If turned off indexed media is not available until the indexing process is complete SYNC is capable of indexing thousands of average size media and notifies you if the maximum indexing file size is reached Blu
230. ck Vehicle Health Report Run a vehicle health report Services Access the SYNC Services portal Mobile apps Access mobile applications Help Hear a list of voice commands available in the current mode If equipped U S only System Interaction and Feedback The system provides feedback through audible tones prompts questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction voice settings You can customize the voice recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you learn to use the system You can change these settings at any time 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 396 SYNC Adjusting the Interaction Level ES Push the voice icon when prompted say Voice settings then us any of the following guidance Interaction mode advanced Provides less audible interaction and more tone prompts The system defaults to the standard interaction mode The system Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your request For example the system may ask Phone is that correct If turned off the system simply makes a best guess as to what you requested and you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings
231. ck isst eret 376 495 fluid refill capacities 362 Collision Warning System 241 fluid specifications 362 C Disp 123 lubricant specifications 362 UNDIS ON E parking 4 erietiect ate ee Genres 212 Console sseeeee 178 shift interlock 202 overhead seeeene 180 trailer user rct decano 261 rd 178 Coolant sse 298 C checking and adding 298 refill capacities 362 Capacities for refilling fluids 362 specifications s s s 362 Cargo net Wo Lm 179 p p G 376 381 382 Cross Traffic Alert 237 OD player ween 374 467 Cruise control oss 227 CD voice commands 468 Customer Assistance 270 Cell phone use ee 16 Ford Extended Service IE p E 371 Changing a tire sss 353 Getting roadside assistance 270 Child safety restraints 26 28 Getting the service you Child safety seats need reaiume ies a M IE 276 automatic locking mode Ordering additional owner s retractor seeeseeectetnenes 41 literature 282 DATOH ato dsscnthu a o Dee 26 Utilizing the Mediation Arbitration Child safety seats booster seats sssssseese 33 BROS TAI acinedisticiriimugnn ant Cleaning the touchscreen 445 D Cleaning your vehicle 320 engine compartment E 399 Defrost
232. cle 6 Reinstall the plug Gif equipped into the fuel fill inlet and turn the key clockwise to lock Note Do not overfill the tank or fuel spillage will occur If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed a Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may appear on the information display See the Information Displays chapter for more information At the next opportunity do the following 1 Safely pull off the road 2 Turn off the engine 3 Open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill opening 4 Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel provided with the vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and or allow the inlet to close properly If this action corrects the problem the message may not reset immediately It may take several driving cycles for the message to turn off A driving cycle consists of an engine start up after four or more hours with the engine off followed by city highway driving Continuing to drive with the message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Fuel and Refueling 195 FUEL CONSUMPTION Filling the Tank The advertised capacity is the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty Empty reserve is the amount of fuel in the tank after the
233. cle approaches B The vehicle will transition to your peripheral field of view as it leaves the blind spot mirror C 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Windows and Mirrors 109 Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert CTA If Equipped Refer to Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert CTA in the Driving Aids chapter INTERIOR MIRROR WARNING Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is moving Note Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum or ammonia based cleaning products You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference Some mirrors also have a second pivot point This lets you move the mirror head up or down and from side to side Auto Dimming Mirror Note Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror Mirror performance may be affected A rear center passenger or raised rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are detected from behind your vehicle It will automatically return to normal reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear view when backing up 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 110 Windows and Mirrors SUN VISORS Slide On Rod Rotate the visor toward the side window and exte
234. cles once they move fully into your lane C There may be issues with the detection of vehicles in front when driving into and coming out of a bend or curve in the road In these cases the system may brake late or unexpectedly You should stay alert and intervene when necessary If the front end of your vehicle is hit or damaged the radar sensing zone may be altered causing missed or false vehicle detections See your authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper coverage and operation Adaptive Cruise Control Not Available Several conditions exist which can cause the system to deactivate or prevent the system from activating when requested These conditions include e a blocked sensor e high brake temperature e a failure in the system or a related system 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Cruise Control 235 Blocked Sensor WARNING Do not use ACC when towing a trailer with brake controls Aftermarket trailer brakes will not function properly when ACC is activated because the brakes are electronically controlled Failing to do so may result in loss of vehicle control which could result in serious injury WARNING Do not use tires sizes other than those recommended because this can affect the normal operation of ACC Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control which could result in serious injury A message regarding a blocked sensor is displayed if
235. cluding e Towing flat tire change and battery jump starts e Out of fuel and lock out assistance e Travel expense reimbursement for lodging meals and rental car e Destination assistance for taxi shuttle rental car coverage and emergency transportation Transferable Coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Ford Extended Service Plan coverage expires you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner Whenever you sell your vehicle prospective buyers may have a higher degree of confidence that vehicle was properly maintained with Ford ESP thereby improving resale value Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly Maintaining Your Vehicle Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all scheduled maintenance and selected wear items The coverage is prepaid so you never have to worry about affording your vehicle s maintenance It covers regular checkups routine inspections preventive care and replacement of select items that require periodic attention for normal wear e Windshield wiper blades e Spark plugs except in California e The clutch disc e Brake pads and linings e Shock absorbers e Belts and hoses e Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment Contact your selling authorized Ford or Lincoln dealership today so they can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle and budget 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Ex
236. creen e If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation touch the i Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab Press Services 1 Select Connect to Services to initiate an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth enabled cellular phone Once you connect to the service follow the voice prompts to request the desired service such as Traffic or Directions You can also say What are my choices to receive a list of available services from which to choose Say Services to return to the Services main menu or for help say Help Receiving Turn by Turn Directions 1 When connected to SYNC Services say Directions or Business Search To find the closest business or type of business to your current location just say Business Search and then Search Near Me If you need further assistance in finding a location you can say Operator at any time within a Directions or Business search to speak with a live operator The system may prompt you to speak with an operator when it has difficulty matching your voice request The live operator can assist you by searching for businesses by name or by category residential addresses by street address or by name or specific street intersections Operator Assist is a feature of your SYNC Services subs
237. crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline you should always try to drive straight up or straight down When climbing a steep slope or hill start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling If you do stall out do not try to turnaround because you might roll over It is better to back down to a safe location Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill Too much power will cause the tires to slip spin or lose traction resulting in loss of vehicle control 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus All Wheel Drive If Equipped 209 Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating Do not descend in neutral instead disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear When descending a steep hill avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle Your vehicle has anti lock brakes therefore apply the brakes steadily Do not pump the brakes Driving on Snow and Ice WARNING If you are driving in slipper
238. cription For more information on Operator Assist visit www SYNCMyRide com support Follow the voice prompts to select your Destination After the route download is finished the phone call automatically ends If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation Turn by turn directions appear in the information display in the status bar of your touchscreen system and on the SYNC Services screen You also receive driving instructions from audible prompts When on an active route you can select Route Summary or Route Status using the touchscreen controls or voice commands to view the Route Summary Turn List or the Route Status ETA You can also turn voice guidance on or off cancel the route or update the route 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 486 MyFord Touch If Equipped If you miss a turn SYNC automatically asks if you want the route updated Just say Yes when prompted and the system delivers a new route to your vehicle If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation SYNC Services downloads your requested destination to the navigation system The navigation system then calculates the route and provides driving instructions See the Navigation system section for more information Disconnecting from SYNC Services 1 Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel 2 Say Good bye from the SYNC Services main menu SYNC Services quick tips Personalizing You can personaliz
239. ct HERE please visit www here com The Data is provided for your personal internal use only and may not be resold It is protected by copyright and is subject to the following terms this End User License Agreement and conditions which are agreed to by you on the one hand and HERE and its licensors including their licensors and suppliers on the other hand For purposes of these terms HERE shall mean a HERE North America LLC with respect to Data for the Americas and or the Asia Pacific region and b HERE Europe B V for Data for Europe the Middle East and or Africa The Data includes certain information and related content provided under license to HERE from third parties and is subject to the applicable supplier terms and copyright notices set forth at the following URL http corporate navteq com supplier_terms html TERMS AND CONDITIONS License Limitations on Use You agree that your license to use this Data is limited to and conditioned on use for solely personal noncommercial purposes and not for service bureau timesharing or other similar purposes Except as otherwise set forth herein you agree not to otherwise reproduce copy modify decompile disassemble or reverse engineer any portion of this Data and may not transfer or distribute it in any form for any purpose except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws License Limitations on Transfer Your limited license does not allow transfer or resale of
240. ction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 350 Wheels and Tires Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System Note Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor located inside the tire and wheel assembly cavity The pressure sensor is attached to the valve stem The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed Take care when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor You should always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer Check the tire pressure periodically a
241. cupant sensors which provide information to the restraints control module The restraints control module deploys activates the front safety belt pretensioners rear inflatable safety belts driver airbag passenger airbag seat mounted side airbags and the Safety Canopy Based on the type of accident frontal impact side impact or rollover the restraints control module will deploy the appropriate safety devices The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors The readiness of the safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working See the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light will either flash or stay lit N e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after the ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem or light is repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the supplemental restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a crash The safety belt pretensioners rear inflatable safety belts and the airbag supplemental restraint system are designed
242. d Tune see the following Tune chart SPORTS GAME Tune to the college name game Sirius 0 2232 lt Channel name gt 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 465 SAT 2 SAT 2 preset lt gt SAT 3 SAT 3 preset lt gt Sirius Satellite Radio Information Note Sirius reserves the unrestricted right to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes Note This receiver includes the eCos real time operating system eCos is published under the eCos License 4 om S A TEL i R A Dio Sirius satellite radio is a subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music sports news weather traffic and entertainment programming Your factory installed Sirius satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term that begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle See your authorized dealer for availability For more information on extended subscription terms a service fee is required the online media player and a list of Sirius satellite radio channels and other features please visit www siriusxm com in the United States www sirius ca in Canada or call Sirius at
243. d recirculated air When you select recirculated air the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior when used with A C and may reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle Note Recirculated air may turn off automatically or be prevented from turning on in all airflow modes except MAX A C to reduce risk of fogging E MAX A C Press the button to maximize cooling Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed F A C Press the button to turn air conditioning compressor on or off Use air conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency G AUTO Press the button to turn on automatic operation Select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system adjusts fan speed air distribution air conditioning operation and selects outside air or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature You can also use the AUTO button to turn off dual zone operation by pressing and holding the button for more than two seconds H Heated rear window Turns the heated rear window on and off See Heated windows and mirrors later in this chapter for more information If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors this button turns them on also I Defrost Press the button to distribute
244. d MAX lines are within the normal operating range there is no need to add fluid If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the performance of the system could be compromised seek service from your authorized dealer immediately POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering EPS system There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill For additional information on the electric power steering EPS system Refer to Driving Aids FUEL FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed WASHER FLUID CHECK WARNING If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 F 5 C use washer fluid with antifreeze protection Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications See the technical specifications chart in the Capacities and Specifications chapter Note The front and rear washer systems are supplied from the same reservoir State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol a common windshield washer antifreeze additive Washer fluids containing non methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather p
245. d and the gear shift level is in P Park Fuel Messages Action Description properly closed Fuel Level LOW Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition Access Messages No Key Detected Displayed if the intelligent access key is not detected by the system in the following three scenarios e When the start stop button is pressed in an attempt to either start the engine or cycle through the ignition states eWhen the engine is running and a door is opened then closed e When the vehicle s speed exceeds 10 mph 16 km h for the first time after starting Key Programmed x Displayed during spare key programming Keys Total when an intelligent access key is programmed to the system 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Information Displays 135 Access Messages Max Number of Keys Displayed during spare key programming when Learned the maximum number of keys have been programmed Press Brake to Start Displayed when the start stop button is pressed without the brake pedal being applied This is a reminder that the brake pedal must be applied when the start stop button is pressed in order to start the engine Restart Now or Key is Displayed when the start stop button is Needed pressed to shut off the engine and a Intelligent Access Key is not detected inside the vehicle Accessory Power is Displayed when the vehicle is in the accessory Active ignition state Starting Syst
246. d dealer as soon as possible When Inflating Your Tires When putting air into your tires such as at a gas station or in your garage the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph 82 km h for the light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure How Temperature Affects Your Tire Pressure The tire pressure monitoring system monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire While driving in a normal manner a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase about 2 to 4 psi 14 to 28 kPa from a cold start situation If the vehicle is stationary overnight with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi 21 kPa for a drop of 30 F 17 C in ambient temperature This lower pressure value may be detected by the tire pressure monitoring system as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the system warning light for low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light is on visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat If one or more tires are flat repair as necessary Check the air pressure in the road tires If any tire is under inflated carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires Inflate all the tires to the recomm
247. d the United States are not eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan coverage This information is subject to change For more information visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or www ford ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 374 Audio System GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC Those frequencies are AM 530 540 1700 1710 kHz FM 87 9 107 7 107 9 MHz Radio reception factors Distance and The further you travel from an FM station strength the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with the reception Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in the audio system muting CD and CD Player Information Note CD units play commercially pressed 4 75 inch 12 centimeter audio compact discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players Note Do not insert CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels into the CD playe
248. d to detect a parking space The vehicle is going faster than 20 mph 35 km h 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 222 Parking Aids The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space The vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission i e rolling forward when R Reverse is selected forward to detect a parking space An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning the vehicle properly Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly The vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space The system performs best when you drive the same distance past the parking space The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly i e not inflated correctly improper size or of different sizes moving truck bed etc The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly i e driving from REAR VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED WARNING The rear view camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage WARNING Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system WARNING Back up as slow as possible since higher speeds might l
249. d you switch the ignition off and remove the key from the ignition integrated keyhead transmitter only The lamps turn off if all the doors remain closed and e 25 seconds elapse e you insert the key in the ignition Gntegrated keyhead transmitter only e you press the START STOP button intelligent access key only Battery Saver If you leave the courtesy lamps dome lamps or headlamps on the battery saver shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch the ignition off Accessory Mode Battery Saver for Intelligent Access Keys If Equipped If you leave your vehicle in the run ignition state it will shut off once it detects a certain amount of battery drain or after 45 minutes 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Locks 79 LIFTGATE WARNING Do not allow people to travel in any area of your vehicle that does not have seats and safety belts Riding in a cargo area inside or outside of the vehicle is extremely dangerous In a crash people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Make sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt correctly Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death Manual Liftgate WARNING Make sure to close and latch the liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust fumes into your vehicle This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out If you must drive with the liftgate o
250. data such as medical equipment measuring equipment etc e Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply microcomputer controlled electric blankets touch sensor lamps etc 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Auxiliary Power Points 177 The power point can switch to a fault mode when it is overloaded overheated or shorted Unplug your device and turn the ignition off then on for overloading and shorting conditions Let the system cool off then turn the ignition off then on for an overheating condition The power point can provide power whenever the ignition is on and the indicator light is on The indicator light is located in the top left corner of the power point When the indicator light is e on power point is ready to supply power e off power point power supply is off ignition is not on e blinking power point is in fault mode 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 178 Storage Compartments CENTER CONSOLE Stow items in the cupholder carefully as items may become loose during hard braking acceleration or collisions including hot drinks which may spill Available console features include A A Cupholders B Utility compartment with audio input jack USB port power point and SD card B reader C Storage drawer with cupholders D Rear power point outlet 110 volt power point outlet and rear climate controls
251. de gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 204 All Wheel Drive If Equipped USING YOUR ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED AWD uses all four wheels to power the vehicle This increases traction enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicles cannot The AWD system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator Note Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off road use The AWD feature gives your vehicle some limited off road capabilities in which driving surfaces are relatively level obstruction free and otherwise similar to normal on road driving conditions Operating your vehicle under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty Note When an AWD system fault is present the warning Check AWD will display in the information display The AWD system is not functioning correctly and defaulted to front wheel drive When this warning is displayed have your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer Note The AWD Off message may also be displayed in the information display if the AWD system has overheated and defaulted to front wheel drive This condition may occur if the vehicle was operated in extreme conditions with excessive wheel slip such as deep sand To resume normal AWD function as soon as possible stop the vehicle in a safe location and stop the engine fo
252. de gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Wheels and Tires 335 INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall Information on P Type Tires P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size load index and speed rating The definitions of these items are listed below Note that the tire size load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example A P Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association that may be used for service on cars sport utility vehicles minivans and light trucks Note If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either the European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or the Japan Tire Manufacturing Association B 215 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire C 65 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width D R Indicates a radial type tire 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 336 Wheels and Tires E 15 Indicates the
253. disconnecting the jumper cables Removing the Jumper Cables Note In the illustration the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting boosting battery Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected 1 Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface 4 2 Remove the jumper cable on the negative terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 3 Remove the jumper cable from 2 i the positive terminal of the micare booster vehicle s battery a After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables 1 4 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the removed allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions disabled vehicle s battery AY 3 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 276 Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized dealer While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training equipment or both so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs This means that depending on the warranty repair needed you may have to take your vehicle to anoth
254. down or been replaced the OBD II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing To determine if the vehicle is ready for I M testing turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine If the service engine soon indicator blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid it means that the vehicle is ready for I M testing The OBD II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal driving A complete check may take several days If the vehicle is not ready for I M testing the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway or highway followed by 20 minutes of stop and go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine Then start the engine and complete the above driving cycle The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature Once the engine is started do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete If the vehicle is still not ready for I M testing the above driving cycle will have to be repeated 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Transmission 199 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is la
255. download later When you select On TAG appears on screen when HD Radio is active You can touch TAG to save the information of the song that is playing When you plug in your portable music player the information transfers if supported by your device When you are connected to iTunes the tags appear to remind you of the songs you would like to download See HD Radio information later in this chapter Direct Tune Touch this button to manually enter the desired station number Touch Enter when you are done 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 458 MyFord Touch If Equipped HD Radio Information If Available Note HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM FM radio Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts where available in addition to the analog broadcasts it already receives Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with free crystal clear audio and no static or distortion For more information and a guide to available stations and programming please visit www hdradio com When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology you may notice the following indicators on your screen HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital station and then HD changes to orange when digital audio is playing When this logo is available
256. dows may be cleaned with a non abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner U S or Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada e The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrates in the U S or Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid in Canada Replace your wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly e Do not use abrasive materials as they may cause scratches e Do not use fuel kerosene or paint thinner to clean any parts If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaning solution After cleaning rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water Note Do not use sharp objects such as a razor blade to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals as it may cause damage to the rear window defroster s heated grid lines 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 324 Vehicle Care CLEANING THE INTERIOR WARNING Do not use cleaning solvents bleach or dye on the vehicle s safety belts as these actions may weaken the belt webbing WARNING On vehicles equip
257. ds to place the second call Once actively in the second call press MENU 3 Scroll until Join Calls appears and press OK Press OK again when Join Calls appears Note SYNC supports a maximum of three callers on a multiparty conference call Enter Tones Enter tones such as numbers for passwords Scroll until the desired number appears in the display then press OK a tone sounds as confirmation Repeat as necessary 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 402 SYNC Phonebook Access your phonebook contacts 1 Press OK to select then scroll through your phonebook contacts 2 Press OK again when the desired selection appears in the display 3 Press the phone button Call History Access your call history log 1 Press OK to select then scroll through your call history options incoming outgoing or missed 2 Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display 3 Press the phone button to call the selection Exit the current menu Accessing Features through the Phone Menu The SYNC phone menu allows you to redial a number access your call history and phone book and send text messages as well as access phone and system settings You can also access advanced features such as 911 Assist Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services 1 Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu 2 Scroll to cycle through When you select Phone Redial Redial the last number called if
258. during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage See your device s manual for further information e Do not attempt to service or repair the system See your authorized dealer For your safety some SYNC functions are speed dependent Their use is limited to when your vehicle is traveling at speeds under 3 mph 5 km h Make sure that you review your device s manual before using it with SYNC Privacy Information When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC the system creates a profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone This profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more efficiently Among other things this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book text messages read and unread and call history including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the system In addition if you connect a media device the system creates and retains an index of supported media content The system also records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur The cellular profile media device index and development log remain in the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected If you no longer plan to use the s
259. e broadband or using Wi Fi The Wi Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a bf Cri certification mark of the Wi Fi Alliance CERTIFIED 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 506 MyFord Touch If Equipped Help E Press the Settings icon Help then select from the following View your vehicle s current location if your vehicle is equipped with navigation If your vehicle is not equipped with navigation nothing displays System Information Touchscreen system serial number Your vehicle identification number VIN Touchscreen system software version Navigation system version Map database version Sirius satellite radio electronic serial number ESN Gracenote Database Information and Library version Software Licenses View the licenses for any software and applications installed on your system Driving Restrictions Certain features are not accessible when your vehicle is moving 911 Assist Turn on and turn off the 911 Assist feature See 911 Assist in the SYNC applications and services section In Case of Emergency ICE Speed Dial allows you to save up to two numbers as ICE contacts for quick access if there is an emergency Select Edit to access your phonebook and then select the desired contacts The numbers then appear as options on this screen for the ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons The ICE contacts you select appear at the end of the 911 Assist call process Voice Command List
260. e Changing the Vehicle Battery in the Maintenance chapter Fuse amp Protected components rating Fan relay 2 Fan relay 1 Trailer brake control module Wipers Washer pump Anti lock brake system pump PS Neued 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 286 Fuses Fuse or relay Fuse amp Protected components number rating PT 0A Moonroof O PT 20A 2nd row console power point Po 10 C3 row power seats relay PoC Heated rear window relay pC Trailer tow battery charge relay 13 j Starter relay O 14 Cooingfans2 relay 15 Fulreay O 16 Not used Instrument panel power point cigar lighter 3rd row seat module Driver power seat Memory module Trailer tow battery charge PHC Noted O 26 Rear window defroster Heated mirrors 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Fuses 287 Fuse or relay Fuse amp Protected components number rating Tr T o OES Cooling fan series relay BEE CEN E 37 Trailer
261. e assist features automatically 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 200 Transmission S Sport Moving the gearshift lever to S Sport e Provides additional grade engine braking and extends lower gear operation to enhance performance for uphill climbs hilly terrain or mountainous areas This will increase engine RPM during engine braking e Provides additional lower gear operation through the automatic transmission shift strategy which reacts to vehicle inputs vehicle acceleration accelerator pedal brake pedal and vehicle speed e Gears are selected more quickly and at higher engine speeds SelectShift Automatic Transmission If Equipped Your SelectShift automatic transmission gives you the ability to manually change gears if you d like To use SelectShift move the gearshift lever into S Sport Now you can use select shift to manually change gears If your vehicle is equipped with buttons on the side of your gearshift lever e Press on the gearshift lever button to manually downshift the transmission e Press on the gearshift lever button to manually upshift the transmission Paddle Shifters if equipped The paddle shifters allow you to shift gears quickly without taking your hands off the steering wheel Temporary manual control is provided when pulling the paddles with the gearshift in the D Drive position The system will determine when te
262. e control system is engaged Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged Stability Control System L Displays when the AdvanceTrac Traction control is active If Fel the light remains on have the system serviced immediately Stability Control System Off r Illuminates when AdvanceTrac Traction control has been ce disabled by the driver Airbag readiness If this light fails to illuminate when the ignition is turned on PAN continues to flash or remains on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible A chime will sound when there is a malfunction in the indicator light 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Instrument Cluster 115 Anti lock brake system If the ABS light stays illuminated or continues to flash a malfunction has been detected Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated Brake system warning light OLO To confirm the brake system warning light is functional it will PEE momentarily illuminate when the ignition is turned to the on position when the engine is not running or in a position between on and start or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on position If it illuminates when you are driving check that the parking brake is not engaged If the parking brake is not engaged this indicates low brake fluid level or a b
263. e delay when not available until the This is normal selecting HD2 or HD3 HD Radio broadcast is behavior Wait until multicast preset or decoded Once the audio is available Direct Tune decoded the audio is available Cannot access HD2 or The previously stored No action required HD83 multicast channel multicast preset or The station is not when recalling a direct tune is not available in your preset or from a direct available in your current location tune current reception area Text information does Data service issue by Fill out the station not match currently the radio broadcaster issue form at website playing audio listed below There is no text Data service issue by Fill out the station information shown for the radio broadcaster issue form at website currently selected listed below frequency HD2 HD7 stations not Pressing Sean disables No action required found when Sean is HD2 HD7 channel This is normal pressed search behavior http www ibiquity com automotive report_radio_station_experiences HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp U S and foreign patents HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp Ford Motor Company and iBiquity Digital Corp are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology Content may be changed added or deleted at any time at the station owner s discretion
264. e driver s door Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Wheels and Tires 341 Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 F 6 C temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kPa in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label To check the pressure in your tire s 1 Make sure the tires are cool meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile Note If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot
265. e gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 454 MyFord Touch If Equipped ENTERTAINMENT AM 1 and AM AST FM 1 FM 2 and FM AST SIRIUS CD USB Touch this button to scroll down for more options such as SD Card BT Stereo A V In These buttons change with the media mode you are in Teee Radio memory presets and CD controls Note Some features may not be available in your area Contact an authorized dealer for more information You can access these options using the touchscreen or voice commands 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 455 Browsing Device Content When listening to audio on a device you can browse through other devices without having to change sources For example if you are currently listening to audio on an SD card you can browse all the artists that are stored on your USB device Press the voice icon on the steering wheel When prompted us you can say BROWSE within devices x e Browse league games yy k If you have said Browse you can then say any commands in the following chart This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to Sirius satellite radio Sirius channel guide sn Help This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to Sirius satellite radio For more commands in SD card or USB mode see the
266. e graded 150 would wear one and one half 14 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 e Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance e Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 338 Wheels and Tires M Maximum Inflation Pressure Indicates the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label The tire suppliers may have additional
267. e lists are possible results from your Lists voice commands The system simply makes a best guess at your request with these turned off Voice Control Volume This allows you to adjust the system s voice volume level 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 500 MyFord Touch If Equipped Media Player Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Media Player then select from the following Autoplay When this feature is on the system automatically switches to the media source upon initial connection This allows you to listen to music during the indexing process When this feature is off the system does not automatically switch to the inserted media source Bluetooth Devices Select to connect disconnect add or delete a device You can also set a device as your favorite so that the system automatically attempts to connect to that device at every ignition cycle Info the Gracenote Database Gracenote With this feature on the Gracenote Database Management supplies metadata information for your music files This overrides information from your device This feature defaults to off Cover Art Priority With this feature on the Gracenote Database supplied cover art for your music files This overrides any art from your device This feature defaults to Media Player 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 501 Navig
268. e the trailer axles or just slightly forward toward the trailer tongue Do not allow the final trailer tongue weight to go above or below 10 1596 of the loaded trailer weight e Select a tow bar with the correct rise or drop When both the loaded vehicle and trailer are connected the trailer frame should be level or slightly angled down toward your vehicle when viewed from the side When driving with a trailer or payload a slight takeoff vibration or shudder may be present due to the increased payload weight You can find more information about proper trailer loading and setting your vehicle up for towing under Load limit in the Load Carrying chapter You can also find information in the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at your authorized dealer or online at http www fleet ford com towing guides 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Towing 257 TRAILER SWAY CONTROL IF EQUIPPED WARNING Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of loss of vehicle control serious injury or death Ford does not recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed reduction may be detrimental such as hill climbing the driver has significant trailer towing experience and can control trailer sway and maintain safe operation Note This feature does not prevent trailer sway but reduces it once it begins Note This feature cannot stop all trailers from swaying Note In some c
269. e transmitter This feature allows you to start your vehicle from outside your vehicle The transmitter has an extended operating range Vehicles with automatic climate control can be configured to operate when the vehicle is remote started See the Climate Control chapter for more information A manual climate control system will run at the setting it was set to when your vehicle was last turned off Many states and provinces have restrictions for the use of remote start Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding remote start systems The remote start system will not work if e the ignition is on e the alarm system is triggered e you disable the feature e the hood is open e the transmission is not in P e the vehicle battery voltage is too low e the fuel is too low e the service engine soon light is on 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 68 Keys and Remote Control Remote Starting the Vehicle Note You must press each button within three seconds of each other Your vehicle will not remote start and the horn will not sound if you do not follow this sequence The label on your transmitter details the starting procedure To remote start your vehicle 1 Press the lock button to lock all the doors 2 Press the remote start button twice The exterior lamps will flash twice The horn will sound if the system fails to start Note If you
270. e unlocking Disabling two stage unlocking allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one press of the button The turn signals will flash twice to indicate a change to the unlocking mode The unlocking mode applies to the remote control keyless entry keypad and intelligent access Intelligent access at the driver door unlocks all doors when you have disabled two stage unlocking 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Locks 75 Locking the Doors Press the button to lock all the doors The turn signals will e illuminate Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed The doors will lock again the horn will sound and the turn signals will illuminate if all the doors and the luggage compartment are closed Note If any door or the luggage compartment is open or if the hood is open on vehicles with an anti theft alarm or remote start the horn sounds twice and the lamps will not flash Activating Intelligent Access If Equipped You must have the intelligent access key within 3 feet 1 meter of your vehicle At the Front Doors Pull a front exterior door handle to unlock and open the door The unlock sensor is on the back of the handle Make sure not to touch the lock sensor area on the front of the handle Press and hold the lock sensor area for about a second to lock your vehicle To avoid unlocking the door inadvertently make sure to only touch the l
271. e your Services feature to provide quicker access to your most used or favorite information You can save address points such as work or home You can also save favorite information like sports teams such as Detroit Lions or a news category You can learn more about personalization by logging onto www SYNCMyRide com Push to interrupt Press the voice button at any time while connected to SYNC Services to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip such as a sports report and say your voice command Portable Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth enabled cellular phone number not your VIN Vehicle Identification Number You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle equipped with SYNC Services and continue enjoying your personalized services 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 487 SYNC Services Voice Commands When a route has been downloaded non navigation systems i press the voice button on the steering wheel control When prompted say any of the following commands Sirius Travel Link If Equipped and If Activated WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held devi
272. e your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving Note The MyFord Touch system controls most of the audio features See the MyFord Touch chapter for more information A Eject Press this button to eject a CD B CD Slot Insert a CD C e TUNE and TUNE In radio mode press these buttons to manually search through the radio frequency band In Sirius mode press these buttons to find the next or previous available satellite radio station Volume and Power Press this button to switch the system off and on Turn it to adjust the volume 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 382 Audio System E SEEK Reverse and Fast Forward e In radio mode select a frequency band and press one of these buttons The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction e In Sirius mode press these buttons to select the previous or next channel If a specific category is selected such as Jazz Rock or News use these buttons to find the previous or next channel in the selected category e n CD mode press these buttons to select the previous or next track AM FM CD SONYG AUDIO SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED
273. eceives an impact of about 5 mph 8 km h or more the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers In addition the retractor s is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out too quickly If this occurs let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing out again in a slow and controlled manner 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 42 Safety Belts Automatic Locking Mode In this mode the shoulder belt or lap belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder or lap belt The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode This mode should be used any time a child safety seat except a booster is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible How to use the automatic locking mode Non inflatable safety belts 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode Rear outboard inflatable safety belts second row only if equipped 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder b
274. ed in this Agreement the words include and including and variations thereof will not be deemed to be terms of limitation but rather will be deemed to be followed by the words without limitation 9 Other Vendors Terms and Conditions The Telenav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to Telenav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end users This Agreement includes end user terms applicable to these companies included at the end of this Agreement amd thus your use of the Telenav Software is also subject to such terms You agree to 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 540 Appendices comply with the following additional terms and conditions which are applicable to Telenav s third party vendor licensors End User License Agreement For Distribution By HERE For North America APAC END USER TERMS The content provided Data is licensed not sold By opening this package or installing copying or otherwise using the Data you agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement If you do not agree to the terms of this agreement you are not permitted to install copy use resell or transfer the Data If you wish to reject the terms of this agreement and have not installed copied or used the Data you must contact your retailer or HERE North America LLC as defined below within thirty 80 days of purchase for a refund of your purchase price To conta
275. ed off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort it takes for you to steer This occurs to prevent internal overheating and permanent damage to your steering system If this should occur you will neither lose the ability to steer the vehicle manually nor will it cause permanent damage Typical steering and driving maneuvers will allow the system to cool and steering assist will return to normal When a steering system error is detected steering messages may appear in the information display 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 246 Driving Aids Steering Tips If the steering wanders or pulls check for an improperly inflated tire uneven tire wear loose or worn suspension components loose or worn steering components improper vehicle alignment A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander pull 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Load Carrying 247 CARGO NET IF EQUIPPED d WARNING The cargo net is not designed to restrain objects during a collision or heavy braking The cargo net secures lightweight objects in the cargo area Attach the net to the anchors provided Do not put more than 50 pounds 22 kilograms in the net ROOF RACKS AND LOAD CARRIERS IF EQUIPPED A WARNING When loading the roof racks we recommend you even
276. ed positions using the associated controls 3 Press and hold button 1 for five seconds A tone will sound after two m eJ seconds Continue to hold until you hear a second tone 4 Within three seconds press the lock button on the remote control Repeat this procedure for another memory button and remote control if you desire Deactivating memory from the remote control 1 Switch on the ignition 2 Press and hold the desired memory button for five seconds A tone sounds after two seconds Continue to hold until you hear a second tone 3 Press the unlock button on the remote control within three seconds Repeat this procedure for each remote control you wish to deactivate 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Keys and Remote Control 67 Car Finder Press the button twice within three seconds The horn will sound A and the turn signals will flash We recommend you use this method to locate your vehicle rather than using the panic alarm Sounding a Panic Alarm Press the button to activate the alarm Press the button again c or switch the ignition on to deactivate Note The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is off Remote Start If Equipped WARNING To avoid exhaust fumes do not use remote start if your vehicle is parked indoors or areas that are not well ventilated Note Do not use remote start if your vehicle is low on fuel The remote start button is on th
277. eement Telenav hereby grants to you a personal non exclusive non transferable license except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent transfer of the Telenav Software license without the right to sublicense to use the Telenav Software in object code form only in order to access and use the Telenav Software This license shall terminate upon any termination or expiration of this Agreement You agree that you will use the Telenav Software only for your personal business or leisure purposes and not to provide commercial navigation services to other parties 3 1 License limitations You agree not to do any of the following a reverse engineer decompile disassemble translate modify alter or otherwise change the Telenav Software or any part thereof b attempt to derive the source code audio library or structure of the Telenav Software without the prior express written consent of Telenav c remove from the Telenav Software or alter any of Telenav s or its suppliers trademarks trade names logos patent or copyright notices or other notices or markings d distribute sublicense or otherwise transfer the Telenav Software to others except as part of your permanent transfer of the Telenav Software or e use the Telenav Software in any manner that i infringes the intellectual property or proprietary rights rights of publicity 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus App
278. eene oe oe OT IEN ae E Tri Woat Hopi E 1 voa Paton tane TEE tre frorn xd to iiy ponarde Pa C amen axo ooa I tee ost naim o nay L mestre i raccect 1E m rest nopia E m voa ram tae 1E mPa sot tracery omnea ea OG r2 unm m od nia marnm bmi hits suc ace udi m 1E i Prosar x io tct powere a OG eae Corrunb Semice Advzor Technician mensas oeren ii wa as fog uaa Customer Capy am 2015 Flex 471 Customer Signature Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Scheduled Maintenance 551 NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG Intelligent Oil Life Monitor Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Oil Life Monitor that determines when the engine oil needs to be changed based on how your vehicle is used By using several important factors in its calculations the monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your vehicle and reduce environmental waste at the same time This means you won t have to remember to change the oil on a mileage based schedule the vehicle lets you know when an oil change is due by displaying ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED in the information display The following table is intended to provide examples of vehicle use and its impact on engine oil change intervals it is provided as a guideline only Actual engine o
279. el the active route View Edit Route Access these features when a route is active View Route Edit Destination Waypoints Edit Turn List Detour Edit Route Preferences Edit Traffic Preferences e Cancel Route Nokia is the digital map provider for the navigation application If you find map data errors you may report them directly to Nokia by going to http mapreporter navteq com Nokia evaluates all reported map errors and responds with the result of their investigation by e mail Navigation Map Updates Annual navigation map updates are available for purchase through your dealership by calling 1 866 4NAVTEQ 1 866 462 8837 in Mexico call 01 800 557 5539 or going to www navigation com sync You need to specify the make and model of your vehicle to determine if there is an update available 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 520 MyFord Touch If Equipped Navigation Voice Commands EB When in navigation mode press the voice button on the us steering wheel control After the tone say any of the following commands Navigation system voice commands Cancel next waypoint N avigation Cancel route Navigation voice volume decrease Destination Navigation voice volume increase Destination intersection Show north up Destination nearest POI Show route category gt Help This command is only available when a navigation
280. elt 2 Grasp the lap portion of the belt and pull upward until the entire belt is pulled out 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Safety Belts 43 Safety Belt Extension Assembly WARNING Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso WARNING Do not use extensions with an inflatable safety belt Safety belt extensions are vehicle specific See an authorized dealer to make sure you obtain the proper safety belt extension for your vehicle Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt A safety belt extension is not available for the inflatable safety belt Also use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended SAFETY BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT WARNING Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in a crash Adjust the height of
281. elts see Interior in the Cleaning chapter 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Personal Safety System 49 PERSONAL SAFETY SYSTEM The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag related injuries The system is able to analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations Your vehicle s Personal Safety System consists of e Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints e Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners energy management retractors first row only and safety belt usage sensors e Driver seat position sensor e Front passenger sensing system e Passenger airbag off and on indicator lamp e Front crash severity sensors e Restraints control module with impact and safing sensors e Restraint system warning light and backup tone e The electrical wiring for the airbags crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt usage sensors driver seat position sensor front passenger sensing system and indicator lights How Does the Personal Safety System Work The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your vehicle s safety devices according to crash severity and occu
282. em Fault This message is displayed when there is a problem with your vehicle s starting system See your authorized dealer for service Maintenance Action Description Messages LOW Engine Oil Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible Pressure turn off the engine Check the oil level If the warning stays on or continues to come on with your engine running contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Change Engine Oil Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is Soon 10 or less Oil Change Required Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0 Engine Coolant Displayed when the engine coolant Overtemperature temperature is excessively high LOW one quarter full Check the washer fluid level Steering Malfunction Displays when the steering system needs Service Now service See your authorized dealer 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 136 Information Displays Maintenance Action Description Messages Service Power Steering The power steering system has detected a condition within the power steering system that requires service immediately See your authorized dealer Power Steering Assist The power steering system has disabled power Fault steering assist due to a system error See your authorized dealer MyKey Messages Action Description Safely MyKey cannot be programmed Speed Limited to xx Displayed when starting the vehicle and MPH km h MyKey is
283. em may not detect smaller objects particularly those close to the ground WARNING Certain add on devices such as large trailer hitches bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the system may create false beeps Note Keep the sensors located on the bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt If the sensors are covered the system s accuracy can be affected Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects Note If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia leaving it misaligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range of the bumper area The system turns on automatically whenever the ignition is switched on When receiving a detection warning the radio volume is reduced to a predetermined level After the warning goes away the radio volume returns to the previous level 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Parking Aids 217 The system can be turned off using the information display control Refer to the Information Display chapter If a fault is present in the system a warning message appears in the information display and does not allow the driver to switch the faulted system on Note If your vehicle is equipped with MyKey it is possible to prevent turning the sensing system off
284. ended inflation pressure 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Wheels and Tires 353 CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL WARNING The use of tire sealant may damage your tire pressure monitoring system and should only be used in roadside emergencies If you must use a sealant the Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be used The tire pressure monitoring system sensor and valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized dealer after use of the sealant WARNING See Tire Pressure Monitoring System in this chapter for important information If the tire pressure monitoring sensor becomes damaged it will no longer function Note The tire pressure monitoring system indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use To restore the full function of the monitoring system all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on this vehicle If you get a flat tire while driving do not apply the brake heavily Instead gradually decrease your speed Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the system sensors See Tire Pressure Monitoring System earlier in this chapter Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible During repairing or replacing of the flat tire have the authorized dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring system sensor
285. endices 537 or privacy or other rights of any party ii violates any law statute ordinance or regulation including but not limited to laws and regulations related to spamming privacy consumer and child protection obscenity or defamation or iii is harmful threatening abusive harassing tortuous defamatory vulgar obscene libelous or otherwise objectionable and f lease rent out or otherwise permit unauthorized access by third parties to the Telenav Software without advanced written permission of Telenav 4 Disclaimers To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law in no event will Telenav its licensors and suppliers or agents or employees of any of the foregoing be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the Telenav Software Telenav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or other data used for the Telenav Software Such data may not always reflect reality due to among other things road closures construction weather new roads and other changing conditions You are responsible for the entire risk arising out of your use of the Telenav Software For example but without limitation you agree not to rely on the Telenav Software for critical navigation in areas where the well being or survival of you or others is dependent on the accuracy of navigation as the maps or functionality of the Telenav Software are not intended to suppor
286. er authorized dealer A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford Away from Home If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer In the United States Mailing Address Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 Telephone 1 800 392 3673 FORD TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 Online Additional information and resources are available online at www fordowner com These are some of the items that can be found online e U S Dealer Locator by Dealer Name City State or Zip Code e Owner Manuals e Maintenance Schedules e Recalls e Ford Extended Service Plans e Ford Genuine Accessories e Service specials and promotions 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Customer Assistance 277 In Canada Mailing address Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6K 1C8 Telephone 1 800 565 3673 FORD Online www ford ca Twitter FordServiceCA English Canada FordServiceQC Quebec Additional Assistance If you have questions or concerns or are unsatisfied with
287. ere is The audio control Review your phone s user guide excessive settings on your regarding audio adjustments background noise phone may be during a phone affecting SYNC call performance During a call I Possible phone Try turning off the device can hear the malfunction resetting the device removing other person but the device s battery then trying they cannot hear again me SYNC is not able e This is a e Go to the website to review to download my phone dependent your phone s compatibility phonebook feature OR e Try turning off the device e Possible phone resetting the device or removing malfunction the device s battery then trying again e Try pushing your phonebook contacts to SYNC by using the Add Contacts feature e Use the SYNCmyphone feature available on the website 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 523 Possible solution s cause s The system says Limitations on e Try pushing your phonebook Phonebook your phone s contacts to SYNC by using the Downloaded but capability Add Contacts feature my phonebook in e If the missing contacts are SYNC is empty or stored on your SIM card try is missing moving them to the device contacts memory e Remove any pictures or special ring tones associated with the missing contact I am having e This isa e Go to the website to review trouble phone dependent your phone s compatibil
288. erstand the entire procedure before you begin 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 88 Security 1 Place the new unprogrammed intelligent access key in the backup slot inside the center console The key ring must be at the rear with the buttons facing toward the right hand side 2 Press the driver or passenger power door unlock control three times 3 Press and release the brake pedal one time 4 Press the driver or passenger power door lock control three times 5 Press and release the brake pedal one time The indicator on the START STOP button should begin to rapidly flash indicating the programming mode has been entered and two programmed intelligent access keys have been detected in your vehicle 6 Press the START STOP button within one minute A message will appear in the information display indicating that the new intelligent access key was programmed 7 Remove the intelligent access key from the center console pocket and press the unlock button on the newly programmed intelligent access key to exit programming mode 8 Verify that the remote entry functions operate press lock then unlock making sure you end in unlock and that your vehicle starts with new intelligent access key ANTI THEFT ALARM IF EQUIPPED The system will warn you of unauthorized entry to your vehicle The turn signal lamps will flash and sound the horn up to a total of 10 times when e any door t
289. ervices you request for continuous improvement the service may collect and record call details and voice communications For more information see SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www SYNCMyRide com If you do not want Ford or its service providers to collect your vehicle travel information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions do not subscribe or use the service SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors integrated GPS technology and comprehensive map and traffic data to give you personalized traffic reports precise turn by turn directions business search news sports weather and more For a complete list of services or to learn more please visit www SYNCMyRide com Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands Press the voice button on the steering wheel controls t 1 When prompted say Services This initiates an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth enabled cellular phone 2 Once you connect to the service follow the voice prompts to request the desired service such as Traffic or Directions You can also say What are my choices to receive a list of available services from which to choose 3 Say Services to return to the Services main menu or for help say Help 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 485 Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Touchs
290. es in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter Severability You and HERE agree that if any portion of this agreement is found illegal or unenforceable that portion shall be severed and the remainder of the Agreement shall be given full force and effect Governing Law The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois for Data for the Americas and or the Asia Pacific region or The Netherlands for Data for Europe the Middle East and Africa without giving effect to i its conflict of laws provisions or ii the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods which is explicitly excluded For any and all disputes claims and actions arising from or in connection with the Data Claims you agree to submit to the personal jurisdiction of a the State of Illinois for Claims related to Data for the Americas and or the Asia Pacific region provided to you hereunder and b The Netherlands for Data for Europe the Middle East and or Africa provided to you hereunder Government End Users If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Appendices 543 rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government this Data is a commer
291. es to bring your vehicle to a safe stop When your vehicle has stopped move the transmission selector lever to position P and turn the key to the off position 2 If your vehicle has a keyless start system press and hold the button for one second or press it three times within two seconds Move the transmission selector lever to position N and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop When your vehicle has stopped move the transmission selector lever to position P and switch the ignition off 3 Apply the parking brake Your vehicle may have remote start capability Refer to Remote start in the Keys and Remote Control chapter 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Starting and Stopping the Engine 187 Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have this checked immediately Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects Important Ventilating Information If you stop your vehicle and leave the engine idling for long periods we recommend that you do one of the following e Open the windows at least 1 inch 2 5 centimeters e Set your climate control to outside air ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED WARNING Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or personal injury WARNING Do not use your
292. ess the right arrow button to enter a sub menu e Press the left arrow button to exit a menu e Press the OK button to choose and confirm a setting messages Main menu From the main menu bar on the left side of the information display you can choose from the following categories e Display Mode e Trip 1 amp 2 e Fuel Economy e Driver Assist e Settings Scroll up down to highlight one of the categories then press the right arrow key or OK to enter into that category Press the left arrow key as needed to exit back to the main menu Display Mode Use the up down arrow buttons to choose between the following display options Display mode XXX mi km to empty Bar tachometer Round tachometer Po Engine coolant temp gauge NEN 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Information Displays 125 Display mode Display mode Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Present Present Present corner Present Present Present Regardless of display mode chosen when SelectShift Automatic transmission SST is activated the cluster will change to the round tachometer if not already selected After the round tachometer displays other display modes with the bar tachometer can also be chosen e XXX mi km to empty Shows approximate fuel level before the fuel tank reaches empty The value is dynamic and can change raise or lower depending on driving style e Fuel gauge Indicates approximatel
293. ess you are sure you have enough ventilation e Keep all open flames and other burning material such as cigarettes away from the battery and all fuel related parts Working with the Engine Off 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Turn off the engine and remove the key if equipped 3 Block the wheels Working with the Engine On WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 1 Set the parking brake and shift to position P Park 2 Block the wheels 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 294 Maintenance OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD 1 Inside the vehicle pull the hood release handle located under the bottom of the instrument panel near the steering column 2 Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is located under the front center of the hood 3 Lift the hood 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Maintenance 295 UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW 3 5L V6 engine A B C E A Engine coolant reservoir B Windshield washer fluid reservoir C Brake fluid reservoir D Battery E Power distribution box F Air filter assembly G Automatic transmission fluid dipstick H Engine oil dipstick I Engine oil filler cap 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing Oct
294. etooth Audio This is a phone dependent feature which allows you to stream music playing on your Bluetooth enabled phone If supported by your device you can press SEEK to play the previous or next track SYNC Line In Press OK to select and play music from your portable music player over the vehicle s speakers Note If you have already connected a device to the USB port you cannot access the line in feature Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and music separately 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 425 When you select Media Settings Mobile Apps System Settings Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and select your Autoplay settings Once these selections are turned on they remain on until turned off Press SEEK to play the previous or next track Note Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and music separately Press OK to select and then scroll to choose from Shuffle Press OK to shuffle available media files in the current playlist Note To shuffle all media tracks you must select Play All in the Play Menu and then select Shuffle Repeat Press OK to repeat any song Autoplay Press OK to listen to music which has already been randomly indexed during the indexing process Interact with SYNC capable mobile applications on your smart phone See SYNC AppLink earlier in this cha
295. ets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall I M S or M S Mud and Snow or AT All Terrain or AS All Season J Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others K Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire See the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle L Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades e Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tir
296. evel The fluid should be in the designated areas for normal operating temperature 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Maintenance 305 Moving the Air Filter Assembly EcoBoost engine 4 WARNING Do not run engine with the air filter disconnected 1 Shut the engine off 2 Clean the area around the clamp that connects the air filter assembly to the rubber hose 1 3 Remove the bolt cover if equipped 4 Remove two bolts that attach the air filter assembly to the front of the vehicle 2 5 Loosen the clamp holding the air filter assembly to the rubber hose 1 6 Remove the harness retaining clip by pulling up 3 Do not disconnect the sensor 4 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 306 Maintenance 7 Without disconnecting the sensor 4 pull the air filter assembly up to disconnect the air filter assembly from the seated grommets located underneath the air filter assembly 8 Rotate the air filter assembly 90 degrees counterclockwise and reinstall into the rubber hose A 9 Tighten the clamp 1 10 The transmission fluid level indicator can now be accessed Low fluid level MIN Ped MAX Em If the fluid level is below the MIN C MIN 1505 range of the dipstick add fluid to 4 reach the hash mark level Note If the fluid level is below the MIN level do not drive the vehicle An underfill condition may cause
297. f Press and release the TILT control to vent the moonroof Pull and hold the TILT control to close the moonroof 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 112 Instrument Cluster GAUGES Type 1 Cluster shown in standard measure metric clusters similar A Tachometer B Information display See Information displays for more information C Speedometer D Fuel gauge Fuel Gauge Note The fuel gauge may vary slightly when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient Switch the ignition on The fuel gauge will indicate approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol indicates on which side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is located The needle should move toward F when you refuel your vehicle If the needle points to E after adding fuel this indicates your vehicle needs service soon After refueling some variability in needle position is normal e It may take a short time for the needle to reach F after leaving the gas station This is normal and depends upon the slope of pavement at the gas station 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Instrument Cluster 113 e The fuel amount dispensed into the tank is a little less or more than the gauge indicated This is normal and depends upon the slope of pavement at the gas station e If the gas station nozzle shuts off before the tank is full try a d
298. f The Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts languages defaults perform a master reset install an application and view system information Bluetooth Devices Menu Options This menu allows you to add connect delete set a phone as primary and turn Bluetooth on or off 1 Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu 2 Scroll until System Settings appears and press OK 3 Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears and select OK 4 Scroll to select from the following options If you select Device this chapter for pairing instructions Connect Bluetooth Connect a previously paired Device Bluetooth enabled phone 1 Press OK to select and view a list of previously paired phones 2 Scroll until the desired device is chosen then press OK to connect the phone Note Only one device can be connected at a time When another phone is connected the previous one is disconnected Set Primary Phone Set a previously paired phone as your primary phone Press OK to select and scroll to select the desired phone Press OK to confirm Note SYNC attempts to connect with the primary phone at every ignition cycle When a phone is selected as primary it appears first in the list and is marked with an asterisk 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 410 SYNC Set Bluetooth On Off Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off When the de
299. f 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 368 Capacities and Specifications VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO GVWR _ XXXX KG XXXX LB REAR GAWR WITH XXXX KG XXXX LB WITH oe ae XXX KG Xx LB XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX XXXX kPa XXX PID i XXXX kPa XXX BIOD HIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX ESE PE XXXX p XX XXXXX TINTTR TP I M XX XXX X X X XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX TR rae Ia Ie XXXX XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require that a Safety Compliance Certification Label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Safety Compliance Certification Label may be located The Safety Compliance Certification Label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar the door latch post or the edge of the door near the door latch next to the driver s seating position TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO GVWR _ XXX KG XXXX LB REAR GAWR WITH XXXX KG XXXX LB WITH TRS ET M DATE XX XX FRONT GAWR XXXX KG XXXX LB XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXX AT XXXX kPa XXX PSI Q5 ti sn kPa XXX PsiCOLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN X
300. f not Force Close the application and restart it I have an Android The bluetooth Try increasing the Bluetooth phone I found volume on the volume of the device by using and started my phone may be the device s volume control media app on low buttons which are most often SYNC but there found on the side of the device is no sound or the sound is very low 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 441 Possible solution s cause s I can only see Some Android Force close or uninstall the apps some of the devices have a you do not want SYNC to find If AppLink apps limited number of the app has a Ford SYNC running on my bluetooth ports setting disable that setting in phone listed in apps can use to the app s settings menu on the SYNOC Mobile connect If you phone Apps Menu have more AppLink apps on your phone than the number of available Bluetooth ports you will not see all of your apps listed in SYNC s mobile apps menu SYNC System Reset The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC feature is lost This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any information previously stored in the system Such as paired devices phonebook call history text messages or user settings To perform a System Reset press and hold the Seek Up gt gt button while pressing and holding the Radio
301. f the seat cushion e Can the child sit without slouching e Does the lap belt rest low across the hips e s the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest e Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Child Safety 33 Types of Booster Seats e Backless booster seats 4 If your backless booster seat has a removable shield remove the shield If a vehicle seating position has a low seatback or no head restraint a backless booster seat may place your child s head as measured at the tops of the ears above the top of the seat In this case move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seatback or head restraint and lap and shoulder belts or consider using a high back booster seat e High back booster seats If with a backless booster seat you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child s head a high back booster seat would be a better choice 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 34 Child Safety Children and booster seats vary in size and shape Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips never up across the stomach and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder The follow
302. fect the use of electronic devices while driving The first thing you must do to use the phone features of SYNC is to pair your Bluetooth enabled cellular phone with SYNC This allows you to use your phone in a hands free manner Note Put the transmission in position P Turn on your vehicle ignition and the radio 1 Touch Add Phone in the upper left corner of the touchscreen Find SYNC appears on the screen and instructs you to begin the pairing process from your device 2 Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cellular phone is in the proper mode See your phone s manual if necessary e Select SYNC and a six digit PIN appears on your device 3 If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device it does not support Secure Simple Pairing To pair enter the PIN displayed on the touchscreen Skip the next step 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 477 4 When prompted on your phone s display confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cellular phone 5 The display indicates when the pairing is successful SYNC may prompt you with more phone options For more information on your phone s capability see your phone s manual and visit the website Pairing Subsequent Phones Note Put the transmission in position P Turn on your vehicle ignition and the radio 1 Press the Phone corner of the touchscreen gt Settings gt
303. for damage Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly then it is intended for temporary use only This means that if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible with a road tire and wheel that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged it should be replaced rather than repaired A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as a spare tire and wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types 1 T type mini spare This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 354 Wheels and Tires 2 Full size dissimilar spare with label on wheel This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above do not e exceed 50 mph 80 km h e load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label e tow a trailer e use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire e use
304. g coolant concentrations Note Automotive fluids are not interchangeable do not use engine coolant antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Maintenance 299 Adding Engine Coolant WARNING Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly Also you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts WARNING Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container If sprayed on the windshield engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap The cooling system is under pressure steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly WARNING Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark Note Do not use stop leak pellets cooling system sealants or additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling or heating systems This damage would not be covered under your vehicle s warranty Note During normal vehicle operation the engine coolant may change color from orange to pink or light red As long as the engine coolant is clear and uncontaminated this color change does not indicate the engine coolant has degraded nor does it require
305. ge it The included funnel has been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle When filling the vehicle s fuel tank from a portable fuel container use the funnel included with the vehicle 1 Locate the white plastic funnel in the spare tire compartment 2 Slowly insert the funnel into the capless fuel a system 3 Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container 4 When done clean the funnel or properly dispose of it Extra funnels can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Fuel and Refueling 193 REFUELING WARNING Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island Turn off your engine when you are refueling Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling WARNING Stop refueling after the fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off for the second time Failure to follow this will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel
306. gh to avoid a collision without driver intervention Always apply the brakes when necessary Failing to do so may result in a collision serious injury or death WARNING Adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor In some cases there may be no warning or the warning may be delayed The driver should always apply the brakes when necessary Failing to do so may result in a collision serious injury or death Note The brakes may emit a sound when they are being modulated by the adaptive cruise control system 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Cruise Control 231 When a vehicle ahead of you enters the same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane the vehicle speed adjusts to maintain a preset gap distance The distance setting is adjustable The lead vehicle graphic will be illuminated Your vehicle will maintain a constant distance between the vehicle ahead until e the vehicle in front of you accelerates to a speed above the set speed e the vehicle in front of you moves out of your lane or out of view e the vehicle speed falls below 16 mph 26 km h e anew gap distance is set The vehicle brakes will be automatically applied to slow your vehicle to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front The maximum braking which is applied by the system is limited and can be overridden by the driver applying the brakes If the system predicts that it
307. ght to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes Sirius satellite radio is a subscription based satellite radio 4 om service that broadcasts a variety of music sports news weather traffic and entertainment programming Your factory installed Sirius satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle See an authorized dealer for availability SATELLITE R A Dio For more information on extended subscription terms a service fee is required the online media player and a complete list of Sirius satellite radio channels and other features please visit www siriusxm com in the United States www sirius ca in Canada or call Sirius at 1 888 539 7474 Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number ESN You need your ESN to activate modify or track your satellite radio account When in satellite radio mode you can view this number by pressing SIRIUS and memory preset 1 at the same time To access your ESN press the bottom left corner of the touchscreen then SIRIUS gt Options Troubleshooting Radio displa Possible action Acquiring Radio requires more No action required than two seconds to This message should produce audio for the disappear shortly se
308. ginal position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to make sure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or crash WARNING Do not adjust or release the seat floor latch while vehicle is in motion Do not operate the vehicle with seats in tumbled position Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor whether the seat is occupied or empty If not latched or if the seat is tumbled the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop Note You may have to move the front row seat forward to allow the second row seat to be fully tumbled 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Seats 163 Fold and tumble the second row seat to access the third row Remove items from the second row seat Make sure that no bulky objects such as purses or briefcases are on the floor in front of the second row seats before tumbling them For second row bench seats make sure the center safety belt is unbuckled before folding the seat back 1 Lift the handle located on the side of the seat The seatback will fold flat 2 Lift the handle all the way up until the seat releases from the floor Rotate the seat forward grabbing the bottom of the seatback as indicated to allow access to the third row seat Note The seatback must be folded flat in order to rele
309. gine is running the system searches for a valid key You cannot start the engine if the system does not detect a valid key within 20 seconds Failure to Start If you cannot start the engine after three attempts wait 10 seconds and follow this procedure 1 Fully press the brake pedal 2 Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there 3 Start the engine Automatic Engine Shutdown If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless ignition it has a feature that automatically shuts down the engine if it has been idling for an extended period The ignition also turns off in order to save battery power Before the engine shuts down a message appears in the information display showing a timer counting down from 30 seconds If you do not intervene within 30 seconds the engine shuts down Another message appears in the information display to inform you that the engine has shut down in order to save fuel Start your vehicle as you normally do Automatic Engine Shutdown Override Note You cannot permanently switch off the automatic engine shutdown feature When you switch it off temporarily it turns on at the next ignition cycle You can stop the engine shutdown or reset the timer at any point before the 30 second countdown has expired by doing any of the following e You can reset the timer by interacting with your vehicle such as pressing the brake pedal or accelerator pedal e You can temporarily switch off the shutdown feature an
310. h beams are needed e There is no traffic in front of the vehicle e Vehicle speed is greater than 32 mph 52 km h e Severe weather is not detected The high beams will switch off if e An approaching vehicle s headlights or a preceding vehicle s tail lamps are detected e The vehicle speed falls below 27 mph 44 km h e The ambient light level is high enough that high beams are not needed e Severe rain snow or fog is detected e The camera is blocked Activating the system Switch the system on within the information display See Information displays Turn the lighting control to the autolamps position 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Lighting 103 Manually overriding the system When the automatic control has activated high beams pushing or pulling the stalk will provide a temporary override to low beam To permanently deactivate the system use the information display menu or turn the lighting control switch from autolamps to headlamps FRONT FOG LAMPS The fog lamps can be turned on when the lighting control is pulled toward you and in the headlamps parking lamps or autolamps positions The fog lamps will not operate when the high beams are active e To operate the left hand side direction indicator push the lever down until it stops e To operate the right hand side direction indicator push the lever up until it stops Note Tap the
311. hase laws IN CALIFORNIA U S ONLY California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer less a reasonable allowance for consumer use The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18000 mi 29 000 km whichever occurs first 1 Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2 Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use value or safety of the vehicle OR 3 The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days not necessarily all at one time In the case of 1 or 2 above the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the f
312. he battery cover 3 3 Remove the old battery 3 wo 4 Insert the new battery Refer to the instructions inside the integrated keyhead transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery Press the battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity 5 Reinstall the rubber gasket 6 Snap the battery cover back onto the key Intelligent Access Transmitter 1 Remove the backup key from the transmitter 2 Twist a thin coin under the tab a hidden behind the backup key head to remove the battery cover Do not use the backup key to remove the cover or you could damage the intelligent access key 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 66 Keys and Remote Control 3 Remove the old battery E 4 Insert a new battery with the facing downward Press the battery down to make sure it is fully in the housing 5 Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter and install the backup key Memory feature if equipped This feature allows you to recall the driver seat power mirrors power adjustable steering column and adjustable pedals if equipped memory positions Press the unlock button on the remote control or activate intelligent access if equipped to recall the memory positions Programming memory to the remote control To activate this feature 1 Switch on the ignition 2 Move the memory features to the desir
313. he engine 2 Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off about one minute 3 Wait 10 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off e Once you complete Step 3 you must complete Step 4 within 20 seconds 4 For the seating position you are switching off buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times at a moderate speed ending in the unbuckled state e After Step 4 the safety belt warning light turns on for three seconds 5 Within about seven seconds of the light turning off buckle then unbuckle the safety belt e This will switch the feature off for that seating position if it is currently on e This will switch the feature on for that seating position if it is currently off REAR INFLATABLE SAFETY BELT IF EQUIPPED WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the rear inflatable safety belt as you could be seriously injured or killed Note The rear inflatable safety belts are compatible with most infant and child safety car seats and belt positioning booster seats when properly installed This is because they are designed to fill with a cool gas at a lower pressure and at a slower rate than traditional airbags After inflation the shoulder portion of the safety belt remains cool to the touch The rear inflatable safety belts are located in the shoulder portion of the safety belts of the second row outboard seating positions 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA f
314. he front passenger seat e When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag may inflate the passenger airbag status indicator will illuminate the ON lamp and remain illuminated If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger seat but the passenger airbag status indicator OFF lamp is lit it is possible that the person is not sitting properly in the seat If this happens e Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seat back in the full upright position e Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with the person s legs comfortably extended e Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the passenger s frontal airbag e If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit even after this the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat Passenger airbag OFF Lit 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 56 Supplementary Restraints System Passenger airbag Occupant Status e Passenger airbag OFF Lit f Child ON Unlit Disabled OFF Unlit Note When the passenger airbag status indicator OFF lamp is illuminated the passenger side airbag seat mounted may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts it is very impo
315. he hood or the luggage compartment is opened without using the keypad the remote control or the intelligent access transmitter if equipped e the ignition is turned on with an invalid key Take all keys and remote controls to an authorized dealer if there is any potential alarm problem with your vehicle 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Security 89 Arming the Alarm The system is ready to arm whenever the ignition is off Lock the vehicle to arm the alarm The turn signal lamps will flash once after locking the vehicle to indicate the alarm is in the pre armed mode It will become fully armed in 20 seconds Disarming the Alarm To disarm the alarm do any of the following e Press the power door unlock button within the 20 second pre armed mode e Press the unlock button on the remote control Unlock the doors with the keyless entry pad e Enter the vehicle using intelligent access if equipped e Turn the ignition on with a valid key if equipped with an integrated keyhead transmitter only e Press the panic button on the remote control The alarm system will still be armed but this shuts off the horn and turn lamps when the alarm is sounding Note If the driver door is unlocked with a key a tone will sound when you open the door and a message will appear in the information display You will have 12 seconds to disarm the alarm using any of the actions above otherwise the al
316. he pedal Brake assist can reduce stopping distances in critical situations 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 212 Brakes Anti Lock Brake System This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking This lamp momentarily illuminates when you turn the ignition 55 on If the light does not illuminate during start up remains on or flashes the anti lock brake system may be disabled Have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the anti lock brake system is disabled normal braking is still effective DO If the brake warning lamp illuminates when you release the aey parking brake have the system checked by an authorized dealer HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI LOCK BRAKES When the system is operating the brake pedal will pulse and may travel further Maintain pressure on the brake pedal You may also hear a noise from the system This is normal The anti lock braking system will not eliminate the risks when e You drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you e Your vehicle is hydroplaning e You take corners too fast e The road surface is poor PARKING BRAKE WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated then driving your vehicle could result in reduced braking ability increased stopping distances and potential loss of brakes See your authorized dealer as soon as possible
317. he steering column position with the memory function Refer to the Seats chapter Pressing the adjustment control during memory recall cancels the operation The column responds to the adjustment control The steering column sets a stopping position just short of the end of the column position to prevent damage to the steering column A new stopping position sets if the steering column encounters an object when tilting or telescoping 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 92 Steering Wheel To reset the steering column to its original stopping position 1 Be sure that there is nothing blocking the motion of the steering column or wheel 2 Press and hold the steering column control until the steering column stops moving 3 Press and hold the steering column control again The steering column may begin to move again 4 When the steering column stops continue holding the control for two seconds 5 Repeat for each direction if necessary You have reset the end of travel position AUDIO CONTROL SEEK Press to select the next or A previous stored preset or track Press and hold to select the next or E previous frequency or seek through a track M MEDIA Press repeatedly to scroll v through available audio modes MUTE Press to silence the radio VOL Volume Press to increase or decrease the volume VOICE CONTROL IF EQUIPPED A Phone mode elt a B Voice recognition
318. he windshield of fog and thin ice Touch again to return to the previous airflow selection When on defrost e Provides outside air to reduce window fogging e Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents K Manual controls Select any of the following airflow distribution modes e Floor and Defrost Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents demister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents and provides outside air to reduce window fogging e Panel Distributes air through the instrument panel vents e Panel and Floor Distributes air through the instrument panel vents demister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents e Floor Distributes air through the demister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 509 L Driver settings Depending on your vehicle and option package you may have the following features e Touch or to adjust the temperature e If your vehicle is equipped with heated seats touch the heated seat icon to control the heated seat See the Seats chapter e If your vehicle is equipped with cooled seats touch the cooled seat icon to control the cooled seat See the Seats chapter e Touch and hold MyTemp to select a temperature you would like your vehicle to remember and maintain for you e If your vehicle is equipped with a heated steering wheel t
319. hen possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death WARNING Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather they could burn a small child Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them WARNING Front and rear seat occupants including pregnant women should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder safety belts All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided The safety belt system consists of e Lap and shoulder safety belts e Shoulder safety belt with automatic locking mode except driver and rear inflatable safety belt Height adjuster at the front outboard seating positions Safety belt pretensioner at the front outboard seating positions e Belt tension sensor at the front outboard passenger seating position e Safety belt warning light and chime See Safety Belt Warning Light and Indicator Chime later in this chapter PI e Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness PAN indicator See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator in the Supplemental Restraint System chapter The safety belt pretensioners and rear inflatable safety belts are designed to activ
320. her than Joe and similar or e Do not use special characters they may contain such as 123 or ICE as the special system does not recognize them characters OR e f contacts are saved in CAPS e Your you have to spell them JAKE phonebook requires you to say Call contacts may be J A K E saved in CAPS MyFord Touch System Reset The MyFord Touch system has System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC feature is lost This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any information previously stored in the system such as paired devices phonebook call history text messages or user settings To perform a System Reset press and hold the Seek Up gt gt button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button After approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black Allow a 1 Z minutes for the system reset to complete You may then resume using the SYNC system 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 528 Appendices GENERAL INFORMATION SYNC End User License Agreement EULA e You have acquired a device DEVICE that includes software licensed by FORD MOTOR COMPANY from an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation MS Those installed software products of MS origin as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation MS SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual pr
321. hicle is washed Lubricate hood latch all door latches and trunk lid hinges with a light grade oil e Cover interior trim to prevent fading e Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 328 Vehicle Care Engine e The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage as used engine oil contains contaminates that may cause engine damage e Start the engine every 15 days Run at fast idle with the climate controls set to defrost until it reaches normal operating temperature e With your foot on the brake shift through all the gears while the engine is running Fuel system e Fill the fuel tank with high quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle Cooling system e Protect against freezing temperatures e When removing vehicle from storage check coolant fluid level Confirm there are no cooling system leaks and fluid is at the recommended level Battery e Check and recharge as necessary Keep connections clean e If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the battery it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure battery charge is maintained for quick starting Note If battery cables are disconnected it will be necessary to reset memory features Brakes e Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released Tires e Maintain recommended air pressure Misce
322. hicle than when starting due to ground reflection and the added noise of the running vehicle You can disable or enable the remote start system through the information display See the Information Display chapter REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL You can purchase replacement or additional keys or remote controls from an authorized dealer A dealer can program the transmitters to your vehicle or you may be able to program them yourself See the Security chapter for information on programming your transmitters 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 70 MyKey PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION MyKey allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to promote good driving habits All but one of the keys programmed to the vehicle can be activated with these restricted modes Any keys that have not been programmed are referred to as administrator keys or admin keys These can be used to e Create a MyKey e Program configurable MyKey settings e Clear all MyKey features When you have programmed a MyKey you can access the following information using the information display e How many admin keys and MyKeys are programmed to your vehicle e The total distance your vehicle has traveled using a MyKey Note All MyKeys are programmed to the same settings You cannot program them individually Note For vehicles with intelligent access push button start when both a MyKey and an admin transmitte
323. hift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the lock position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 206 All Wheel Drive If Equipped WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Note Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Note Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control it may be beneficial to disengage the AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control system while attempting to rock the vehicle Emergency Maneuvers e In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made remember to avoid over driving your vehicle i e turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency Excessive steering will result in
324. his helps to warm up the engine If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer Note You can crank the engine for a total of 60 seconds without the engine starting before the starting system temporarily disables The 60 seconds does not have to be all at once For example if you crank the engine three times for 20 seconds each time without the engine starting you reached the 60 second time limit A message appears in the information display alerting you that you exceeded the cranking time You cannot attempt to start the engine for at least 15 minutes After 15 minutes you are limited to a 15 second engine cranking time You need to wait 60 minutes before you can crank the engine for 60 seconds again 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 184 Starting and Stopping the Engine Before starting the engine check the following e Make sure all occupants have fastened their safety belts e Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off e Make sure the parking brake is on e Make sure the gearshift is in position P e Turn the ignition key to the on position If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless ignition see the following instructions Vehicles with an Ignition Key Note Do not touch the accelerator pedal 1 Fully press the brake pedal 2 Turn the key to the start position Release the key when the engine starts
325. hocks in front and back of the trailer wheels Chocks not included with vehicle wh Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft PWC Note Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water Note Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after removing the trailer from the water When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval e Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper e Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches 15 centimeters above the bottom edge of the rear bumper Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components e Causing internal damage to the components e Affecting driveability emissions and reliability Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the rear axle submerges in water Water may have contaminated the rear axle lubricant which does not normally require checking or changing unless it is leaking or other axle repair is required 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 264 Towing TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE If you need to have your vehicle towed contact a professional towing service or if you are a member of a roadside assistance program your roadside assistance service provider We recommend the use of a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your vehicle Do not tow with a slingbelt Ford Motor C
326. iagnostic information about your vehicle Certain versions or updates to Vehicle Health Report may also collect more vehicle information Ford may use your vehicle information it collects for any purpose If you do not want to disclose your cellular phone number or vehicle information do not run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile at www SYNCMyRide com See www SYNCMyRide com Vehicle Health Report Terms and Conditions and Privacy Statement for more information 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 495 SETTINGS A Clock B Display C Sound D Vehicle E Settings F Help Under this menu you can set your clock access and adjust the display sound and vehicle settings as well as access settings for specific modes or the help feature Clock Note You cannot manually set the date Your vehicle s GPS does this for you Note If the battery has been disconnected your vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signal to update the clock Once your vehicle acquires the signal it may take a few minutes for the update to display the correct time l Press the Settings icon Clock 2 Press and to adjust the time From this screen you can also make other adjustments such as 12 or 24 hour mode activate GPS time synchronization and have the system automatically update for new time zones 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October
327. ically after a short time When a warning message appears you must wait two seconds before being able to clear it Certain messages need to be confirmed before you can access the menus Message indicators Some messages will be supplemented by a system specific symbol Control Messages Malfunction preventing the ACC from engaging Available adaptive cruise cannot function properly Adaptive Cruise Not Displayed when the radar is blocked because Available Sensor of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or Blocked ice mud water in front of radar Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve AdvanceTrac Action Description Traction Control Messages Service AdvanceTrac Displayed when the AdvanceTrac system has detected a condition that requires service Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible disabled by the driver Trailer Sway Reduce Displayed when the trailer sway control has Speed detected trailer sway 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Information Displays 131 Alarm Security Action Description Messages Vehicle Alarm To Stop Displayed when the perimeter alarm system is Alarm Start Vehicle armed and the vehicle is entered using the key on the driver s side door In order to prevent the perimeter alarm system from triggering the ignition must be turned to start or on before the 12 second chime expires Shutdown Messages XX Seconds shut off
328. ication Label Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Load Carrying 249 PAYLOAD Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX Ib for maximum payload The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant If any aftermarket or authorized dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload WARNING The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity how much space is available or by payload capacity how much weight the vehicle should carry Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle do not add more cargo even if there is
329. icator OFF and ON lamps will illuminate for a short period of time to confirm it is functional PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ON 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Supplementary Restraints System 55 The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied or a rear facing infant seat a forward facing child restraint or a booster seat is detected Even with this technology parents are strongly encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat The front passenger sensing system also turns off the passenger front airbag and seat mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty e When the front passenger sensing system disables will not inflate the front passenger frontal airbag the passenger airbag status indicator will illuminate the OFF lamp and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled e If the child restraint has been installed and the passenger airbag status indicator illuminates the ON lamp then turn the vehicle off remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer s instructions The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable may inflate the front passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in t
330. icle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase e Narrower to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces As a result of the above dimensional differences crossover vehicles often will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 332 Wheels and Tires TIRE CARE Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading e E Se Tire Quality Grades apply to new lt lt pneumatic passenger car tires The Tire V Quality Grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example e Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires They do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires light truck or LT type tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575 104 c 2 U S Department of Transportation Tire quality grades The U S Department of
331. icle ahead You can override the set speed and gap distance by pressing the accelerator pedal When you are overriding the system the green indicator light illuminates and the follow vehicle does not show in the information display The system will resume operation when you release the accelerator pedal The vehicle speed will decrease to the set speed or a lower speed if following a slower vehicle Changing the Set Speed There are three ways to change the set speed e Accelerate or brake to the desired speed and press SET upward and release e ncrease or decrease the speed by holding SET upward or downward until the desired set speed is shown on the information display The vehicle speed will gradually change to the selected speed 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Cruise Control 233 e Increase or decrease the speed in increments of 1 mph 2 km h by briefly pressing SET upward or downward The system may apply the brakes to slow your vehicle down to the new set speed The set speed will display continuously in the information display while the system is active Resuming the Set Speed Note Resume should only be used if you are aware of the set speed and intend to return to it Press and release RES Your vehicle will return to the previously set speed The set speed will display continuously in the information display while the system is active Low Speed Automatic Cancellatio
332. icle should be turned off until normal operating temperatures are reached to allow the fluid to cool before checking Depending on vehicle use cooling times could take up to 30 minutes or longer Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes Your transmission does not consume fluid However the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly i e if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage 1 Drive the vehicle 20 miles 80 km or until it reaches normal operating temperature 2 Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake 3 With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges Allow a minimum of 10 seconds for each gear to engage 4 Latch the gearshift lever in P Park and leave the engine running 5 Remove the dipstick wiping it clean with a clean dry lintfree rag If necessary refer to Under hood overview in this chapter for the location of the dipstick For vehicles with the EcoBoost engine move the air filter assembly aside to access the transmission dipstick See Moving the Air Filter Assembly EcoBoost engine for more information 6 Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube by turning it to the locked position 7 Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid l
333. ies 1 Press OK to select You can select to play All Artists or any indexed artist 2 Scroll until the desired artist is chosen and press OK Albums Sort all indexed media by albums If there are less than 255 indexed albums they are listed alphabetically in flat file mode If there are more they are organized into alphabetical categories 1 Press OK to enter the album menu and select from playing all albums or from any individual indexed album 2 Scroll until the desired album is chosen and press OK 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 427 When you select Genres Explore USB 2015 Flex 471 Sort indexed music by genre category type SYNC lists the genres alphabetically in flat file mode If there are more than 255 SYNC automatically organizes them into alphabetical categories Press OK to select and then scroll to select the desired genre and press OK Access your playlists from formats such as ASX M3U WPL MTP The system lists your playlists alphabetically in flat file mode If there are more than 255 they are organized into alphabetical categories Press OK to select Then scroll to select the desired playlist and press OK Search for and play a specific track which has been indexed SYNC lists your tracks alphabetically in flat file mode If there are more than 255 SYNC automatically organizes them into alphabetical categories Press OK t
334. ifferent gas pump nozzle Low Fuel Reminder A low fuel reminder triggers when the fuel gauge needle is at 1 16th economy conditions 56 km to 129 km Severe duty driving 1 16th 35 miles 56km trailer towing extended idle Type 2 Cluster shown in standard measure metric clusters similar A Left Information Display See Information displays for more information B Speedometer C Right Information Display See MyFord Touch for more information 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 114 Instrument Cluster WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS There indicators can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause expensive repairs Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure they work If any light remains on after starting the vehicle refer to the respective system warning light for additional information Note Some warning indicators are reconfigurable telltales RTT These indicators appear in the information display and function the same as a warning light but do not display on startup Adaptive cruise control if equipped RTT The speed control system indicator light changes color to indicate what mode the system is in e On white light Iuminates when the adaptive cruise control system is turned on Turns off when the speed control system is turned off e Engaged green light Illuminates when the adaptive cruis
335. il change intervals depend on several factors and generally decrease with severity of use When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message Vehicle use and examples 7500 10000 miles Normal commuting with highway driving 12000 16000 km 7 No or moderate load or towing Flat to moderately hilly roads No extended idling Severe 5000 7499 miles Moderate to heavy load or towing 8000 11999 km Mountainous or off road conditions Extended idling Extended hot or cold operation 3000 4999 miles Maximum load or towing 4800 7999 km Extreme hot or cold operation 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 552 Scheduled Maintenance Normal scheduled maintenance At every oil change Change engine oil and filter the information display tread depth recommended Inspect automatic transmission fluid level if equipped with dipstick Consult dealer for requirements Inspect brake pads shoes rotors drums brake linings hoses and parking brake Inspect engine cooling system strength and hoses Inspect exhaust system and heat shields Inspect rear axle and U joints Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings All wheel drive vehicles Inspect half shaft boots if equipped Inspect steering linkage ball joints suspension tie rod ends driveshaft and U joints Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings Inspect wheels and related components fo
336. imit your reaction time to stop the vehicle 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Parking Aids 223 AN WARNING Use caution when using the rear video camera and the trunk is ajar If the trunk is ajar the camera will be out of position and the video image may be incorrect All guidelines have been removed when the trunk is ajar WARNING Use caution when turning camera features on or off while in R Reverse Make sure the vehicle is not moving The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behind the vehicle During operation lines appear in the display which represent your vehicle s path and proximity to objects behind the vehicle The camera is located on the liftgate Using the Rear View Camera System The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when you place the transmission in R The system uses fixed guidelines which show the actual path the vehicle is moving in while reversing in a straight line This can be helpful when backing into a parking space or aligning the vehicle with another object behind the vehicle Note Do not use the camera system if the trunk is ajar Note If the image comes on while the transmission is not in R have the system inspected by your authorized dealer 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 224 Parking Aids Note When towing the camera only sees what is being towed
337. imitations situations such as severe weather conditions or debris build up on the sensor area may limit vehicle detection The following are other situations that may limit the BLIS e Certain maneuvering of vehicles entering and exiting the blind zone e Vehicles passing through the blind zone at very fast rates e When several vehicles forming a convoy pass through the blind zone The following are other situations that may limit the CTA system e Adjacently parked vehicles or objects obstructing the sensors e Approaching vehicles passing at speeds greater than 15 mph 24 km h e Driving in reverse faster than 3 mph 5 km h e Backing out of an angled parking spot 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Driving Aids 241 False Alerts Note If you connected a trailer to your vehicle the BLIS system may detect the trailer causing a false alert To avoid false alerts you may want to turn the BLIS off manually There may be certain instances when either the BLIS or CTA systems illuminate the alert indicator with no vehicle in the coverage zone this is known as a false alert Some amount of false alerts are normal they are temporary and self correct System Errors If either system senses a problem with the left or right sensor the BLIS indicator in the information display will illuminate and remain on Also BLIND SPOT SYSTEM FAULT or CROSS TRAFFIC SYSTEM FAULT message will appear
338. ing drawings compare the ideal fit center to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder The drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child s hips RRL If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat upon which it is being used placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat Check with the booster seat manufacturer s instructions 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Child Safety 35 CHILD SEAT POSITIONING WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back When possible all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat WARNING Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child s size height weight or age Follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions and
339. ing or riding position Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position To adjust the head restraint do the following 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Seats 151 A Front seat head restraints Second row center seat head restraint if equipped The head restraints consist of A B C D Energy absorbing head restraint Steel stems Guide sleeve adjust and release button Guide sleeve unlock and remove button Raise Pull up on the head restraint A Lower Press and hold the guide sleeve adjust and release button C and push down on the head restraint A Remove Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment position and then press and hold both the adjust and release button C and the unlock and remove button D then pull up on the head restraint Reinstall Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 152 Seats Second row outboard seat head A B restraints 3c The outboard head restraints are T non adjustable but they can be C m removed The non adjustable head restraints Va consists of A Ene
340. ings See your authorized dealer to have your collision warning radar checked for proper coverage and operation 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Driving Aids 245 STEERING Electric Power Steering WARNING The electric power steering system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system to ensure proper operation When a system error is detected a steering message will appear in the information display WARNING The electric power steering system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system to ensure proper operation of the electronic system When an electronic error is detected a message will be displayed in the information display If this happens stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine After at least 10 seconds reset the system by restarting the engine and watch the information display for a steering message If a steering message returns or returns while driving take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked WARNING Obtain immediate service if a system error is detected You may not notice any difference in the feel of your steering but a serious condition may exist Failure to do so may result in loss of steering control Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power assisted steering system There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving or if the ignition is turn
341. intelligent access key fob into the backup slot The location of your backup slot is in another chapter See Starting and Stopping the Engine 2 Access the main menu and select Settings then MyKey by pressing OK or the gt button 3 Use the arrow buttons to get to a configurable feature 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 72 MyKey 4 Press OK or gt to make a selection Note You can clear or change your MyKey settings at any time during the same key cycle as you created the MyKey Once you have switched the engine off however you will need an admin key to change or clear your MyKey settings CLEARING ALL MYKEYS You can clear all MyKeys within the same key cycle as you created the MyKey If you switch your ignition off however you will need to use an admin key to clear your MyKeys Note When you clear your MyKeys you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status at once To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings use the information display to do the following 1 Access the main menu and select Settings then MyKey 2 Scroll to Clear All and press the OK button 3 Hold the OK button until ALL MYKEYS CLEARED displays CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS You can find information about your programmed MyKeys by using the information display MYKEY DISTANCE Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey The only way to delete the accumulated di
342. inting October 2014 USA fus 384 Audio System When HD Radio broadcasts are active you can access the following functions Scan Hear a brief sampling of all available stations This feature still works when HD Radio reception is on although it does not scan for HD2 HD7 channels You may see the HD logo appear if the station has a digital broadcast To save a multicast When the channel is active on screen press station as a preset and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station Sound returns when finished When recalling a HD2 or HD3 memory preset there is a mute before the digital audio plays as the system must once again acquire the digital signal As with any saved radio station you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station s reception area 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Audio System 385 HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area the station may mute due to weak signal strength If you are listening to HD1 the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again However if you are listening to any of the possible HD2 through HD7 multicast channels the station mutes and stays muted unless it i
343. io channel Note Sirius does not support the Alert feature on all channels Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for Alert feature variation Electronic Serial Number ESN is required when you need to activate modify or track your satellite radio account The ESN is on the System Information Screen SR ESN XXXXXXXXXXXX To access your ESN press the bottom left corner of the touchscreen then SIRIUS gt Options Direct Tune Touch this button to manually enter the desired satellite channel number Touch Enter when you are done Browse Touch this button to view a list of all available stations Scroll to see more categories Touch the station you want to listen to Touch Skip if you want to skip this channel Touch Lock if you do not want anyone to listen to this channel Touch Title or Artist to see song and artists on other stations 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 464 MyFord Touch If Equipped Satellite Radio Voice Commands E If you are listening to Sirius satellite radio press the voice us button on the steering wheel control When prompted say any of the commands in the following chart If you are not listening to Sirius satellite radio press the voice button and after the tone say Sirius then any of the commands in the following chart SAT 2 preset If you have said Sports game see the following Sports game chart If you have sai
344. ion e If you use a rental trailer follow the instructions the rental agency gives you For load specification terms found on the tire label and Safety Compliance label and for instructions on calculating your vehicle s load refer to Load limit in the Load Carrying chapter Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of your vehicle load when calculating the total vehicle weight Trailer Towing Connector Vehicles with a Trailer Towing Package and 7 Pin Connector When attaching the trailer wiring connector to your vehicle only use a proper fitting connector that works with the vehicle and trailer functions If your vehicle has a trailer towing package it may have a 7 pin connector Some connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo which confirms that it is the proper wiring connector and works correctly with your vehicle Running lights 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 260 Towing Hitches Do not use a hitch that clamps onto your vehicle s bumper Use a load carrying hitch You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10 15 of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue Do not to exceed the maximum tongue load of 500 pounds 227 kilograms on a Class III receiver Weight Distributing Hitch WARNING Do not adjust a weight distributing hitch to any position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it was before attaching the trailer
345. ion sets the automatic parking points of interest notification Turn this feature ON or OFF When parking points of interest notification is on the icons display on the map when you get close to your destination This may not be very useful in dense areas and may clutter the map when other points of interest display 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 515 Route Preferences Preferred Route allows you to choose to have the system display the Shortest Fastest or most Ecological route first If you set Always Use Preferred Route to Yes the system uses the selected route type to calculate only one route to the desired destination Always Use Preferred Route bypasses route selection in destination programming The system only calculates one route based on the preferred route setting Eco Time Penalty allows you to select a low medium or high cost for the calculated Eco Route The higher the setting the longer the time allotment is for the route Avoid features allows you to choose to have the system avoid freeways toll roads ferries and car trains when planning your route Turn these features ON or OFF Use HOV Lanes allows you to choose to have the system use high occupancy vehicle lanes if available when planning your route Navigation Preferences Guidance Prompts allows you to choose to have the system use Voice amp Tones or Tone Only on your programmed r
346. ip CD ROM disk s or via web download or other means and is labeled For Upgrade Purposes Only or For Recovery Purposes Only you may install one 1 copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE and use it in accordance with this EULA including any additional EULA terms accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS Al title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE including but not limited to any images photographs animations video audio music text and applets incorporated into the SOFTWARE the accompanying printed materials and any copies of the SOFTWARE are owned by MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY or their affiliates or suppliers The SOFTWARE is licensed not sold You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE All title and intellectual 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 532 Appendices property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties This EULA grants you no rights to use such content All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and service providers their affiliates and suppliers Use of any on line
347. iper arm and press it into place until a click is heard If you find this procedure too difficult please see your dealer AIR FILTER CHECK WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running When changing the air filter element use only the air filter element listed Refer to Motorcraft amp Part Numbers in the Capacities and Specifications chapter For EcoBoost equipped vehicles When servicing the air cleaner it is important that no foreign material enter the air induction system The engine and turbocharger are susceptible to damage from even small particles Refer to Scheduled Maintenance for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element Note Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Maintenance 313 Changing the air filter element 3 5L V6 engine 3 5L V6 EcoBoost engine 1 On the passenger s side of the air filter housing release the two clamps from the air filter housing cover 2 Lift the passenger s side of the cover and push the cover toward the passenger s side Release the three tabs on the cover from the three slots in the driver s
348. ire and Rim Association that is intended for temporary service on cars sport utility vehicles minivans and light trucks B 145 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire C 80 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall D D Indicates a diagonal type tire R Indicates a radial type tire E 16 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter Location of the Tire Label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door See the payload description and graphic in the Load Carrying chapter 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 340 Wheels and Tires INFLATING YOUR TIRES Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat Every day before you drive check your tires If one looks lower than the others use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required At least once a month and before long trips inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge including
349. is available The previously stored multicast preset or direct tune is not available in your current reception area Data service issue by the radio broadcaster Data service issue by the radio broadcaster Pressing Scan disables HD2 HD7 channel search No action required This is a broadcast issue No action required The reception issue may clear up as you continue to drive No action required This is normal behavior Wait until the audio is available No action required The station is not available in your current location Fill out the station issue form at website listed below Fill out the station issue form at website listed below No action required This is normal behavior http www ibiquity com automotive report radio station experiences HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp U S and foreign patents HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp Ford Motor Company and iBiquity Digital Corp are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology Content may be changed added or deleted at any time at the station owner s discretion 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 461 Radio Voice Commands EM If you are listening to the radio press the voice button on the us steering wheel control When prompted say any of the commands
350. is in e On gray light type 1 white light type 2 Iluminates when the speed control system is turned on Turns off when the speed control system is turned off e Engaged white light type 1 green light type 2 Illuminates when the speed control system is engaged Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Instrument Cluster 119 Turn signal Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard warning flasher is turned on If the indicators stay on or flash faster check for a burned out bulb AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS Key In Ignition Warning Chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver s door is opened Keyless Warning Alert If Equipped Sounds the horn twice when you exit your vehicle with the intelligent access key after the last door is closed and your keyless vehicle is in RUN indicating your vehicle is still on Headlamps On Warning Chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on the ignition is off the key is not in the ignition and the driver s door is opened Parking Brake On Warning Chime Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking brake have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printi
351. ise very quickly Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious heat related injuries including brain damage Small children are particularly at risk 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Child Safety 19 Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children age restraint type Infants or toddlers Small children Larger children Children weighing 40 lb 18 kg or less generally age four or younger Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat generally children who are less than 4 ft 9 in 1 45 m tall are greater than age four 4 and less than age twelve 12 and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 Ib 36 kg and upward to 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt positioning booster seat generally children who are at least 4 ft 9 in 1 45 m tall or greater than 80 Ib 36 kg or 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by child restraint manufacturer toddlers in the United States and Canada Use a child safety seat sometimes called an infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat Use a belt positioning booster seat Use a vehicle safety belt having the lap belt snug and low across the hips shoulder belt centered across the shoulder and chest and seat back upright You are
352. isplay 2 Press OK to confirm 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 431 Master Reset Completely erase all information stored on SYNC all phonebook call history text messages and all paired devices and return to the factory default settings Application Download new software applications Cif available and then load the desired applications through your USB port See the web site for more information Exit the current menu TROUBLESHOOTING Your SYNC system is easy to use However should questions arise see the tables below Use the website at any time to check your phone s compatibility register your account and set preferences as well as access a customer representative via an online chat during certain hours Visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca for more information Phone issues cause s There is The audio control Review your phone s user guide excessive settings on your regarding audio adjustments background noise phone may be during a phone affecting SYNC call performance During a call I Possible phone Try turning off the device can hear the malfunction resetting the device removing other person but the device s battery then trying they cannot hear again me 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 432 SYNC cause s SYNC is not able e This is a e Go to the website
353. it appears that automatic control of the high beams is not functioning properly check the windshield in front of the camera for blockage A clear view of the road is required for proper system operation Any windshield damage in the area of the camera field of view should be repaired Note If a blockage is detected e g bird dropping bug splatter snow or ice and no changes are observed the system will go into low beam mode until the blockage is cleared A message may also appear in the instrument cluster display noting the front camera is blocked Note Typical road dust dirt and water spots will not affect the automatic high beam system s performance However in cold or inclement weather conditions the automatic high beam system s availability may be decreased If the driver wants to change the beam state independently of the system the driver may turn the high beams on or off using the multifunction switch stalk Automatic control will resume when conditions are correct 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 102 Lighting Note Modification of the vehicle ride height e g using much larger tires may degrade feature performance A camera sensor is centrally mounted behind the windshield of the vehicle and monitors the conditions to decide when to switch the high beams off and on Once the system is active the high beams will switch on if e The ambient light level is low enough that hig
354. items listed in Scheduled Maintenance Information performed according to the specified schedule The scheduled maintenance items listed in Scheduled Maintenance Information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system If other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control such non Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability Illumination of the service engine soon indicator charging system warning light or the temperature warning light fluid leaks strange odors smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine By law vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures repairs services sells leases trades vehicles or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Fuel and Refueling 197 permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working Information about your vehicle s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or ne
355. ith the remote control Press the remote control button twice within three seconds To open with the outside liftgate aN control button M 1 Unlock the liftgate with the remote control or power door unlock button If an intelligent access transmitter is within 3 feet 1 meter of the liftgate the liftgate will unlock when you press the liftgate release button 2 Press the control button located in the top of the liftgate pull cup handle Note Allow the power system to open the liftgate after pressing the control Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the system s obstacle detection feature and stops the power operation To close with the rear cargo area control Press and release the button located in the rear cargo area WARNING Keep clear of the liftgate when activating the rear switch Obstacle Detection When closing The liftgate will reverse to full open when it detects an obstacle A chime will sound three times as the liftgate begins to reopen Remove the obstacle to close the liftgate Note Entering your vehicle while the liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to bounce and activate obstacle detection To prevent this let the power liftgate close completely before you enter your vehicle Before driving off check the instrument cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or warning indicator Failure to do this could result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate open while driving
356. ith the top of your head and as far forward as possible remaining comfortable e Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel We recommend a minimum of 10 inches 25 centimeters between your breastbone and the airbag cover 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 150 Seats e Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent e Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully e Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can maintain full control of your vehicle HEAD RESTRAINTS WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in or operate the vehicle until the head restraint is placed in its proper position The driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion WARNING The adjustable head restraint is a safety device Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied An improperly adjusted head restraint may provide reduced protection to an occupant during certain rear impacts WARNING Install the head restraint properly to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash Note Before adjusting any head restraint adjust the seatback to an upright driv
357. ity connecting my feature OR e Try turning off the device phone to SYNC e Possible phone resetting the device or removing malfunction the device s battery then trying again e Try deleting your device from SYNC deleting SYNC from your device and trying again e Check the security and auto accept prompt always settings relative to the SYNC Bluetooth connection on your phone e Update your device s software firmware e Turn off the Auto phonebook download setting Text messaging is e This is a e Go to the website to review not working on phone dependent your phone s compatibility SYNC feature OR e Try turning off the device e Possible phone resetting the device or removing malfunction the device s battery then trying again 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 524 MyFord Touch If Equipped Possible Possible solution s cause s I am having trouble connecting my device SYNC does not recognize my device when I turn on the car Bluetooth audio does not stream SYNC does not recognize music that is on my device Possible device malfunction This is a device limitation e This isa phone dependent feature OR e The device is not connected e Your music files may not contain the proper artist song title album or genre information OR e The file may be corrupted OR e The song may have copyright protection which does not allow it to pl
358. ize and for Metric tires 36 psi 2 5 bar Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire capability e Extra load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 42 psi 2 9 bar Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability e kPa KiloPascal a metric unit of air pressure e PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure e Cold tire pressure The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile 1 6 kilometers e Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door e B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door e Bead area of the tire Area of the tire next to the rim e Sidewall of the tire Area between the bead area and the tread e Tread area of the tire Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle e Rim The metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated 2015 Flex 471 Owners Gui
359. jure a passenger or bystander Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety e Observe posted speed limits e Avoid fast starts stops and turns e Avoid potholes and objects on the road e Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking Highway Hazards No matter how carefully you drive there is always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic This may further damage the flat tire but your safety is more important If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tires for damage If a tire is under inflated or damaged deflate it remove the wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel If you cannot detect a cause have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected Tire and Wheel Alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you are driving the wheels may be out of alignment Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of you
360. justable foot pedals Programming a memory position 1 Switch the ignition on 2 Adjust the memory features to your desired positions using the associated controls 3 Press and hold the desired preset button for about two seconds until you hear a single tone You can save up to two preset memory positions You can save a memory preset at any time Recalling a memory position Press and release the desired memory preset button to recall a saved memory position You can recall a programmed memory position e n any gearshift position if the ignition is not on e Only in park P or neutral N if the ignition is on Recalling a memory position with the remote control The memory positions are also recalled when you press unlock on your remote control if the transmitter is programmed to a memory position or when you enter a valid personal entry code that is programmed to a memory position To program the memory feature to a remote control see the Keys and Remote Control chapter Easy Entry and Exit Feature If Equipped This feature can move the seat rearward and the steering column up and forward to allow extra room to exit the vehicle This occurs when e You place the transmission in neutral N or park P 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Seats 157 e You switch the keyless ignition off or take the key out of the ignition switch The seat and steering wheel will move to
361. ks well The center of the lamp is marked by a 3 millimeter circle on the headlamp lens 3 Turn on the headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjusting the other On the wall or screen you will observe a flat zone of high intensity light located at the top of the right hand portion of the beam pattern If the top edge of the high intensity light zone is not at the horizontal reference line the headlamp will need to be adjusted 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Maintenance 315 4 Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp Using a Phillips 2 screwdriver turn the adjuster either clockwise or counterclockwise in order to adjust the vertical aim of the headlamp The horizontal edge of the brighter light should touch the horizontal reference line 5 Close the hood and turn off the lamps HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS NON ADJUSTABLE CHANGING A BULB Lamp Assembly Condensation Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure Condensation can be a natural by product of this design When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold When normal condensation occurs a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
362. l again to initiate the call To erase the last spoken digit say Delete or press the left arrow button To erase all spoken digits say Clear or press and hold the left arrow button To end the call press and hold the phone button Receiving Calls When receiving a call you can e Answer the call by pressing the phone button e Reject the call by pressing and holding the phone button e Ignore the call by doing nothing 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 401 Phone Options during an Active Call During an active call you have additional menu features which become available such as putting a call on hold joining calls etc Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the menu options To access 1 Press MENU during an active call 2 When Active Call Menu is selected press OK 3 Scroll to cycle through the following options When you select Mute Call Mute the call Privacy Switch a call from an active hands free environment to your cellular phone for a more private conversation Press OK when Privacy on off appears The display indicates In Privacy and the system transfers your call Call Hold Put an active call on hold Press OK when Place Call on Hold appears To answer another call at this time press the phone button Join Calls Join two separate calls 1 Press the phone button 2 Access the desired contact through SYNC or use voice comman
363. lated trip distance e Average fuel economy shows the average fuel economy for a given trip e Elapsed trip time timer stops when the vehicle is turned off and restarts when the vehicle is restarted Fuel Economy Use the left right arrow buttons to choose the desired fuel economy display Fuel Economy Pwal Peai Inst Fuel XX Min Fuel E Economy History Instantaneous fuel usage X Fuel usage over a 30 minute time span Average fuel economy Always Present XXX mi km to empty Always Present Total odometer lower left corner Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed fuel usage information e Inst Fuel Economy This display shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy e XX Min Fuel History This display shows a bar chart of your fuel history 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Information Displays 127 Driver Assist In this mode you can configure different driver setting choices Note Some items are optional and may not appear Blindspot check enabled default uncheck disabled 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 128 Information Displays Vehicle 2015 Flex 471 DTE Calculation Normal Towing Easy Entry Exit check enabled uncheck disabled of seconds Locks Unlocking Driver s door Climate Control Auto Last using this Settings feature allows you to selec
364. law notwithstanding this limitation Single EULA The end user documentation for the DEVICE and related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs such as multiple translations and or multiple media versions e g in the user documentation and in the software Even if you receive multiple EULAs you are licensed to use only one 1 copy of the SOFTWARE SOFTWARE Transfer You may permanently transfer your rights under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE provided you retain no copies you transfer all of the SOFTWARE including all component parts the media and printed materials any upgrades and if applicable the Certificate s of Authenticity and the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade any transfer must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE Termination Without prejudice to any other rights FORD MOTOR COMPANY or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA Security Updates Digital Rights Management Content owners use the WMDRM technology included in your DEVICE to protect their intellectual property included copyrighted content Portions of the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use WMDRM software to access WMDRM protected content If the WMDRM software fails to protect the content content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 530 Appendices
365. laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving e Do not attempt to service or repair SYNC See your authorized dealer e Do not operate playing devices if the power cords and or cables are broken split or damaged Carefully place cords and or cables where they will not be stepped on or interfere with the operation of pedals seats and or compartments or safe driving abilities e Do not leave playing devices in the vehicle in extreme conditions as it could cause damage to your device Refer to your device s user guide for further information e For your safety some SYNC functions are speed dependent and cannot be performed when the vehicle is traveling at speeds greater than 3 mph 5 km h Ensure that you review your device s user guide before using with SYNC 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 447 Speed restricted Features Some features of this system may be too difficult to use while your vehicle is moving so they are restricted from use unless your vehicle is stationary e Screens that are too crowded with information such as Point of Interest reviews and ratings Sirius Travel Link sports scores movie times and ski conditions e Any action that requires you to use a keyboard is restricted such as entering a navigation destination or editing information e All lists are limited so the user can view fewer entries such as phone
366. le is operational but the trailer is not then the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services Vehicles Sold in the United States Using Roadside Assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference This card is found in the owner s manual portfolio in the glove compartment U S Ford vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance call 1 800 241 3673 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Roadside Emergencies 271 If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 miles 56 3 kilometers To obtain reimbursement information U S Ford vehicle customers call 1 800 241 3673 Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts Vehicles Sold in Canada Getting Roadside Assistance Canadian clients who require roadside assistance call 1 800 665 2006 Vehicles Sold in Canada Using Roadside Assistance For your convenience you may complete the roadside assistance identification card found in the centerfold of this warranty guide and retain for future reference Canadian roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U S coverage If you require more information please refer to the coverage section of your warranty guide call us in Canada at 1 800 665 2006 or visit our website at www ford ca Sykes Assistance Se
367. le tracks More Info Touch this button to see disc information 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 468 MyFord Touch If Equipped Options Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for Bass Midrange Treble Balance and Fade DSP Digital Signal Processing Occupancy Mode Speed Compensated Volume Note Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings Compression allows you to turn the compression feature on and off Browse Touch this button to look through all available CD tracks CD Voice Commands EM If you are listening to a CD press the voice button on the us steering wheel control When prompted say any of the commands in the following chart If you are not listening to a CD press the voice button and after the tone say CD then any of the commands in the following chart Repeat off Repeat track This applies to WMA or MP3 files only 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 469 SD Card Slot and USB Port SD Card Slot Note Your SD card slot is spring loaded To remove the SD card press the card in and the system ejects it Do not attempt to pull the card to remove it as this could cause damage Note The navigation system also uses this card slot See Navigation system later in this chapter for more information The slot is located either in the center console or behind a small
368. lected channel Sat Fault SIRIUS There is an internal If this message does system failure module or system not clear shortly or failure present with an ignition key cycle your receiver may have a fault See an authorized dealer for service 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Audio System 389 Radio display Possible action Invalid Channel The channel is no longer available Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not include this channel No Signal The signal is lost from the Sirius satellite or Sirius tower to your vehicle antenna Updating Update of channel programming in progress Call SIRIUS Your satellite service is 1 888 539 7474 no longer available None Found Check All the channels in the Channel Guide selected category are either skipped or locked Tune to another channel or choose another preset Contact Sirius at 1 888 539 7474 to subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel The signal is blocked When you move into an open area the signal should return No action required The process may take up to three minutes Call Sirius at 1 888 539 7474 to resolve subscription issues Use the channel guide to turn off the Lock or Skip function on that station Subscription Updated Sirius has updated the No action required channels available for your vehicle 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 201
369. less entry SyS tE M vtto piso eet RA 82 SecuriLock passive anti theft SVSUCIN sx idees o sicciseisce Puce Yet 85 Selecting your media source USB Line in BT audio 423 Sending new text messages 479 Setting a destination 510 Setting a destination by VOICE d 511 Setting S idees ap tetendit 495 Setting the clock 376 495 5ide air CUFUalti eie 59 Side curtain airbags system 59 SIRIUS satellite radio 376 462 SIRIUS satellite radio voice commands 2e re tos beeies 464 SIRIUS Travel Link 487 SIRIUS Travel Link voice COPI And cie etic er tadeeecues 488 SOS Post Crash Alert 51 Spare tire see Changing the Tire 355 Spark plugs specifications 361 366 Specification chart T bricants 53 certe e eee 362 Stability system 215 Starting your vehicle 183 JUMP Starting niet 273 push button start system 182 Steering wheel 90 COFILEOLS siirrostaan E eerta 92 INE 5osnit rose eres 90 91 DUM VIBOE sci ter esee qu tes 110 2015 Flex 471 Supplemental Restraint System SRS see airbags 52 Supported media file types 472 Supported player media formats and metadata information sseeeesese 472 SYNC customer support 393 SYNC Services 41
370. less vehicle control not more Additionally smooth variations of the accelerator and or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for Avoid abrupt steering acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and or personal injury Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel e In the event of an emergency stop avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements e If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another i e from concrete to gravel there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver steering acceleration or braking Again avoid these abrupt inputs 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus All Wheel Drive If Equipped 207 Sand When driving over sand try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid excessive wheel slip Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand for an extended period of time This could cause the AWD system to overheat and default to front wheel drive If this occurs AWD Off will be displayed in the Information Display To resume normal AWD function as soon as possible stop the vehicle in a safe location and stop the engine for at least
371. lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash three times to indicate a lane change 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 104 Lighting INTERIOR LAMPS Front map lamps The map lamps are located on the overhead console Press the lens of each map lamp to turn on the lamps The map lamps also turn on when e any door is opened 7 T e the top of the instrument panel dimmer switch is pressed until the courtesy lamps come on e the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off Rear dome reading lamps EH Your vehicle may have reading lamps within the rear dome lamp s Press the switches on either side of the dome lamp to turn the lamps on Rear map lamps Your vehicle may have second row lamps located within the grab handles Press the detent on the p lens to turn the lamps on 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Windows and Mirrors 105 POWER WINDOWS WARNING Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves WARNING When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings Press or lift the switches to operate the windows e Press the switch to the first detent and hold to open the window e Lift the
372. liary INPUb JACK uae ew RO RPG ee E US RUE 390 USB DOR 153 ache tem e ua Y CEA ERSTE CEES ES 391 SYNC 392 Pairing your phone for the first time 005 397 OAT Assist My said Soe tee een gs BE ES EA SE PSY eee TE 412 Vehicle Health Report 0 0 a a a OE a a 415 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Table of Contents 9 MyFord Touch If Equipped 442 Privacy Information s 544060 44646 4 o4 0s RUPES RA e esq 448 VOICE FECOSNITION i 3 6444 tanen sa ii EAS OEHHA DeC E RESO 450 Listening to MUSIC ais see RM DER pA Gp Oe EUR EE 454 Phone features sacri a Rn REG LEE Y Y PRTRPSETGS 475 Information Menu 0 00 eee nee 483 SIM RPRUDM ape ML By she maze rah adh a aude See setae dice ate 495 Climate features seduce ER edP eee duree 507 Navigation systemie o sca ied a medok Ripa x Atha wr RI RL 510 Appendices 528 Scheduled Maintenance 546 Normal scheduled maintenance and log 551 Index 563 The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print In the interest of continuous development we reserve the right to change specifications design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission Errors and omissions excepted Ford M
373. lication statute inducement estoppel or otherwise and Telenav and its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement 8 3 By using the Telenav Software you consent to receive from Telenav all communications including notices agreements legally required disclosures or other information in connection with the Telenav Software collectively Notices electronically Telenav may provide such Notices by posting them on Telenav s Website or by downloading such Notices to your wireless device If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive Notices electronically you must discontinue your use of the Telenav Software 8 4 Telenav s or your failure to require performance of any provision shall not affect that party s right to require performance at any time thereafter nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of the provision itself 8 5 If any provision herein is held unenforceable then such provision will be modified to reflect the intention of the parties and the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect 8 6 The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement and will not be referred to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this Agreement As us
374. ll unlock all the doors when e the ignition is on all the doors are closed and your vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h e your vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is switched off Or to accessory and the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being switched off or to accessory Note The doors will not autounlock if you electronically lock the vehicle after you switch the ignition off and before you open the driver door Enabling or Disabling Note You can enable or disable the autolock and autounlock features independently of each other You can enable or disable these features e through an authorized dealer e using the information display if equipped with this feature 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 78 Locks Illuminated Entry The interior lamps and select exterior lamps illuminate when you use the integrated keyhead transmitter intelligent access key or the keyless entry keypad to unlock the vehicle The system will turn off the lights if e you switch the ignition on e you press the lock button on the remote control e you lock your vehicle using the keyless entry keypad e after 25 seconds of illumination The lights will not turn off if e you turn them on with the dimmer control e any door is open Illuminated Exit The interior lamps and select exterior lamps illuminate when all doors are closed an
375. llaneous e Make sure all linkages cables levers and pins under vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust e Move vehicles at least 25 feet 8 meters every 15 days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Vehicle Care 329 Removing Vehicle from Storage When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage do the following Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build up on window surfaces Check windshield wipers for any deterioration Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected during storage mice squirrel nests Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected during storage Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label Check brake pedal operation Drive the vehicle 15 feet 4 5 meters back and forth to remove rust build up Check fluid levels including coolant oil and gas to make sure there are no leaks and fluids are at recommended levels If the battery was removed clean the battery cable ends and inspect Contact your authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 330 Wheels and Tires GENERAL INFORMATION Notice to Crossover Vehicle Owners Crossover vehicles handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on
376. llite radio Menu Structure Note Depending on your system some options may appear slightly different Press MENU Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the options Press the right arrow to enter a menu Press the left arrow to exit a menu Press OK to confirm a selection Radio Settings channels Set Category Select to have the system search by certain music categories such as Rock Pop or Country RBDS RDS Text Select to view additional broadcast data if available This feature defaults to off RBDS must be on for you to set a category AST Select to store the 10 strongest local stations on the AM AST or FM AST frequency bands 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Audio System 379 Select for a brief sampling of all available channels Show ESN Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number ESN You need this number when communicating with Sirius to activate modify or track your account Channel Guide Select to view available satellite radio channels Press OK to open a list of the following options for this channel Tune Channel Skip Channel or Lock Channel Once you skip or lock a channel you can only access it by pressing Direct and entering the channel number Locking or unlocking a channel requires your PIN Set Category Select to view channel categories such as Pop Rock or News If you select a category seek and scan fu
377. lock tab to release the blade and pull the wiper blade down toward the windshield to remove it from the arm 2 Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield To prolong the life of the wiper blades it is highly recommended to scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element Changing rear window wiper blade To replace the rear wiper blade 1 Grab the wiper arm with one hand close to the arm blade joint and pull it as far away from the J glass as possible Do not use gt excessive force because it can break the wiper arm at the heel Hold it there until the next step 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 312 Maintenance 2 Grab the primary structure of the blade with the other hand close to the arm blade joint 3 The wiper arm has a snap n retention feature to receive a cross pin from the wiper blade structure n Grip tightly and press on the arm blade joint from beneath and separate the blade from the arm Avoid rotating the wiper blade structure and trapping your left hand between the arm and blade 4 Attach the new wiper to the w
378. lockwise and pulling it straight out Install the new bulb s in reverse order Replacing HID headlamp bulbs if equipped The headlamps on your vehicle use a high intensity discharge source These lamps operate at a high voltage When the bulb is burned out the bulb and starter capsule assembly must be replaced by your authorized dealer 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Maintenance 317 Replacing front parking lamp turn signal bulbs 1 Make sure headlamp switch is in the off position then open the hood 2 Reach behind the headlamp assembly to access the bulb sockets 3 Remove the bulb socket by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out 4 To remove the bulb pull it straight out of the bulb socket Install the new bulb s in reverse order Replacing fog lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the fog lamp switch is in the off position 2 From underneath the vehicle partially remove the tire splash shield by removing four drive screws from the lower flap The splash shield flap can now be repositioned to allow access to the front fog lamp bulb and electrical wire harness 3 Carefully disconnect the wire harness connector from the bulb by releasing the two snap clips 4 Rotate the bulb counterclockwise to remove from the fog lamp Install the new bulb in reverse order 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 318 Mainte
379. lume of 45 A message will be shown in the display when you attempt to exceed the limited volume Also the speed sensitive or compensated automatic volume control will be disabled e Always on setting When this is selected you will not be able to turn off AdvanceTrac or the do not disturb feature Gf your vehicle is equipped with this feature CREATING A MYKEY Use the information display to create a MyKey 1 Insert the key you want to program into the ignition If your vehicle is equipped with a push button start place the intelligent access key in the backup slot The location of your backup slot is in another chapter See Starting and Stopping the Engine 2 Switch the ignition on 3 Access the main menu on the information display controls and select Settings then MyKey by pressing OK or the gt button 4 Press OK or the gt button to select Create MyKey 5 When prompted hold the OK button until you see a message informing you to label this key as a MyKey The key will be restricted at the next start MyKey is successfully created Make sure you label it so you can distinguish it from the admin keys You can also program configurable settings for the key s See Programming Changing Configurable Settings Programming Changing Configurable Settings Use the information display to access your configurable MyKey settings 1 Switch the ignition on using an admin key If your vehicle has push button start place the
380. ly distribute the load as well as maintain a low center of gravity Loaded vehicles with higher centers of gravity may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Take extra precautions such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance when driving a heavily loaded vehicle Note The maximum recommended load evenly distributed on the crossbars is 100 pounds 45 kilograms Note Never place loads directly on the roof panel The roof panel is not designed to directly carry a load 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 248 Load Carrying For correct roof rack system function you must place loads directly on crossbars affixed to the roof rack side rails We recommend you use Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars designed specifically for your vehicle Make sure that you securely fasten the load Check the tightness of the load before driving and at each fuel stop LOAD LIMIT Vehicle Loading With and Without a Trailer This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and or trailer to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certif
381. ly from your camera You must access the photos either from your USB mass storage device or from an SD card Note Photographs with extremely large dimensions such as 2048 x 1536 may not be compatible and appear as a blank black image on the display Your system allows you to upload and view up to 32 photos To access press the Settings icon Display Edit Wallpaper and then follow the system prompts to upload your photographs Only the photograph s which meets the following conditions display e Compatible file formats are as follows jpg gif png bmp e Each file must be 1 5 MB or less e Recommended dimensions 800 x 384 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 497 Sound Press the Settings icon gt Sound then select from the 9 following Sound Settings Bass Speed Compensated Volume Set Balance and Fade poU If equipped Vehicle Press the Settings icon Vehicle then select from the 9 following Ambient Lighting Vehicle Health Report Door Keypad Code Camera Settings Enable Valet Mode Ambient Lighting If Equipped When activated ambient lighting illuminates footwells and cupholders with a choice of colors To access and make adjustments l Press the Settings icon Vehicle Ambient Lighting 2 Touch the desired color 3 Use the scroll bar to increase or decrease the intensity To turn the feature on or off
382. m correctly another dealer and logging out error Log back in and change it back to your preferred dealer and retrieve the report e Update your mobile number in your account on the website e Make sure you have full signal strength and that your Bluetooth e Bad signal volume level has been turned up strength OR e Try deleting your phone and e Your phone may performing a clean pairing not be activated on the website I heard a e The phone in commercial when I use is not tried to use activated OR Traffic Directions e Your phone has and Information ID blocker active e This could be due to your phone s compatibility OR I am unable to submit a report e This is a free feature but you must first register online to use it e Turn off ID blocker on your phone as the system recognizes you by your phone number e Make sure the currently connected phone is the same one that is registered on your SyncMyRide account 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 526 MyFord Touch If Equipped cause s SYNC does not e You may be e Review the Phone voice understand what using the wrong commands and the Media voice I am saying voice commands commands at the beginning of OR their respective sections e You may be e Be aware that the microphone speaking too soon for SYNC is either in your rear or at the wrong view mirror or in the headliner time just above the windshield SYNC
383. manually by e pressing the active park assist button e grabbing the steering wheel e driving above approximately 20 mph 85 km h for 30 seconds during an active park search e driving above 6 mph 10 km h during automatic steering e turning off the traction control system Certain vehicle conditions can also deactivate the system e Traction control has activated on a slippery or loose surface e Anti lock brake system activation or failure e Any door except the driver s opens e Something touches the steering wheel If a problem occurs with the system a warning message is displayed followed by a chime Occasional active park assist messages may occur in normal operation For recurring or frequent active park assist faults contact an authorized dealer to have your vehicle serviced Troubleshooting the System The system does not look for a space The traction control system may be off Any door except the driver s may not be completely closed The system does not offer a particular space Something may be contacting the front bumper or side sensors There is not enough room on both sides of the vehicle in order to park There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space The vehicle is farther than 5 ft 1 5 m from the parking space The vehicle is closer than 16 in 40 cm from neighboring parked vehicles The transmission is in R Reverse the vehicle must be moving forwar
384. market the system may prompt you with questions such as setting the current phone as the primary phone the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start up downloading your phone book etc Pairing Subsequent Phones Note To scroll through the menus press the up and down arrows on your audio system Note Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and that the transmission is in position P Press the phone button and scroll until System Settings is selected Press OK and scroll until Bluetooth Devices is selected and press OK Scroll until Add Bluetooth Device is selected and press OK When Find SYNC appears in the display press OK Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode See your phone s user guide if necessary When prompted on your phone s display enter the six digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display The display indicates when the pairing is successful 7 The system then prompts with questions such as if you would like to set the current phone as the primary phone the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start up download your phone book etc gus co Tor D Phone Voice Commands Press the voice icon and say Phone Say any of the following fti PHONE Call lt name gt Call lt name gt on mobile OR cell Call lt name gt on other Phone book lt name gt at home Phone book
385. markings notes or warnings such as standard load or radial tubeless Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires These differences are described below Note Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire A LT Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association that is intended for service on light trucks B Load Range Load Inflation Limits Indicates the tire s load carrying capabilities and its inflation limits C Maximum Load Dual Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual defined as four tires on the rear axle a total of six or more tires on the vehicle D Maximum Load Single Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single defined as two tires total on the rear axle 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Wheels and Tires 339 Information on T Type Tires T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type C p A E tires These differences are p P described below x T145 80D16 is an example of a tire size Note The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire A T Indicates a type of tire designated by the T
386. master reset Bluetooth Devices Menu Options This menu allows you to add connect and delete devices as well as turn Bluetooth on and off 1 Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu 2 Scroll until System Settings appears and select OK 3 Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 429 4 Press OK and then scroll to select from When you select Add Bluetooth Device Connect Bluetooth Device Set Bluetooth On Off Delete Device Delete All Devices Delete all previously paired devices Press OK to select Exit the current menu This is a speed dependent feature 2015 Flex 471 Allows you to pair additional devices to the system 1 Press OK to select and press OK again when Find SYNC appears in the display 2 Follow the directions in your phone s user guide to put your phone into discovery mode A six digit PIN appears in the display 3 When prompted on your phone s six digit display enter the PIN Connect a previously paired Bluetooth enabled phone 1 Press OK to select and view a list of devices 2 Scroll until the desired device is chosen and press OK to connect the device Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off When the desired selection is chosen press OK Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and deactivates Bluetooth features
387. may be required You must also have the active SYNC Services Bluetooth enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the system in order to connect to and use SYNC Services See Phone earlier in this chapter for pairing instructions 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 484 MyFord Touch If Equipped Note This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your mobile phone Make sure your mobile phone is not blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services Note The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions Any navigation features are provided only as an aid Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver if you would be placed in an unsafe situation or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of errors changes in roads traffic conditions or driving conditions Note When you connect the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect your vehicle s current location travel direction and speed to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches you request Further to provide the s
388. may cause engine damage Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricants Specification Advisory Council ILSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers 1 Remove the filler cap 2 Add engine oil that meets Ford specifications See Capacities amd Specifications for more information 3 Wipe off any spilled oil 4 Replace the filler cap Turn it until you feel a strong resistance ENGINE COOLANT CHECK Checking the Engine Coolant The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the intervals listed in Scheduled Maintenance Information Note Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the coolant reservoir Note Coolant expands when it is hot The level may extend beyond the MAX mark If the level is at the MIN mark below the MIN mark or empty add coolant immediately See Adding Engine Coolant in this chapter The coolant concentration should be maintained within 4896 to 5096 which equates to a freeze point between 30 F 34 C and 34 F 37 C Note For best results coolant concentration should be tested with a refractometer such as Robinair Coolant and Battery Refractometer 75240 We do not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips for measurin
389. men should always wear their safety belts The lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt should be positioned low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow The shoulder belt should be positioned to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest Safety Belt Locking Modes WARNING After any vehicle crash the safety belt system at all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly In addition all safety belts should be checked for proper function WARNING The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in crashes All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts The driver safety belt has the first locking mode The front outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of locking modes described as follows Vehicle Sensitive Mode This is the normal retractor mode which allows free shoulder or lap belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement For example if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply or the vehicle r
390. mission in the Transmission chapter if you cannot move the transmission into e Maximum speed is 35 mph 56 km h e Maximum distance is 50 miles 80 kilometers Recreational Towing Note Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering your vehicle See the Climate Control chapter Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing such as towing your vehicle behind a motorhome or truck We designed these guidelines to prevent damage to your vehicle after it is hooked up to the recreational vehicle or tow dolly You can tow your front wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly If you are using a tow dolly follow the instructions specified by the equipment provider If you are towing with all four wheels on the ground see the following instructions 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 266 Towing You can tow your all wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or with all four wheels off the ground using a vehicle transport trailer Do not tow your all wheel drive vehicle with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly and the rear wheels on the ground This causes damage to your all wheel drive system If you are using a vehicle transport trailer follow the instruction specified by the equipment provider If you are towing with all four
391. mitters for example two way radios telephones and theft alarms Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulations and should be installed only by an authorized dealer e An authorized dealer needs to install mobile communications systems Improper installation may harm the operation of your vehicle particularly if the manufacturer did not design the mobile communication system specifically for automotive use e If you or an authorized Ford dealer add any non Ford electrical or electronic accessories or components to your vehicle you may adversely affect battery performance and durability In addition you may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Extended Service Plan 371 Extended Service Plan PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN SERVICE PLANS U S Only More than 32 million Ford owners have discovered the powerful protection of Ford Extended Service Plan It is the only extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company and provides peace of mind protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself One service bill the cost of parts and labor can easily exceed the price of your Ford
392. more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time e use commercial car washing equipment e try to repair the dissimilar spare tire Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability 3 Full size dissimilar spare without label on wheel When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly do not e exceed 70 mph 113 km h e use more than one dissimilar spare tire wheel at a time e use commercial car washing equipment e use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire and wheel The usage of a full size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Wheels and Tires 355 e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability e All Wheel driving capability e Load leveling adjustment When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly additional caution should be given to e towing a trailer e driving vehicles equipped with a camper body e driving vehicles with a load on the cargo
393. move to the red hot area and E The coolant temperature warning light will illuminate e The service engine soon indicator will illuminate If the engine reaches a preset over temperature condition the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine When this occurs the vehicle will still operate However e The engine power will be limited e The air conditioning system will be disabled Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine will completely shut down causing steering and braking effort to increase Once the engine temperature cools the engine can be restarted Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize engine damage 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Maintenance 303 When Fail Safe Mode is Activated WARNING Fail safe mode is for use during emergencies only Operate the vehicle in fail safe mode only as long as necessary to bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs When in fail safe mode the vehicle will have limited power will not be able to maintain high speed operation and may completely shut down without warning potentially losing engine power power steering assist and power brake assist which may increase the possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury WARNING Never remove the coolant re
394. mper or car top carrier As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart Inspect frequently Inspect and lubricate U joints Exceptions Every 30000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid 48000 km 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 558 Scheduled Maintenance Extensive idling or low speed driving for long distances as in heavy commercial use such as delivery taxi patrol car or livery As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart Inspect frequently Replace cabin air filter Gf equipped service as required Replace engine air filter 48000 km Every 60000 miles Replace spark plugs 96000 km Operating in dusty or sandy conditions such as unpaved or dusty roads service as required 8000 km abnormal noise wear looseness or drag measure tread depth Every 5000 miles 8000 km or six Perform multi point inspection months Every 30000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid 48000 km Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change See the Instrument Cluster chapter 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Special Operating Condition Log Dearer VALIDAT
395. mporary manual control is no longer desired and reverts back to automatic control Extensive manual control can be achieved by moving the shifter to the S Sport position The system will stay in manual control until the shifter is moved out of the manual position 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Transmission 201 If your vehicle is equipped with paddles on the steering wheel e Pull the left paddle to downshift the transmission e Pull the right paddle to upshift the transmission Upshift to the recommended shift speeds according to the following chart Upshifts when accelerating recommended for best fuel economy Shift from 5 6 50 mph 80 km h The instrument cluster will show the selected gear you are currently in In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM which may cause it to stall SelectShift will automatically make some downshifts if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time It will still allow you to downshift at any time as long as SelectShift determines that the engine will not be damaged from over revving Note Return the gear shift lever from S Sport to D Drive when manual control is no longer desired Note Engine damage may occur if excessive engine revving is held without shifting 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 202 Transmission Automatic Transmission Adaptive Le
396. multi point vehicle inspection is one more way to keep your vehicle running great 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 550 Scheduled Maintenance Muiti Point Inspection Report Card as Recommended by Ford Motor Company Tays Isto ngecin Vane ine ul Ern EM Mi Web Model Cole fa Filer Tupee s Hike i Hber Spark Page LA C mmnerart t WMeAdkarn Ous Ei Teds Ge only a panad Gat of Vekicte ruxaverumca hiama wst dm WOT s Please cost pase Osnes Manus OF St www genssesamioncon ir weide apec fac tS Io ao Ci Cora rein te La LIE fll nd o tha is It Chri ari n omms LIA L Lorttintes ix vohida al d an gaki bral nis Wiets Ta 1I epa pd Fol Py Es Aa ada bos E eappeds T 3 m 00 DD betes DOn OOs mwe ee DID nm State af Health Cenditiond m oo Via i pre Factor spec cad cranamg ani italok g a Ex T teio BOD Aie ar y essing esra boty Carnage O ro se Ts anon a Sal reaps T 633 ps TO utiksk a5 we d hs per bon rhon nore boris ederi ergs Lin signals araid 21d task large m E etta v cns cp sat piti ng El WWE yan and ioraesbces Lor bas ndodog LIB emm dit ts E imi cong sten in iic mcs nnt cage Siete aT DU fis EI k
397. n The system is not functional at vehicle speeds below 16 mph 26 km h An audible alarm sounds and the automatic braking released if your vehicle drops below this speed Hilly Condition Usage Note An audible alarm sounds and the system shuts down if it is applying brakes for an extended period of time This allows the brakes to cool down The system will function normally again when the brakes have cooled down You should select a lower gear position when the system is active in situations such as prolonged downhill driving on steep grades for example driving in mountainous areas Your vehicle needs additional engine braking in these situations to reduce the load on the vehicle s regular brake system to prevent them from overheating Switching Off Adaptive Cruise Control Note The set speed memory will erase when you switch the system off Press and release OFF or turn off the ignition 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 234 Cruise Control Detection Issues The radar sensor has a limited field of vision It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a vehicle later than expected in some situations The lead vehicle graphic will not illuminate if the system does not detect a vehicle in front of you A Detection issues can occur A When driving on a different line than the vehicle in front Gia B With vehicles that edge into your B lane The system can only detect these vehi
398. n damp white cotton cloth then use a clean and dry white cotton cloth to dry these areas 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Vehicle Care 325 e Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection e Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces e Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel interior trim and cluster lens e Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces If a spill occurs wipe off immediately Damage may not be covered by your warranty If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces clean as follows 1 Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth 2 Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available leather cleaning product for automotive interiors Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous area 3 Alternatively wipe the surface with a damp clean white cotton cloth and a mild soap and water solution Dry the area with a clean soft cloth 4 If necessary apply more soap and
399. n it shifts to the digital version Depending on the station quality you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound In order to provide the best possible experience use the contact form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology Independent entities own and operate each station These stations are responsible for making sure all audio streams and data fields are accurate 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 460 MyFord Touch If Equipped Potential station issues Isue Cause Actio Echo stutter skip or repeat in audio Increase or decrease in audio volume Sound fading or blending in and out There is an audio mute delay when selecting HD2 or HD multicast preset or Direct Tune Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast channel when recalling a preset or from a direct tune Text information does not match currently playing audio There is no text information shown for currently selected frequency HD2 HD7 stations not found when Scan is pressed This is poor time alignment by the radio broadcaster The radio is shifting between analog and digital audio The digital multicast is not available until the HD Radio broadcast is decoded Once decoded the audio
400. n and or body e Do not install tire chains cables or optional traction devices on the rear tires This could cause damage to the vehicle s wheel house or body e Do not use tire chains cables or optional traction devices with 255 45R20 tires Install cable chains securely verifying that the cables do not touch any wiring brake lines or fuel lines e Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h with tire cables on your vehicle Drive cautiously If you hear the cables rub or bang against your vehicle stop and retighten the cables If this does not work remove the cables to prevent damage to your vehicle Remove the tire cables when they are no longer needed Do not use tire cables on dry roads TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM WARNING The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using a tire gauge See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure loss of control vehicle rollover and personal injury Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Wheels and Tires 3
401. n of the remote control to your vehicle Only use integrated keyhead transmitters or standard SecuriLock keys You must have two previously programmed coded keys and the new unprogrammed key readily accessible See your authorized dealer to have the spare key programmed if two previously programmed coded keys are not available Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin 1 Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition 2 Turn the ignition from off to on Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds but no more than 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition off and remove the first coded key from the ignition 4 After three seconds but within 10 seconds of turning the ignition off insert the second previously coded key into the ignition 5 Turn the ignition from off to on Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds but no more than 10 seconds 6 Turn the ignition off and remove the second previously programmed coded key from the ignition 7 After three seconds but within 20 seconds of turning the ignition off and removing the previously programmed coded key insert the new unprogrammed key into the ignition 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Security 87 8 Turn the ignition from off to on Keep the ignition on for at least six seconds until you hear the door locks cycle 9 Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition The key will sta
402. n the touchscreen Select the A V In tab You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may be low 7 Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the controls In order to playback video from your iPod or iPhone if compatible you must have a special combination USB RCA composite video cable which you can buy from Apple When the cable is connected to your iPod or iPhone plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the USB port 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 475 Troubleshooting e Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output The jack only works correctly with devices that have a headphone output with a volume control e Do not set the portable music player s volume level higher than is necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio as this causes distortion and reduces sound quality e If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels turn the portable music player volume down If the problem persists replace or recharge the batteries in the portable media player Control the portable media player in the same manner when used with headphones as the auxiliary input jack does not provide control such as Play or Pause over the attached portable media player PHONE A e B D E
403. nance Replacing rear stop tail turn backup and side marker lamp bulbs The stop tail turn backup and side marker lamp bulbs are located in the tail lamp assembly Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a stop tail turn and side marker lamp assemblies containing integral multiple light emitting diodes LED If replacement is required see your authorized dealer A Backup lamp B Stop tail turn signal lamp C Side marker lamp D Supplemental taillamp 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position and open the liftgate 2 Remove the hex screws in the liftgate opening then pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle This will disengage two snap attachments along the side of the vehicle 3 Remove the bulb socket by rotating it counterclockwise then pulling it out of the lamp assembly 4 Pull the bulb straight from the socket Install new bulb s in reverse order Replacing high mount brake lamp bulbs Your vehicle is equipped with an LED high mount brake lamp It is designed to last the life of the vehicle If replacement is required it is recommended that you see your authorized dealer Replacing license plate lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position y p p y 2 Remove the two screws and the license plate lamp assembly from the liftgate 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Maintenance 319 4 3 Carefully pull the bulb straight o
404. nctions only stop on channels in that category Alerts Select to turn off or turn on alerts for songs artists or teams The system alerts you when the selection is playing on another channel Save up to 20 alerts stations you previously skipped Parental Lock PIN Select to create a PIN which allows you to lock or unlock channels Your initial PIN is 1234 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 380 Audio System Spd Comp Vol Automatically adjusts the volume to compensate for speed and wind noise You can set the system between 0 and 7 Select to adjust settings for Treble Middle Bass Fade and Balance CD Settings Scan All Select to scan all disc selections Scan Folder Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder CD Compression Select to bring soft and loud passages together for a more consistent listening level Clock Settings Select to set the time Set Date Select to set the calendar date 24h Mode Select to view clock time in a 12 hour mode or 24 hour mode French or Spanish Temp Setting Select to display the outside temperature in eee ena casi 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Audio System 381 AM FM CD PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may tak
405. nd it rearward for extra sunlight coverage Retract the visor before moving it back toward the windshield and storing it Lift the cover to switch on the lamp MULTI PANEL VISTA ROOF IF EQUIPPED WARNING Do not let children play with the moonroof or leave C children unattended in the vehicle They may seriously hurt themselves WARNING When closing the moonroof you should verify that it is free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the moonroof opening You can manually open or close the sliding shade when the moonroof is closed Pull the shade toward the front of the vehicle to close it The moonroof controls are on the overhead console The moonroof has a one touch open and close feature To stop its motion during one touch operation press the control a second time 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Windows and Mirrors 111 Opening and Closing the Moonroof 7 Press and release the SLIDE control to open the moonroof Pull and release the SLIDE control to close the moonroof Bounce Back The moonroof automatically stops closing and reverses if it detects an obstacle while closing Pull and hold the SLIDE control within two seconds of a bounce back event to override the function The closing force begins to increase each of the next three times the moonroof is closed with bounce back active Venting the Moonroo
406. ndex 567 M Pairing your phone for the first time 397 476 Making and receiving calls 4T Parental MyKey programming 70 MAP DVD Loading and I iadaan en 21 Unloading nasasa aieas 477 nine i Map ICONS 2 5 iere cheer tarte 518 ME INES dasdescnqengesuedt arts Map mode eere 516 see Motorcraft amp parts 366 Map preferences 514 Passenger Occupant Map updates sseeeeee 519 Classification Sensor 54 Media Bluetooth menu options adding connecting deleting turning on off oo eee 428 Message center sss 120 warning messages 123 130 MITFOTS scettr emeret 106 109 fold away sseeeseeee 106 programmable memory 66 side view mirrors power 106 Moon roof seeeeeee 110 Motorcraft parts 320 366 MyFord Touch system 442 MYI SGV eite e 70 N Navigation features 510 Navigation voice commands 520 Notifications ssssessss 490 O Octane rating 3 ees 191 P Pairing other phones 398 477 Pairing your phone 476 2015 Flex 471 Phone Bluetooth menu options adding connecting deleting turning on off s soieenenes 409 Phone redial 402 Phone settings 480 503 Phone voice commands 4
407. nditions improve The collision warning system is temporarily disabled Collision warning should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather conditions improve Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 244 Driving Aids System Limitations WARNING The collision warning system s brake support can only help reduce the speed at which a collision occurs if the driver applies the vehicle s brakes The brake pedal must be pressed just like any typical braking situation Due to the nature of radar technology there may be certain instances where vehicles do not provide a collision warning These include e Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving below 6 mph 10 km h e Pedestrians or objects in the roadway e Oncoming vehicles in the same lane e Severe weather conditions see blocked sensor section Debris build up on the grille near the headlamps see blocked sensor section e Small distance to vehicle ahead Steering wheel and pedal movements are large very active driving style e High interior temperatures which may deactivate the illumination or the warning lamps until the interior temperature reduces audible warning still sounds Certain conditions may reduce the visibility of the warning lamp therefore it is recommended to keep the audible warning on If the front end of the vehicle is hit or damaged the radar sensing zone may be altered causing missed or false collision warn
408. ne touch of a button The third row seat also includes obstacle detection that allows the seat to stop and reverse direction if it hits an obstacle so that the obstacle can be removed The third row power seat buttons are located behind the third row seats on the left hand quarter trim panel 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 168 Seats Note The power fold seats work only when the transmission is in park P and the tailgate is open If the ignition is off and the feature is still running the battery saver will turn it off after 10 minutes You can reactivate the power seats by pressing the unlock button on the remote entry key fob or by using the unlock procedure on the keyless entry keypad See SecuriCode keyless keypad in the Locks chapter Keep the key in the accessory or run position to prevent the feature from timing out A B C D d IE 2 Press the seat selection button D to select either right hand seat the left hand seat or both First select the seat you would like to adjust then select one of the following e Press the NORMAL button A to return the seat to the normal seating position Press the STOW button B to stow the seat into the tub floor Press the FOLD button C the top portion of the button to fold down the seat back Press the TAILGATE button C the bottom portion of the button to put the seat into the tailgate position Note Pressing a different but
409. ned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 256 Towing TOWING A TRAILER WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label WARNING Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of your vehicle and could result in engine damage transmission damage structural damage loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and personal injury Note For information on electrical items such as fuses or relays see the Fuses chapter The load capacity of your vehicle is designated by weight not volume You may not necessarily be able to use all available space when loading your vehicle or trailer Towing a trailer places extra load on the engine transmission axle brakes tires and suspension Inspect these components before during and after towing Load Placement To help minimize how trailer movement affects your vehicle when driving e Load the heaviest items closest to the trailer floor e Load the heaviest items centered between the left and right side trailer tires e Load the heaviest items abov
410. ned text message options TII call you back in a few minutes I just left Pll be there soon Can you give me a call I m running a few minutes late I m ahead of schedule so Tl be there early 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 480 MyFord Touch If Equipped Pre defined text message options I ll call you when I get there Receiving a Text Message When a new message arrives an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a pop up with the caller name and ID if supported by your phone You can press e View to view the text message e Listen for SYNC to read the message to you e Dial to call the contact e Ignore to exit the screen Note If you select View and your vehicle is traveling over 3 mph 5 km h the system offers to read the message to you instead of allowing you to view it while driving Phone Settings Press Phone gt Settings Bluetooth Devices Touch this tab to connect disconnect add or delete a device as well as save it as a favorite Bluetooth Touch this tab to turn Bluetooth off or on Do Not Disturb Touch this tab if you want all calls to go directly to your voice mail and not ring in the vehicle When this feature is on text message notifications do not ring inside the cabin either 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 481 911 Assist Turn on or turn off the 911 As
411. nformation Manage Phonebook Access features such as automatic phonebook download re download your phonebook add contacts from your phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook Roaming Warning Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 504 MyFord Touch If Equipped Wireless amp Internet Your system has a Wi Fi feature that creates a wireless network within your vehicle thereby allowing other devices such as personal computers or phones in your vehicle to speak to each other share files or play games Using this Wi Fi feature everyone in your vehicle can also gain access the internet if you have a USB mobile broadband connection inside your vehicle your phone supports personal area networking and if you park outside a wireless hotspot Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Wireless amp Internet 9 then select from the following Wi Fi Settings Wi Fi Network Client Mode turns the Wi Fi feature on and off in your vehicle Make sure you turn it on for connectivity purposes Choose a Wireless Network allows you to use a previously stored wireless network You can categorize by alphabetical listing priority and signal strength You can also choose to search for a network connect to a network disconnect from a network receive more information prioritize a network or delete a network Gateway Access Point Mode makes SY
412. nformation Terms and Conditions See your SYNC chapter for more information CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING Some constituents of engine exhaust certain vehicle components certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm PERCHLORATE MATERIAL Note Certain components in your vehicle such as airbag modules safety belt pretensioners and remote control batteries may contain perchlorate material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate for more information 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Introduction 15 FORD CREDIT U S ONLY Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you acquire your vehicle If you have financed or leased your vehicle through Ford Credit thank you for your business For your convenience we offer a number of ways to contact us as well as help manage your account Phone 1 800 727 7000 For more information regarding Ford Credit as well as access to Account Manager please go to www fordcredit com REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION Your vehicle has been built to the highest standards using quality parts We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever your vehicle requi
413. ng October 2014 USA fus 120 Information Displays GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information display controls on the steering wheel Corresponding information is displayed in the information display Information Display Controls Type 1 e Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu e Press the right arrow button to enter a sub menu e Press the left arrow button to exit a menu e Press the OK button to choose and confirm a setting messages Menu You can access the menus using the information display control Note Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items are optional iTrip 1 2 TSee Trip and fuel economy computer later in this section for more information 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Information Displays 121 TSee Trip and fuel
414. ng and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle WARNING Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already installed floor mats Floor mats should always rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other covering Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the pedal clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation WARNING Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning or replacement WARNING Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving Objects that are loose can become trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control WARNING Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or attachment instructions can potentially cause interference with pedal operation causing a loss of vehicle control t To install the floor mats position the floor mat eyelet over the retention post and press down to lock in position To remove the floor mat reverse the installation procedure 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 270 Roadside Emergencies ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Vehicles Sold in the United States Getting Roadside Assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary Roadside Assistance program This program is
415. ng off the climate control system prevents outside air from entering the vehicle E A C Press the button to turn air conditioning compressor on or off Use air conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Climate Control 143 F MAX A C Press the button to maximize cooling Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed G Recirculated air Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air When you select recirculated air the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior when used with A C and may reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle Note Recirculated air may turn off automatically or be prevented from turning on in all airflow modes except MAX A C to reduce risk of fogging H DUAL Press the button to allow the passenger to set their temperature independent of the driver temperature I Fan speed control Press or to increase or decrease the volume of air circulated in the vehicle J Driver temperature control Press or to increase or decrease the air temperature for the driver side of the vehicle This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when not in dual zone mode REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE
416. nglamps sees 101 Automatic high beam control llle 101 Erotit fog lamps zu owed EU EIC RR GRA EN PA hos 103 T rm signal Control 22 c ses Rr EUG Rem RR Re 103 Interior lamps cde Eee ERROR ERES WE DE Dee RUP qa 104 Windows and Mirrors 105 Power windows csse rs 105 EXCETO MITOS uod ph run Ves mee wwe Mh Irae Decade s do E 106 Interior mirrors areosa aaea hrs 109 OU VISORS PET 110 MOONTOOR oi 3 e Anat CEA wa doe RR eine E A 110 Instrument Cluster 112 Gauges so siu bea ete Fe Md bene Pope Gree ee oe ea es 112 Warning lamps and indicators n a aaaea 0c e eee 114 Audible warnings and indicators 0 0 0 00002 119 Information Displays 120 Controls ax aides nd REOR HR PRS RE ea aes He PP E 120 TRIP COMMIPULE 23e aickedux o URS EE Oe d RE an Ree RE 123 Information messages lille 130 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 4 Table of Contents Climate Control Manual heating and air conditioning Dual automatic temperature control 000 Auxiliary passenger climate control 0 0 0 0 00000 eee Rear window defroster llle Cabin air filter aie ss seca Ads ple Fi HRS RES OE EEG BER OS Remote Start i292 deer em poe due SHE wes Hee ed Se Seats Sitting in the correct position 0000000022 eee Head Testraints eoe ome wA eR EUR Ue ee Ud e a ManualeatS x tan daa kena wad
417. ning will turn on once again If you notice any of the following e the engine coolant temperature gauge moves fully into the red hot area e the coolant temperature warning light illuminates e the service engine soon indicator illuminates 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and place the vehicle in P Park 2 Leave the engine running until the coolant temperature gauge needle moves away from the H range After several minutes if this does not happen follow the remaining steps 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 302 Maintenance 3 Turn the engine off and wait for it to cool before checking the coolant level WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 4 If the coolant level is normal you may restart your engine and continue on 5 If the coolant is low add coolant restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer See Adding engine coolant in this chapter for more information Refer to fail safe cooling for additional information What You Should Know About Fail Safe Cooling If the engine coolant supply is depleted this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred The fail safe distance depends on ambient temperatures vehicle load and terrain How Fail Safe Cooling Works If the engine begins to overheat the engine coolant temperature gauge will
418. nly 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000000 ee 283 Reporting safety defects Canada only 00005 283 Fuses 284 Changing a MS sd rem x ER ees Rea ew EAS EXER 284 Fuse specification chart 0 0 00 ee eee 285 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Table of Contents Fi Maintenance 293 General informatlofv aa sess bbw aaepe dow eg R4 E Pd Hed EO 293 Opening and closing the hood 00 000 00002 294 Under hood OVervIew ous vex CR eb ke URS LER EROR RE 295 Engine oil dipstick cse p eR LEX VR ER ne RES 297 Engmeoleheck s a ecd hee nee eRe A RES eR EEE ET 297 Engine coolant check sas 2s s Shee eee ad et io ee E 298 Automatic transmission fluid check 00005 304 Brake fluid Cheek s aua rc Row e ar RR RR 308 Puel Bier usse RE RES due a Ree door xb bs 308 Washer fluid check o vea eanan qx EROR RI ROSE eG 309 Battery iesma has eO Ri mm ok Roa xA a Ale th SiS s 309 Checking the wiper blades 00 0000000000000 00 311 Changing the wiper blades 00000000002 eee eee 311 Air AETS cuire 2 EMA PRES Eb OG RIEN GUERRERO 312 Adjusting the headlamps lille 314 Changing bulbix s seb rare aee hee RSS S ade 315 Vehicle Care 320 Cleaning products iua eee ge Puer ere ace DUE E E AU d 320 Cleaning the exterio i344 daos vp REN ERES RE 320 WAXING iude Exod Ix GR X ER OPE Adag x Red eee os 322 Repairing minor paint damage llle
419. nnected Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately 30 minutes e Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving your vehicle Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the block heater cord plug when not in use Keep plug terminals clean and free of dirt and corrosion e Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before winter Using the Engine Block Heater Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry before use To clean them use a dry cloth The heater uses 0 4 to 1 0 kilowatt hours of energy per hour of use The system does not have a thermostat It achieves maximum temperature after approximately three hours of operation Using the heater longer than three hours does not improve system performance and unnecessarily uses electricity 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Fuel and Refueling 189 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING Do not overfill the fuel tank The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury WARNING Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled WARNING The flow of fuel through a
420. not be erased Resuming the Set Speed Press and release RES Switching Cruise Conirol Off Note The set speed is erased when you switch off cruise control Press the OFF control down and release or turn off the ignition USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL IF EQUIPPED WARNING Always pay close attention to changing road conditions especially when using adaptive cruise control Adaptive cruise control cannot replace attentive driving Failing to follow any of the warnings below or failing to pay attention to the road may result in a collision serious injury or death WARNING Adaptive cruise control is not a collision warning or avoidance system Additionally adaptive cruise control will not detect e stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph 10 km h e pedestrians or objects in the roadway e oncoming vehicles in the same lane 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Cruise Control 229 4 WARNING Do not use the adaptive cruise control when entering or leaving a highway in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved A WARNING Do not use in poor visibility specifically fog rain spray or snow Note It is your responsibility to stay alert drive safely and be in control of your vehicle at all times The system adjusts your speed to maintain a proper distance between you and the vehicle in front of you in the same lane You can select from one of four GAP settings
421. ns to manually search through the radio frequency band e n Sirius mode press these buttons to find the next or previous available satellite radio station E Power and Volume e Press this button to switch the system off and on e Turn it to adjust the volume HD RADIO INFORMATION IF AVAILABLE Note HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM FM radio Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts where available in addition to the analog broadcasts it already receives Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with free crystal clear audio and no static or distortion For more information and a guide to available stations and programming please visit www hdradio com When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology you may notice the HD Radio logo on your screen When this logo is available you may also see Title and Artist fields on screen The multicast indicator appears in FM mode only if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content is available HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts Other multicast stations HD2 through HD7 are only available digitally 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Pr
422. nteraction and more tone prompts 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 453 Confirmation Prompts The system uses these short questions to confirm your voice request If turned off the system simply makes a best guess as to what you requested The system may still occasionally ask you to confirm settings Phone Media Candidate Lists Candidate lists are lists of possible results from your voice commands The system creates these lists when it has the same confidence level of several options based on your voice command To access these settings using the touchscreen 1 Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Voice Control 2 Select from e Interaction Mode Confirmation Prompts Media Candidate Lists Phone Candidate Lists e e e e Voice Control Volume To access these settings using voice commands command Another tone sounds to let you know the system is listening Press the voice icon Wait for the prompt Please say a us Using Voice Commands with the Touchscreen Options Your voice system has a dual mode feature which allows you to switch between using voice commands and making on screen selections This is available only when the system displays a list of candidates generated during a voice session For example when entering in a street address or trying to call a contact from the phone you paired to the system 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guid
423. nterfere with the airflow to the rear seats Note Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield Note To improve the time to reach comfort in hot weather drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minutes after start up or until your vehicle airs out Manual Climate Control Note To reduce fogging of the windshield during humid weather adjust the air distribution control to the windshield air vents position Automatic Climate Control Note Adjusting the settings when your vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not necessary The system automatically adjusts to heat or cool the cabin to your selected temperature as quickly as possible For the system to function efficiently the instrument panel and side air vents should be fully open Note If you select AUTO during cold outside temperatures the system directs airflow to the windshield and side window vents In addition the fan may run at a slower speed until the engine warms up 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Climate Control 145 Note If you select AUTO during hot outside temperatures or when the inside of the vehicle is hot the system automatically uses recirculated air to maximize interior cooling When the interior reaches the selected temperature the system automatically switches to using outside air Heating the Interior Quickly Vehicles with manual climate Vehicles with au
424. o select Then scroll to select the desired track and press OK Explore all supported digital media on your media device connected to the USB port You can only view media content which is compatible with SYNC other files saved are not visible Press OK to select Then scroll to explore indexed media on your flash drive Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 428 SYNC Similar Music Play music similar to what is currently playing from the USB port The system uses the metadata information of each song to compile a playlist for you Press OK to select The system creates a new list of similar songs and begins playing The metadata tags must be populated for this feature to include each track Note With certain playing devices if your metadata tags are not populated the tracks won t be available in voice recognition play menu or similar music However if you place these tracks onto your playing device in Mass Storage Device Mode they are available in voice recognition play menu browsing and similar music Unknowns are placed into any unpopulated metadata tag Exit the current menu System Settings System settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu features The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add connect and delete a device as turn the Bluetooth feature on and off Your Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts languages defaults and perform a
425. ober 2014 USA fus 296 Maintenance 3 5L V6 EcoBoost Engine A Engine coolant reservoir B Brake fluid reservoir C Battery D Power distribution box E Air filter assembly F Automatic transmission fluid dipstick out of view G Engine oil dipstick H Engine oil filler cap I Windshield washer fluid reservoir 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Maintenance 297 Engine shield t Some vehicles may be equipped with an aero shield under the engine This shield needs to be removed for service including oil and filter changes It is secured with four quick release fasteners ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK 3 5L and 3 5L EcoBoost A MIN A B B MAX HEN MM ENGINE OIL CHECK Note Check the level before starting the engine Note Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks 1 Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground 2 Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan 3 Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean lint free cloth Replace the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level If the level is at the MIN mark add oil immediately 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 298 Maintenance Adding Engine Oil Note Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running Note Do not add engine oil further than the MAX mark Oil levels above the MAX mark
426. ock sensor and not other areas of the door handle After locking the doors with the lock sensor there is a brief delay before you can unlock your vehicle This delay lets you pull the door handle to make sure it locked Note Keep the door handle surface clean to avoid issues with operation At the Liftgate Press the button hidden near the license plate 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 76 Locks Smart Unlocks for Integrated Keyhead Transmitter This feature helps to prevent you from locking yourself out of your vehicle if your key is still in the ignition When you open one of the front doors and lock your vehicle with the power door lock control all the doors will lock then unlock if your key is still in the ignition You can still lock your vehicle with the key in the ignition To do this use the keyless entry keypad with the driver door closed or press the lock button on the transmitter even if the doors are not closed If both front doors are closed you can lock your vehicle by any method regardless of whether the key is in the ignition or not Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access Keys If Equipped This feature helps to prevent you from unintentionally locking your intelligent access key inside your vehicle s passenger compartment or rear cargo area When you lock your vehicle using the driver or passenger power door lock control with the door open transmission in
427. of a cold engine start up followed by mixed city or highway driving No additional vehicle service is required If the service engine soon indicator remains on have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD II may not have symptoms that are apparent continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in increased emissions lower fuel economy reduced engine and transmission smoothness and can lead to more costly repairs 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 198 Fuel and Refueling Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M Testing Some state provincial and local governments may have Inspection Maintenance I M programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not work the vehicle may need to be serviced See On board Diagnostics OBD II in this chapter Your vehicle may not pass the I M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly bulb is burned out or if the OBD II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked In this case the vehicle is considered not ready for I M testing If the vehicle s engine or transmission has just been serviced or the battery has recently run
428. ol again to turn them off Note With extended use the flashers may run down your 12 volt battery FUEL SHUTOFF WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision In the event of a moderate to severe collision this vehicle is equipped with a fuel pump shut off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the engine Not every impact will cause a shut off Should your vehicle shut off after a collision you may restart your vehicle by doing the following 1 Switch the ignition off and wait approximately 10 seconds 2 Switch the ignition on 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re enable the fuel pump Note When you try to restart your vehicle after a fuel shutoff the vehicle makes sure that various systems are safe to restart Once our vehicle determines that the systems are safe then the vehicle will allow you to restart Note In the event that your vehicle does not restart after your third attempt contact an authorized dealer 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Roadside Emergencies 273 JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE WARNING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames sparks or lit cigarettes An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage WARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid
429. old feature use the power folding mirror control to fold and unfold the mirrors You may hear a loud noise as you reset the power folding mirrors This sound is normal Repeat this process as needed each time the mirrors are manually folded Memory Mirrors If Equipped You can save and recall the mirror positions through the memory function See Memory function in the Seats chapter 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 108 Windows and Mirrors Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors If Equipped WARNING Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they appear Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex mirror built into the upper outboard corner of the exterior mirrors They are designed to assist you by increasing visibility along the side of your vehicle Check the main mirror first before a lane change then check the blind spot mirror If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance signal that you are going to change lanes Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear and carefully change lanes The image of the approaching vehicle is small and near the inboard edge of the main mirror when it is at a distance The image becomes larger and begins to move outboard across the main mirror as the vehicle approaches A The image will transition from the main mirror and begin to appear in the blind spot mirror as the vehi
430. ollowing address Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE B Dearborn MI 48126 You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b You are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal Magnuson Moss Warranty Act 15 U S C sec 2301 et seq If you choose to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b or the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act resorting to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Customer Assistance 279 THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU BBB AUTO LINE PROGRAM U S ONLY Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three step procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the Services You Need section you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration During mediation a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not want to participate in mediation and if your claim is eligible you may
431. ompany has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure Vehicle damage may occur if towed incorrectly or by any other means Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook up and towing procedures for your vehicle It is acceptable to have your front wheel drive vehicle towed from the front if using proper wheel lift equipment to raise the front wheels off the ground When towing in this manner the rear wheels can remain on the ground 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Towing 265 Front wheel drive vehicles must have the front wheels placed on a tow dolly when towing your vehicle from the rear using wheel lift equipment This prevents damage to the transmission Towing an all wheel drive vehicle requires that all wheels be off the ground such as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment This prevents damage to the transmission all wheel drive system and vehicle TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS Emergency Towing If your vehicle becomes inoperable without access to wheel dollies car hauling trailer or flatbed transport vehicle it can be flat towed all wheels on the ground regardless of the powertrain and transmission eet under the following conditions Your vehicle is facing forward for towing in a forward direction e Place the transmission in position N See Automatic trans
432. ompatible Applications capable phone is smartphone an Android with OS When I select not connected to 2 3 or higher or an iPhone 3GS Find New Apps SYNC or newer with iOS 5 0 or higher SYNC does not e Additionally ensure your find any phone is paired and connected applications to SYNC in order to find AppLink capable apps on your device iPhone users must also connect to SYNC s USB port with an Apple USB cable My phone is AppLink enabled e Ensure you have downloaded connected but I apps are not and installed the latest version still cannot find installed and of the app from your phone s any apps running on your app store Ensure the app is mobile device running on your phone e Some apps require you to register or login on the app on the phone before using them with AppLink Also some may have a Ford SYNC setting so check the app s settings menu on the phone 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 439 cause s My phone is Sometime apps e Closing and restarting apps connected my do not properly may help SYNC find the app s are close and re open application if you cannot running but I still their connection discover it inside the vehicle On cannot find any to SYNC over an Android device if apps have apps ignition cycles an Exit or Quit option select for example that then restart the app e If the app does not have that option you c
433. on at vehicle start Off without reminder provides a display reminder only without a voice reminder at phone connection To make sure that 911 Assist works properly e SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use e SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident A Bluetooth enabled and compatible phone has to be paired and connected to SYNC e A connected Bluetooth enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident e A connected Bluetooth enabled phone must have adequate network coverage battery power and signal strength e The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the United States Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 414 SYNC In the Event of a Crash Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut off which would activate 911 Assist however if 911 Assist is triggered SYNC tries to contact emergency services If a connected phone is damaged or loses connection to SYNC SYNC searches for and tries to connect to any available previously paired phone and tries to make the call to 911 Before making the call e SYNC provides a short window of time about 10 seconds to cancel the call Failure to cancel the call results in SYNC attempting to dial 911 e SYNC
434. onds every 25 seconds repeating 6 mph 9 7 km h and more for about 5 minutes or until you and than 1 2 minutes elapse after the front seat passenger buckle your you switch the ignition on safety belts Deactivating and Activating the Belt Minder Feature WARNING While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt Minder this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident We recommend you leave the Belt Minder system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle To reduce the risk of injury do not deactivate or activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle Note The driver and front passenger warnings switch on and off independently When you perform this procedure for one seating position do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process Note If you are using MyKey you cannot disable the Belt Minder Also if you have previously disabled the Belt Minder it will be re enabled during the use of MyKey See the MyKey chapter 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 46 Safety Belts Read Steps 1 5 thoroughly before proceeding with the programming procedure Before following the procedure make sure that The parking brake is set e The transmission is in park P e The ignition is off e The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled 1 Switch the ignition on Do not start t
435. ons can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1 800 392 3673 Note Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations modify procedures or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 280 Customer Assistance UTILIZING THE MEDIATION or ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA ONLY This pertains to vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation or arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The CAMVAP program is a straightforward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings In the CAMVAP program impartial third party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties make decisions and when appropriate render awards to resolve disputes CAMVAP decisions are fast fair and final as
436. oo Canada only CXC 66 A Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner Canada only CXC 101 Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada only CXC 100 Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid Canada only CXC 37 A B D or F Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant United States only ZC 32 B2 Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner ZC 56 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover United States only ZC 14 Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash e Never use strong household detergents or soap such as dish washing or laundry liquid These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces e Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to strong direct sunlight e Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Vehicle Care 321 e Immediately remove items such as gasoline diesel fuel bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle s paintwork and trim over time Use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover e Note Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage
437. operty laws and treaties The MS SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved e The MS SOFTWARE may interface with and or communicate with or may be later upgraded to interface with and or communicate with additional software and or systems provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY The additional software and systems of FORD MOTOR COMPANY origin as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation FORD SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved e The MS SOFTWARE and or FORD SOFTWARE may interface with and or communicate with or may be later upgraded to interface with and or communicate with additional software and or systems provided by third party software and service suppliers The additional software and services of third party origin as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation THRID PARTY SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties The THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved e The MS SOFTWARE FORD SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively and individually will be referred to as SOFTWARE IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO US
438. or Mirrors 4 WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while your vehicle is in motion A Left mirror B Off C Right mirror To adjust your mirrors 1 Select the mirror you want to adjust 2 Move the control in the direction you want to tilt the mirror 3 Return the control to the center position to lock mirrors in place Foldaway Exterior Mirrors Push the mirror toward the door window glass Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Windows and Mirrors 107 Power Folding Mirrors If Equipped Note Using the mirrors 10 or more times within one minute or repeated folding and unfolding of the mirrors while holding the control down during full travel may disable the system to protect motors from overheating Wait approximately three minutes with your vehicle running and up to 10 minutes with your vehicle off for the system to reset and for function to return to normal Pull the control back to fold the L R a mirrors Omm Loose Mirror If your power folding mirrors are manually folded they may not work properly even after you reposition them You need to reset them if e The mirrors vibrate when you drive e The mirrors feel loose e The mirrors do not stay in the folded or unfolded position e One of the mirrors is not in its normal driving position To reset the power f
439. or turbo charger All wheel drive module Positive crackcase ventilation heater 7 Not used O E E INS 3 73 Not used O o u Noud 5 5 5 75 Noted O 76 Noted PT Trailer tow park lamps relay 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Fuses 289 number rating headlamps Noted O 8 jNtued O 83 Not used O S5 Mosd EE Powertrain control module keep alive power Powertrain control module relay Canister a o non EcoBoost a 3 Resa 88 J Runstar relay 89 10A Antilock brake system module KU A sae run start steering module Battery charge relays I9 aot Bod control module run start_ BAR Front passenger window switch Netued 0 A C clutch relay Mini Fuses Cartridge Fuses 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 290 Fuses Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel The fuse panel is located under the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel You may need to remove a trim panel to access it N S e Joo e m 5 e Cz C3 C9 Cx Cx CD C39 C38j Gp a a dE U88888B8BB The fuses are coded as follows Fuse or relay Fuse amp Protected components mmber rating 1 30 Driver side front
440. ore See Phone settings later in this section 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 479 Text Messaging Note Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are phone dependent features Note Certain features in text messaging are speed dependent and not available when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3 mph 5 km h Note SYNC does not download read text messages from your phone You can send and receive text messages using Bluetooth read them aloud and translate text messaging acronyms such as LOL 1 Touch the top left corner of the display to access the Phone menu 2 Select Messaging 3 Choose from the following e Listen speaker icon Dial Send Text View Delete Composing a Text Message Note This is a speed dependent feature It is unavailable when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3 mph 5 km h Note Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are phone dependent features 1 Touch the top left corner of the display to access the Phone menu 2 Touch Messaging gt Send Text 3 Enter a phone number or choose from your phone book 4 You can select from the following options e Send which sends the message as it is e Edit Text allows you to customize the pre defined message or create a message on your own You can then preview the message verify the recipient as well as update the message list Pre defi
441. ors for child seat installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol e Second row bucket seats and third row passenger side 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Child Safety 27 e Second row bench seats and third row passenger side The LATCH anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seat back below the symbols as shown Follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps See Using Tether Straps later in this chapter Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown Using Inboard Lower Anchors From the Outboard Seating Positions Center Seating Use A N WARNING The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 inches 280 millimeters center to center Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced 20 5 inches 520 millimeters apart The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 inches 280 millimeters center to center A child seat with rigid LATCH attachment
442. ot tried to use activated OR Traffic Directions e Your phone has and Information ID blocker active e This could be due to your phone s compatibility OR I am unable to submit a report e This is a free feature but you must first register online to use it e Turn off ID blocker on your phone as the system recognizes you by your phone number e Make sure the currently connected phone is the same one that is registered on your SyncMyRide account 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 436 SYNC cause s SYNC does not e You may be e Review the Phone voice understand what using the wrong commands and the Media voice I am saying voice commands commands at the beginning of OR their respective sections e You may be e Be aware that the microphone speaking too soon for SYNC is either in your rear or at the wrong view mirror or in the headliner time just above the windshield SYNC does not e You may be e Review the media voice understand the using the wrong commands at the beginning of name of a song or voice commands the media section artist OR e Say the song or artist exactly e You may not be Jas listed If you say Play Artist saying the name Prince the system does not exactly as it is play music by Prince and the saved OR Revolution or Prince and the e The system New Power Generation may not be e Make sure you are saying the reading the name complete title such
443. ote A valid key must be located inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on and start the engine Note When locking your vehicle any remote controls left inside the vehicle may become disabled A message may appear in the information display indicating that there is no key detected if you try to start the engine Press the unlock button on the remote control to enable it and then start the engine 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Starting and Stopping the Engine 183 Ignition Modes Off Turns the ignition off e Without applying the brake pedal press and release the button once when the ignition is in the on mode or when the engine is running but the vehicle is not in motion Accessory Allows some electrical accessories to operate while the engine is not running e Without applying the brake pedal press and release the button twice On All electrical circuits are operational Warning lamps and indicators are illuminated e Without applying the brake pedal press and release the button once from accessory mode e Without applying the brake pedal press and release the button twice from off mode Start Starts the engine e Press the brake pedal and then press the button for any length of time An indicator light on the button illuminates when then ignition is on and when the engine starts STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE When you start the engine the idle speed increases t
444. otor Company 2014 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 10 Introduction ABOUT THIS MANUAL Thank you for choosing Ford We recommend that you take some time to get to know your vehicle by reading this manual The more that you know about it the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from driving it WARNING Always drive with due care and attention when using and operating the controls and features on your vehicle Note This manual describes product features and options available throughout the range of available models sometimes even before they are generally available It may describe options not fitted to your vehicle Note Some of the illustrations in this manual may show features as used in different models so may appear different to you on your vehicle Note Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and regulations Note Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle It is an integral part of the vehicle This manual may qualify the location of a component as left hand side or right hand side The side is determined when facing forward in the seat A A Right hand side B Left hand side Protecting the Environment You must play your part in protecting the environment Correct EJ vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf
445. ouch the heated steering wheel icon to warm the steering wheel If your vehicle is equipped with a wood trimmed steering wheel it does not heat between the 10 o clock and 2 o clock positions Climate Control Voice Commands EB The following voice commands are available at the main menu i level of a voice session For example press the voice button and after the prompt Say a command say any of the following commands There are additional climate control commands but in order to access them you have to say Climate first then when the system is ready to listen you may say any of the following commands Panel on Rear defrost off Rear defrost on Defrost off Recirc off Defrost on Recirc on Dual off Temperature 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 510 MyFord Touch If Equipped Fan decrease Temperature lt 15 5 29 5 gt degrees mi 11 Panefloron PO If you have said Temperature you can say any of the commands in the following Temperature chart TEMPERATURE lt 15 5 29 5 gt degrees lt 60 85 gt degrees Help NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Note The navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot to operate the navigation system If you need a replacement SD card see your authorized dealer Note The SD card slot is spring loaded To remove
446. ound LED should be on IN 3 Press and release the program button The larger purple LED will flash Note The next two steps must be completed in 30 seconds 4 Press and release the Genie Intellicode 2 hand held transmitter s previously programmed button Both indicator lights on the garage door opener motor unit should now flash purple 5 Press and hold the previously programmed button on the sun visor for two seconds Repeat this step up to 3 times until the garage door moves Programming is now complete Clearing a HomeLink device To erase programming from the three HomeLink buttons press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash The LED will begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds at which time both buttons should be released Programming has now been erased and the LED should blink slowly to indicate the device is in train mode when any one of the three HomeLink buttons is pressed FCC and RSS 210 Industry Canada Compliance This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance can void the user s authority to operate the equipment
447. ound on these labels then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle transfer case or power transfer unit failure If you have questions regarding tire replacement contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Wheels and Tires 345 WARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury when mounting replacement tires and wheels you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated re lubricate and try again When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire 1 Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size 2 Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again 3 Stand at a minimum of 12 feet 3 66 meters away from the tire wheel assembly 4 Use both eye and ear protection For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi 1 38
448. our vehicle are not working a fuse may have blown Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse 15 Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color COLOR Fuse Mini Standard Maxi ipo Fuse link maxi ns rating fuses fuses fuses fee cartridge Loup pup D ae eee Vide Volt Pink Pink Tn Tn Se a C lt e ee a a a 2 3 4 5 A A A A T Red Red 15A 25A Natural Natural Natural Natural 40A Orange Green Green 50 Red Red Red 60 Bue Yelow Yelow 70A Tn Brom soa Natural Black Black N gt S 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Fuses 285 FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART Power Distribution Box WARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses WARNING To reduce risk of electrical shock always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment It has high current fuses that protect your vehicle s main electrical systems from overloads If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected se
449. our voice command Portable Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth enabled cellular phone number not your VIN Vehicle Identification Number You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle equipped with SYNC Services and continue enjoying your personalized services You can even access your account outside the vehicle Just use the number on your phone s call history Traffic and Directions features do not function properly but information services and the 411 connect and text message features are available 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 420 SYNC USING SYNC WITH YOUR MEDIA PLAYER You can access and play music from your digital music player over the vehicle s speaker system using the system s media menu or voice commands You can also sort and play your music by specific categories such as artists or albums Note The system is capable of indexing up to 6 000 songs SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including iPod Zune Plays from device players and most USB drives SYNC also supports audio formats such as MP3 WMA WAV and ACC Connecting Your Digital Media Player via the USB Port Note If your digital media player has a power switch ensure that the device is turned on To connect using voice commands 1 Plug the device into the vehicle s USB port 2 Press the voice icon and when prompted say USB 3 You
450. oute Auto Fill State Province allows you have the system automatically fill in the state and province based on the information already entered into the system Turn this feature ON or OFF Traffic Preferences Avoid Traffic Problems allows you to choose how you want the system to handle traffic problems along your route e Automatic Have the system reroute you to avoid traffic incidents that develop and impact the current route The system does not provide a traffic alert notification e Manual Have the system always provide a traffic alert notification for traffic incidents along the planned route You have a choice to accept or ignore the notification before making the route deviation Traffic Alert Notification allows you to choose have the system display traffic alert notifications Other traffic alert features allows you to turn on certain or all traffic icons on the map such as road work incident accidents and closed roads Scroll down to view all the different types of alerts Turn these features ON or OFF 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 516 MyFord Touch If Equipped Avoid Areas Avoid Areas allows you to choose areas which you want the system to avoid when calculating a route for you Press Add to program an entry Once you make a selection the system tries to avoid the area s if possible for all routes To delete a selection choose the listing on the screen When
451. overflowing Note Wait at least 10 seconds before removing the fuel pump nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build up when filling an ungrounded fuel container Place approved fuel container on the ground DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle Gncluding the cargo area Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 194 Fuel and Refueling Easy Fuel No Cap Fuel System WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury When fueling your vehicle 1 Turn the engine off 2 Open the fuel filler door 3 Insert the fuel plug key if equipped into the locking plug and turn it counterclockwise to unlock it 4 Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system and leave the nozzle fully inserted until you are done pumping 5 After you are done pumping fuel slowly remove the fuel filler nozzle allow about ten seconds after pumping fuel before removing the fuel filler nozzle This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehi
452. pant conditions A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the restraints control module During a crash the restraints control module may activate the safety belt pretensioners and or either one or both stages of the dual stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 50 Supplementary Restraints System PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION WARNING Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently and the risk of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim covering the airbag module WARNING All occupants of your vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided Failure to properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints WARNING Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all
453. ped with seat mounted airbags do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a collision For fabric carpets cloth seats safety belts and seats equipped with side airbags e Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner e Apply a layer of high quality foam cleaner designed for automotive interiors such as Motorcraft Carpet and Upholstery Cleaner to the dry stained area s of the item you are cleaning and let it soak in for one minute If grease or tar is present on the material spot clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately but do not oversaturate or the ring can set e Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LENS WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system Note Follow the same procedure as cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather instrument panels and leather interior trim surfaces See Cleaning Leather Seats in this chapter Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clea
454. pen keep the vents or windows open so outside air comes into your vehicle Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury Note Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate Note Do not hang anything bike rack etc from the spoiler glass or liftgate This could damage the liftgate and its components Note Do not leave the liftgate open while driving This could damage the liftgate and its components The liftgate area is only intended for cargo not passengers To open the liftgate Press the D button located in the top of the eS UN liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the liftgate then pull on the outside 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 80 Locks Power Liftgate If Equipped WARNING Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate area before using the power liftgate control WARNING Keep keys out of the reach of children Do not allow children to operate the power liftgate or to play near to an open or moving power liftgate Note Cycling the ignition while the liftgate is power closing and is near the latch may cause the liftgate to reverse to full open position Make sure you close the liftgate before operating or moving the vehicle especially in an enclosure like a garage or a parking structure You could damage the liftgate or its components Note Do not drive with the lif
455. phones If 911 Assist is turned off a voice message plays and or a display message icon comes on when the vehicle is started after a previously paired phone connects 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 413 Note Every phone operates differently While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones some may have trouble using this feature If a crash deploys an airbag excludes knee airbags and rear inflatable safety belts if equipped or activates the fuel pump shut off your SYNC equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth enabled phone For more information about 911 Assist visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca e For information on airbag deployment see the Supplementary Restraints System chapter e For information on the fuel pump shut off see the Roadside Emergencies chapter Setting 911 Assist On Perform the following Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu Scroll until 911 Assist is selected Press OK to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu Scroll to select between On and Off selections Press OK when the desired option appears in the radio display Set On or Set Off appears in the display as confirmation SP co Dou Off selections include Off with reminder and Off without reminder Off with reminder provides a display and voice reminder at phone connecti
456. plete the relearning process e The vehicle may need to be driven to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy e Note If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed the transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy As a result of this the transmission may shift firmly This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner Follow your local authorized standards for disposal Call your local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Maintenance 311 CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade to check for roughness Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water applied with a soft sponge or cloth CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES 1 Pull the wiper arm away from the vehicle Turn the blade at an angle from the wiper arm Press the
457. position is straight the active guidelines are not shown Always use caution while reversing Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle Enhanced Park Aids Note Enhanced park aids is only available when the transmission is in R Reverse Note The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects The enhanced park aids allows the driver to view the area that is being detected by the reverse sensing system The system uses red yellow and green highlights which appear on top of the video image when an object is detected by the reverse sensing system The alert highlights the closest object detected The reverse sensing alert can be disabled and if enhanced park aids is enabled highlighted areas are still displayed Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 226 Parking Aids Manual Zoom WARNING When manual zoom is on the full area behind the vehicle is not shown Be aware of your surroundings when using the manual zoom feature Note Manual zoom is only available when the transmission is in R Reverse
458. press the power button Vehicle Health Report Turn Automatic Reminders on and off and set the mileage interval at which you would like to receive the reports Press for more information on these selections When done making your selections press Run Vehicle Health Report Now if you want your report Door Keypad Code To change the keypad code for your keyless entry keypad system 1 Press the Settings icon gt Vehicle gt Door Keypad Code 2 Enter your current factory code then when prompted enter your new code 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 498 MyFord Touch If Equipped Camera Settings This menu allows you to access settings for your rear view camera Press the Settings icon gt Vehicle gt Camera Settings then select from the following settings e Enhanced Park Aids e Rear Camera Delay Enable Valet Mode Valet mode allows you to lock the system No information is accessible until the system is unlocked with the correct PIN 1 Press the Settings icon gt Vehicle gt Enable Valet Mode 2 Enter a four digit pin twice as prompted After you press Continue the system locks until you enter the PIN again Note If the system locks and you need to reset the PIN enter 3681 and the system unlocks Settings Access and adjust system settings voice features as well as phone navigation and wireless settings System Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Sys
459. previous settings The rear defroster heated mirrors and heated seats do not automatically turn on In cold weather the system is set to 72 F 22 C The heated seats are set to high if available and selected to AUTO in the information display The rear defroster and heated mirrors automatically turn on 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Seats 149 SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION WARNING Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seat back with your feet on the floor WARNING Do not recline the seat back as this can cause the occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injury in the event of a crash WARNING Do not place objects higher than the seat backs to reduce the risk of injury in a crash or during heavy braking or when stopping suddenly Max 30 When you use them properly the seat head restraint safety belt and airbags will provide optimum protection in the event of a crash We recommend that you follow these guidelines e Do not recline the seat back more than 30 degrees from vertical e Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as possible Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level w
460. pter for more information Access Bluetooth Device menu listings add connect set as primary on off delete as well as Advanced menu listings prompts languages defaults master reset install application and system information Note See System Settings for more information Exit Media Menu Press OK to exit the media menu 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 426 SYNC Accessing Your Play Menu This menu allows you to select and play your media by artist album genre playlist track similar music or even to explore what is on your USB device 1 Make sure that your device is plugged into the USB port and is turned on 2 Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu 3 Scroll to select the Play Menu and press OK If there are no media files to access the display indicates there is no media If there are media files you have the following options to scroll through and select from When you select Play All Play all indexed media tracks from your playing device in flat file mode one at a time in numerical order Press OK to select The first track title appears in the display Artists Sort all indexed media by artist Once selected the system lists and then play all artists and tracks alphabetically If there are less than 255 indexed artist they are listed alphabetically in flat file mode If there are more they are categorized in alphabetical categor
461. r abnormal noise wear looseness or drag Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles 16000 kilometers between service intervals Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change See the nstrument Cluster chapter 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Scheduled Maintenance 553 Other maintenance items Every 20000 miles Replace cabin air filter if equipped 32000 km Every 30000 miles Replace climate controlled heated and 48000 km cooled seat filter if equipped Replace engine air filter At 100000 miles Change engine coolant 160000 km Every 100000 miles Replace spark plugs 160000 km Inspect accessory drive belt s Every 150000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid 240000 km Replace accessory drive belt s if not replaced within the last 100000 miles 160000 km IThese maintenance items can be performed within 3000 miles 4800 kilometers of the last oil change Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles 160000 kilometers then every three years or 50000 miles 80000 kilometers After initial inspection inspect every other oil change until replaced 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 554 Scheduled Maintenance Maintenance Schedule Log Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION
462. r to provide the services you request and for continuous improvement the service may collect and record call details and voice communications For more information see SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www SYNCMyRide com If you do not want Ford or its service providers to collect the vehicle travel information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions do not activate or use the service SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors integrated GPS technology and comprehensive map and traffic data to give you personalized traffic reports precise turn by turn directions business search news sports weather and more For a complete list of services or to learn more please visit www SYNCMyRide com 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 418 SYNC Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands 1 Press the voice button 2 When prompted say Services This initiates an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth enabled cellular phone 3 Once you are connected to the service follow the voice prompts to request the desired service such as Traffic or Directions You can also say What are my choices to receive a complete list of available services from which to choose 4 Say Services to return to the services main menu or for help say Help Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Phone Menu Press the phone
463. r 2014 USA fus Maintenance 301 Engine fluid temperature management EcoBoost engine only WARNING To reduce the risk of collision and injury be prepared that the vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle may not be able to accelerate with full power until the fluid temperatures reduce Your vehicle has been designed to pull a trailer but because of the added load the vehicle s engine may temporarily reach higher temperatures during severe operating conditions such as ascending a long or steep grade while pulling a trailer in hot ambient temperatures At this time you may notice your engine coolant temperature gauge needle move toward the H hot and the POWER REDUCED TO LOWER TEMP message may appear on the message center You may notice a reduction in the vehicle s speed caused by reduced engine power Your vehicle has been designed to enter this mode if certain high temperature high load conditions take place in order to manage the engine s fluid temperatures The amount of speed reduction will depend on the vehicle loading towing grade ambient temperature and other factors If this occurs there is no need to pull off the road The vehicle can continue to be driven while this message is active The air conditioning may also cycle on and off during severe operating conditions to protect overheating of the engine When the engine coolant temperature decreases to a more normal operating temperature the air conditio
464. r affiliates and or their designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without liability any Internet based services provided to you or made available to you through the use of the SOFTWARE e Links to Third Party Sites The MS SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to link to third party sites through the use of the SOFTWARE The third party sites are not under the control of MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent Neither MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates nor their designated agent are responsible for i the contents of any third party sites any links contained in third party sites or any changes or updates to third party sites or ii webcasting or any other form of transmission received from any third party sites If the SOFTWARE provides links to third party sites those links are provided to you only as a convenience and the inclusion of any link does not imply an endorsement of the third party site by MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent e Obligation to Drive Responsibly You recognize your obligation to drive responsibly and keep attention on the road You will read and abide with the DEVICE operating instructions particularly as they pertain to safety and assumes any risk associated with the use of the DEVICE UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICE on media such as a ROM ch
465. r are present the admin transmitter will be recognized to start the vehicle Non configurable Settings The following settings cannot be changed by an admin key user e Belt Minder You cannot disable this feature The audio system will mute when the front seat occupants safety belts are not fastened e Early low fuel warning The low fuel warning is activated earlier giving the MyKey user more time to refuel e Driver assist features if equipped on your vehicle are forced on parking aid blind spot information system BLIS with cross traffic alert lane departure warning and forward collision warning system e Satellite radio adult content restrictions Configurable Settings With an admin key you can configure certain MyKey settings when you first create a MyKey and before you recycle the key or restart the engine You can also change the settings afterward with an admin key e A vehicle speed limit can be set Warnings will be shown in the display followed by an audible tone when your vehicle reaches the set speed You cannot override the set speed by fully depressing the accelerator pedal or by setting cruise control 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyKey 71 e Vehicle speed minders of 45 55 or 65 mph 75 90 or 105 km h Once you select a speed it will be shown in the display followed by an audible tone when the preselected vehicle speed is exceeded e Audio system maximum vo
466. r as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed You should use a permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels on your homemade CDs Ballpoint pens may damage CDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information Note Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch protection film attached Always handle discs by their edges only Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner only Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge Do not clean in a circular motion Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Audio System 375 MP3 Track and Folder Structure Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 individual tracks and folder structures work as follows e There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback MP3 track mode system default and MP3 folder mode e MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc The player numbers each MP3 track on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension from T001 to a maximum of T255 Note The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present e MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension and all folders containing MP3 files from F001
467. r at least 10 minutes After the engine has been restarted and the AWD system has adequately cooled the AWD Off message will turn off and normal AWD function will return In the event the engine is not stopped the AWD Off message will turn off when the system cools and normal AWD function returns Do not use a spare tire of a different size other than the tire provided If the mini spare tire is installed the AWD system may disable automatically and enter front wheel drive only mode to protect driveline components This condition may be indicated by an AWD Off message in the information display If there is an AWD Off message in the message center from using the spare tire this indicator should turn off after reinstalling the repaired or replaced normal road tire and cycling the ignition off and on It is recommended to reinstall the repaired or replaced road tire as soon as possible Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default to front wheel drive or damage the AWD system 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus All Wheel Drive If Equipped 205 Driving In Special Conditions With All Wheel Drive AWD AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on sand snow mud and rough roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles both on and off the highway When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
468. r garage doors the system transmitter can be programmed to operate entry gate operators security systems entry door locks and home or office lighting Additional system information can be found online at www homelink com or by calling the toll free help line on 1 800 355 3515 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Universal Garage Door Opener If Equipped 171 Programming Note Put a new battery in the hand held transmitter This will ensure quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal 1 With your vehicle parked outside of the garage and your key in the ignition turn the key so that the ignition is in the on position 2 Hold your hand held garage door transmitter 1 3 inches 2 8 centimeters away from the HomeLink button you want to program 3 Using both hands simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button DO NOT release either one until the HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly When the indicator light flashes rapidly both buttons may be released The rapid flashing indicates successful training 4 Press and hold the HomeLink button you programmed for five seconds then release You may need to do this twice to activate the door If your garage door does not operate watch the HomeLink indicator light If the indicator light stays on the programming is complete Press and rele
469. r phone and SMS charges may apply when making a report Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at www SYNCMyRide com After registering you can request a Vehicle Health Report inside your vehicle Return to your account at www SYNCMyRide com to view your report You can also choose for SYNC to remind you automatically to run reports at specific mileage intervals Cellular phone airtime usage may apply when reporting The system allows you to check your vehicle s overall health in the form of a diagnostic report card The Vehicle Health Report contains valuable information such as e Vehicle Diagnostic Information e Scheduled maintenance e Open Recalls and Field Service Actions e Items noted during vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer that still need servicing Making a Report e If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation touch the i 2 Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab If you want to run a report by using the touchscreen touch Apps gt Vehicle Health Report EE To run a report by voice command press the voice button on i amp the steering wheel and when prompted say Vehicle health report Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice When you create a Vehicle Health Report Ford Motor Company may collect your cellular phone number to process your report request and d
470. r should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained When installing a child safety seat with combination lap and shoulder belts e Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position e Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Child Safety 21 Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat with the tongue between the child seat and the release button to prevent accidental unbuckling Place the vehicle seat upon which the child seat will be installed in the upright position For second row seating positions the recliner may be adjusted slightly to improve child seat fit If needed the head restraints may be removed For third row seating positions the head restraints may be stowed to improve child seat fit See the Seats chapter for information on folding the head restraints Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode See Step 5 below This vehicle
471. r the zoom buttons appears when a route is active and displays the distance and time to your destination If the button is pressed a pop up appears with the destination listed and waypoint if applicable along with mileage and time to destination You may also select to have either the estimated time to reach your destination or your estimated arrival time 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 518 MyFord Touch If Equipped Map Icons Vehicle mark shows the current location of your vehicle It A stays in the center of the map display except when in scroll mode the center of the screen The map position closest to the cursor Scroll cursor allows you to scroll the map the fixed icon is in is in a window on the top center part of the screen X Address book entry default icon s indicates the location on Tx the map of an address book entry This is the default symbol shown after the entry has been stored to the Address Book by any method other than the map You can select from any of the 22 icons available You can use each icon more than once Home indicates the location on the map currently stored as the 4 home position You can only save one address from the Address Book as your Home entry You cannot change this icon POI Point Of Interest icons indicate locations of any point of interest categories you choose to display on the map You can choose to display three point of intere
472. r this damage Heated Exterior Mirror If Equipped Note Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors Note Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products Both mirrors are heated to remove ice mist and fog when the rear window defroster is activated CABIN AIR FILTER Note Make sure you have a cabin air filter installed at all times This prevents foreign objects from entering the system Running the system without a filter in place could result in degradation or damage to the system Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter which is located just in front of the windshield under the cowl grille on the passenger side of your vehicle The particulate air filtration system reduces the concentration of airborne particles such as dust spores and pollen in the air supplied to the interior of your vehicle The particulate filtration system gives the following benefits to customers e mproves the customer s driving comfort by reducing particle concentration e mproves the interior compartment cleanliness e Protects the climate control components from particle deposits 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 148 Climate Control For more information regarding the interval at which yo
473. r tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer Front wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension may require alignment of all four wheels The tires should also be balanced periodically An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Wheels and Tires 347 Tire Rotation Note If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as a spare tire or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements Rotating your tires at the recommended interval as indicated in your scheduled maintenance information will help your tires wear more evenly providing better tire performance and longer tire life e Front wheel drive All wheel E E BJ drive vehicles front tires at left of diagram o EUN ep Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires
474. rack Drive cautiously when using a full size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly and seek service as soon as possible Tire Change Procedure WARNING When one of the front wheels is off the ground the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack even if the transmission is in park P WARNING To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure to place the transmission in park P set the parking brake and block Gn both directions the wheel that is diagonally opposite other side and end of the vehicle to the tire being changed WARNING Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack If the vehicle slips off the jack you or someone else could be seriously injured WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 356 Wheels and Tires AN WARNING Always use the jack provided as original equipment with your vehicle If using a jack other than the one provided as original equipment with your vehicle make sure the jack capacity is adequate for the vehicle weight including any vehicle cargo or modifications Note Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 1 Park on a level surfa
475. rake system malfunction Have the system checked immediately by your authorized dealer WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer as soon as possible Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury Charging system RTT Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly If it stays E on while the engine is running there may be a malfunction with the charging system Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related component Door ajar RTT Displays when the ignition is on and any door is not completely closed 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 116 Instrument Cluster Engine oil pressure RTT 2 Illuminates when the oil pressure falls below the normal range Engine coolant temperature RTT Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high Stop the vehicle as soon as possible switch off the engine and let cool Fog lamps if equipped Illuminates when the fog lamps are turned on Grade assist and overdrive cancel if equipped RTT Illuminates when grade assist is turned on 28 Heads up display if equipped A red beam of lights will illumin
476. ransmission fluid may cause internal transmission component damage DESS If necessary add fluid in 1 2 pint 250 ml increments through the filler tube until the level is correct DESS If an overfill occurs excess fluid should be removed by an authorized 4 4 dealer Note An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components For vehicles equipped with the EcoBoost engine reinstall the air filter assembly After the fluid level has been checked and adjusted as necessary do the following 1 Shut the engine off 2 Loosen the clamp holding the air filter assembly to the rubber hose 3 Rotate the air filter assembly 90 degrees clockwise without disconnecting the sensor 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 308 Maintenance 4 Seat the air filter assembly back into the grommets by pushing down on the air filter assembly 5 Tighten the clamp 6 Install and tighten two bolts that attach air filter assembly to the front of the vehicle 7 Install the bolt cover if equipped 8 Reinstall the harness retaining clip into the front of the air filter assembly BRAKE FLUID CHECK Fluid levels between the MIN an
477. rd party software and service suppliers their affiliates and or their designated agent may automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and or its components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded to your DEVICE e Additional Software Services The SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and service suppliers MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates supplements add on components or Internet based services components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the SOFTWARE Supplemental Components If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental Components then the terms of this EULA shall apply If MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent make available Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Appendices 531 provided then the terms of this EULA shall apply except that the MS Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the Supplemental Component s shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component s FORD MOTOR COMPANY MS Microsoft Corporation thei
478. reak the seal of the package launch or otherwise use the Telenav Software These terms and conditions represent the agreement Agreement between you and Telenav Inc Telenav with respect to the Telenav Software including upgrades modifications or additions thereto collectively Telenav Software All references herein to you and your means you your employees agents and contractors and any other entity on whose behalf you accept these terms and conditions all of whom shall also be bound by this Agreement Additionally all of your account information as well as other payment and personal information provided by you to Telenav directly or through the use of the Telenav Software is subject to Telenav s privacy policy located at http www telenav com Telenav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time with or without notice to you You agree to visit http www telenav com from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement and of the privacy policy 1 Safe and Lawful Use You acknowledge that devoting attention to the Telenav Software may pose a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that otherwise require your undivided attention and you therefore agree to comply with the following when using the Telenav Software a observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely b use your own personal judgment while driving If you feel that a route suggested
479. reas that you would like to avoid on planned navigation routes Have the system display weather warnings Have the system display where there may be reduced visibility 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 503 Phone Seitings Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Phone then select from Thy the following Bluetooth Devices Connect disconnect add or delete a device as well as save it as a favorite Bluetooth Turn Bluetooth on and off Do Not Disturb Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring inside your vehicle With this feature turned on text message notifications are also suppressed and do not ring inside your vehicle 911 Assist Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature See 911 Assist in the SYNC applications and services section Phone Ringer Select the type of notification for phone calls ring tone beep text to speech or have it be silent Text Message Select the type of notification for text Notification messages alert tone beep text to speech or have it be silent Internet Data If compatible with your phone you can adjust Connection your internet data connection Select to make your connection profile with the personal area network or to turn off your connection You can also choose to adjust your settings or have the system always connect never connect when roaming or query on connect Press for more i
480. remote start your vehicle with an integrated keyhead transmitter you must switch the ignition on before driving your vehicle If you remote start your vehicle with an intelligent access transmitter you must have a programmed intelligent access key inside your vehicle and press the START STOP button on the instrument panel once while applying the brake pedal before driving your vehicle The power windows will not work during the remote start and the radio will not turn on automatically The parking lamps will remain on and your vehicle will run for 5 10 or 15 minutes depending on the setting See the Information Displays chapter to select the duration of the remote start system 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Keys and Remote Control 69 Extending the Vehicle Run Time Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with your vehicle still running to extend the run time for another remote start duration If the duration is set to last 10 minutes the duration will extend by another 10 minutes beginning after what is left of the first activation time For example if your vehicle had been running from the first remote start for five minutes your vehicle will continue to run now for 15 additonal minutes Wait at least five seconds before remote starting after a vehicle shutdown Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote Starting Press the button once The parking lamps will turn off You may have to be closer to your ve
481. required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or 80 pounds 36 kilograms Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of children in your vehicle When possible always properly restrain children twelve 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position See Front Passenger Sensing System in the Supplementary Restraints System chapter for more information 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 20 Child Safety INSTALLING CHILD SEATS Child Seats Use a child safety seat sometimes called an infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat for infants toddlers or children weighing 40 pounds 18 kilograms or less generally age four or younger Using Lap and Shoulder Belts WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat Children 12 and unde
482. res are not available while your vehicle is moving Note Your system is equipped with a feature that allows you to access and control audio features for 30 minutes after you switch the ignition off and no doors open PHONE Press to select any of the following Making Calls Quick Dial Phonebook Call History Text Messaging Settings NAVIGATION Press to select any of the following My Home Favorites Previous Destinations Point of Interest Emergency Street Address Intersection City Center Map Edit Route Cancel Route CLIMATE Press to select any of the following Driver Settings Recirculated Air Auto Dual Passenger Settings A C Defrost 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 444 MyFord Touch If Equipped SETTINGS Press to select any of the following Clock Display Sound Vehicle Settings Help HOME Press to access your home screen Depending on your vehicle s option package and software your screens may vary in appearance from the descriptions in this section Your features may also be limited depending on your market Check with your authorized dealer for availability INFORMATION Press to select any of the following e SYNC Services e Sirius Travel Link e Alerts e e Calendar SYNC Apps If the icon is yellow see Alerts in the Information section of this chapter The availability of these features is dependent on your
483. res scheduled maintenance or repair You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for the Ford FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their packaging Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed in this owner s manual Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications Collision Repairs We hope that you never experience a collision but accidents do happen Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements for fit finish structural integrity corrosion protection and dent resistance During vehicle development we validate that these parts deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system A great way to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine Ford replacement collision parts Warranty on Replacement Parts Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty Damage caused to your vehicle as a result of the failure of non Ford parts may not be covered by the Ford Warranty For additional information see the terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 16 Introduction SPECIAL NOTICES
484. rgy absorbing head restraint B Steel stems C Guide sleeve unlock and remove buttons To reinstall the non adjustable head restraint do the following e Remove Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment position Then press and hold the guide sleeve unlock and remove buttons and pull up on the head restraint e Reinstall Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks Third row head restraints if A equipped The head restraints consist of A Energy absorbing head restraint B Steel stems C Fold strap Fold Pull the fold strap C Pull the head restraint back up to reset Note Press the stow or fold button on the power folding seats to automatically fold the head restraint C 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Seats 153 Tilting Head Restraints The front head restraints may tilt for extra comfort To tilt the head restraint do the following z e 1 Adjust the seatback to an upright driving or riding 4 position 2 Pivot the head restraint forward toward your head to the desired position After the head restraint reaches the forward most tilt position pivot it forward again to release it to the rearward untilted position MANUAL SEATS Moving the Seats Backward and Forward t e 4 WARNING Do not adjust the driver seat or seatback while the vehicle is moving This may resul
485. risk of personal injury in the event of a crash WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 58 Supplementary Restraints System WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag as you could be seriously injured or killed Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING If the side airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again The side airbag system including the seat must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash The side airbags are located on the outboard side of the seat backs of the front seats In certain sideways crashes the airbag on the side affected by the crash will be inflated The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact crashes The system consists of the following e A tag on the seatback indicating that side airbags are found on your vehicle e Side airbags located inside the seatback of the driver
486. rity label that provides important key cut information Keep the label in a safe place for future reference Intelligent Access Key If Equipped em 1031X 2015 Flex 471 Your intelligent access keys operate the power locks and the remote start system The key must be in your vehicle to activate the push button start system The intelligent access key also contains a removable mechanical key blade that you can use to unlock the driver door Slide the release on the back of the transmitter to release the key blade and then pull the blade out Note Your vehicle s back up keys came with a security tag that provides important key cut information Keep the tag in a safe place for future reference Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Keys and Remote Control 65 Replacing the Battery Note Refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries Note Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back surface of the circuit board Note Replacing the battery will not delete the transmitter from your vehicle The transmitter should operate normally The remote control uses one coin type three volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent Integrated Keyhead Transmitter 1 Twist a thin coin in the slot near the key ring to remove the battery cover 1 2 Carefully peel up the rubber gasket 2 2 from the transmitter if it does not come off with t
487. rm fractures or other injuries Objects placed on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back The driver and front passenger airbags will deploy during significant frontal and near frontal crashes The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of e Driver and passenger airbag modules e Front passenger sensing system e Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in this chapter 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Supplementary Restraints System 53 Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment WARNING The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches 25 centimeters between an occupant s chest and the driver airbag module To properly position yourself away from the airbag e Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably e Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on
488. rotection without damaging the vehicle s paint finish wiper blades or washer system 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Maintenance 309 CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY WARNING Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury Therefore do not allow flames sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery When working near the battery always shield your face and protect your eyes Always provide proper ventilation WARNING When lifting a plastic cased battery excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps resulting in personal injury and damage to the vehicle or battery Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners WARNING Keep batteries out of reach of children Batteries contain sulfuric acid Avoid contact with skin eyes or clothing Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution In case of acid contact with skin or eyes flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention If acid is swallowed call a physician immediately WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service No
489. route calculation 3 Choose from up to three different types of routes and then select Start Route e Fastest Route Uses the fastest moving roads possible e Shortest Route Uses the shortest distance possible e Eco Route Uses the most fuel efficient route You can cancel the route or have the system demo the route for you Select Route Prefs to set route preferences like avoiding freeways tollroads ferries and car trains as well as to use or not use high occupancy vehicle lanes High occupancy vehicle lanes are also known as carpool or diamond lanes People who ride in buses vanpools or carpools use these lanes Note If your vehicle is on a recognized road and you do not press the Start Route button the system defaults to the Fastest Route option and begins guidance During route guidance you can press the talking bubble icon that appears in the upper right navigation corner green bar if you want the system to repeat route guidance information When the system repeats the last guidance instruction it updates the distance to the next guidance instruction since it detects when the vehicle is moving 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 512 MyFord Touch If Equipped Point of Interest POI Categories Your system offers a variety of points of interest categories Recreation amp Sports Health amp Medicine Within these main categories there are subcategories which contain
490. route is active If you have said the command Destination you may say any of the above commands or commands in the following Destination chart 9H you have said the command Navigation you may say any of the above commands or commands in the following Navigation chart DESTINATION lt POI category gt 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 521 Destination NAVIGATION Help If you have said Destination you may say any of the commands in the Destination chart One shot Destination Street Address When you say either Navigation destination street address or Destination street address the system asks you to say the full address The system displays an example on screen You can then speak the address naturally such as One two three four Main Street Anytown 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 522 MyFord Touch If Equipped TROUBLESHOOTING Your SYNC system is easy to use However should questions arise see the tables below Use the website at any time to check your phone s compatibility register your account and set preferences as well as access a customer representative via an online chat during certain hours Visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca for more information Phone issues cause s Th
491. rove the fit of the child safety seat or tether strap Second row center seat positions Route the child safety seat tether strap over the top of the head restraint If needed remove the head restraint to improve the fit of the child safety seat or tether strap See Rear Seats in this chapter for head restraint information Third row seat position Route the child safety seat tether strap over the seat back under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts If needed fold the head restraint down to improve the fit of the child safety seat or tether strap See Rear seats in the Seats chapter for head restraint information 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 30 Child Safety 2 Locate the correct anchor for the selected rear seating position e Second row bucket 40 40 e Third row seat Note The cargo tie downs at the rear edge of the floor are not tether anchors 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Child Safety 31 3 Clip the tether hook to the anchor as shown The tether hook may be twisted 1 2 turn to improve installation If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a crash 4 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a crash
492. rritate the skin and eyes but none of the residue is toxic While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures facial and eye injuries or internal injuries particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment Thus it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required SOS POST CRASH ALERT SYSTEM The system flashes the direction indicator lamps and the horn sounds intermittently in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag equipped on your vehicle The horn and lamps turn off when e You press the hazard button e You press the panic button if equipped on the remote entry transmitter e Your vehicle runs out of power 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 52 Supplementary Restraints System DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS WARNING Never place your arm or any objects over an airbag module Placing your arm over a deploying airbag can result in serious a
493. rt scans to the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving task at a critical time Volume Setting Do not raise the volume excessively Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident Use of Speech Recognition Functions Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is subject to errors It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors Navigation Features Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination Please make certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow instructions and safety information fully Distraction Hazard Any navigation features may require manual non verbal setup Attempting to perform such set up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause an accident or other serious consequences Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations Let Your Judgment Prevail Any navigation features are provided only as an aid Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal judgment Any route sugges
494. rt your vehicle s engine and will operate the remote entry system if the new key is an integrated keyhead transmitter if it has been successfully programmed Wait 20 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8 if the key was not successfully programmed Take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new key programmed if you are still unsuccessful Wait 20 seconds and then repeat this procedure from Step 1 to program an additional key Programming a Spare Intelligent Access Key If Equipped Note A maximum of four intelligent access keys can be programmed to your vehicle You must take your vehicle and all access keys to your authorized dealer to be erased and reprogrammed if you would like to replace a previously programmed access key with a new access key or if you already have four access keys programmed to your vehicle You must have two previously programmed intelligent access keys inside your vehicle and the new unprogrammed intelligent access keys readily accessible See your authorized dealer to have the spare key programmed if two previously programmed keys are not available Make sure that your vehicle is off before beginning this procedure Make sure that all doors are closed before beginning and that they remain closed throughout the procedure Perform all steps within 30 seconds of starting the sequence Stop and wait for at least one minute before starting again if any steps are performed out of sequence Read and und
495. rtant that they continue to sit properly A properly seated occupant sits upright leaning against the seatback and centered on the seat cushion with their feet comfortably extended on the floor Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event For example if an occupant slouches lies down turns sideways sits forward leans forward or sideways or puts one or both feet up the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased If you think that the state of the passenger airbag status indicator lamp is incorrect check for the following e Objects lodged underneath the seat e Objects between the seat cushion and the center console e Objects hanging off the seatback e Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket e Objects placed on the occupant s lap e Cargo interference with the seat e Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat e Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing system The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter due to the conditions described in the previous list P Make sure the front passenger sensing system is operating t properly See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in this chapter 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Supplementary Restraints System
496. rvices Corporation administers the Roadside Assistance program You must receive covered services in Canada or the continental United States Coverage extends to vehicles that use public non seasonal annually traveled roadways Roadside Assistance coverage does not extend to vehicles involved in cross country driving logging autocross and any other form of off road use Well maintained roads and surfaces help ensure safe travel for the supplier and allow their representatives to perform service as per the standard operating procedures In Remote Locations If our supplier cannot take your vehicle by road to the nearest authorized dealership transportation by rail or water may be necessary The program covers a tow to the dock or rail terminal and also to the dealership at the end of the trip For rail or water transportation however contact your authorized dealer to confirm if you are eligible for additional coverage before you authorize or pay for the service Call the Ford Roadside Assistance at 1 800 665 2006 for additional information 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 272 Roadside Emergencies HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The hazard flasher control is located on the instrument panel A by the radio Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists e Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will flash e Press the flasher contr
497. s able to connect to the digital signal again Station blending When the system first receives a station aside from HD2 HD7 multicast stations it first plays the station in the analog version Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station it shifts to the digital version Depending on the station quality you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound In order to provide the best possible experience use the contact form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology Independent entities own and operate each station These stations are responsible for making sure all audio streams and data fields are accurate Potential station issues Isme Cause Action Echo stutter skip or This is poor time No action required repeat in audio alignment by the radio This is a broadcast Increase or decrease broadcaster issue in audio volume 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 386 Audio System Potential station issues Issue Cause Action Sound fading or The radio is shifting No action required blending in and out between analog and The reception issue digital audio may clear up as you continue to drive There is an audio The digital multicast is No action required mut
498. s and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 344 Wheels and Tires Tire Replacement Requirements WARNING Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size load index speed rating and type such as P metric versus LT metric or all season versus all terrain as those originally provided by Ford The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or the Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or edge of the driver s door If this information is not f
499. s cannot be installed at the center seating position LATCH compatible child seats with attachments on belt webbing can only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 28 Child Safety Each time you use the safety seat check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor if applicable Tug the child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to the vehicle The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a proper installation If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats When used in combination either the safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first provided a proper installation is achieved Attach the tether strap afterward if included with the child seat Using Tether Straps ae Many forward facing child safety seats include a tether strap RAL which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats Contact the manuf
500. s equipped with Navigation touch the i Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab Press Apps gt 911 Assist gt On You can also access 911 Assist by e Pressing the Settings icon gt Settings gt Phone gt 911 Assist or e Pressing the Settings icon gt Help gt 911 Assist To Make Sure that 911 Assist Works Properly e SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use e The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident e You must pair and connect a Bluetooth enabled and compatible phone to SYNC e A connected Bluetooth enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident e A connected Bluetooth enabled phone must have adequate network coverage battery power and signal strength e The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the United States Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number In the Event of a Crash Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut off which would trigger 911 Assist however SYNC tries to contact emergency services if 911 Assist triggers If a connected phone sustains damage or loses connection to SYNC SYNC searches for and tries to connect to any available previously paired phone and tries to make the call to 911
501. s higher than the bottom of the front rocker area of your vehicle When driving through standing water drive very slowly and do not stop your vehicle Your brake performance and traction may be limited After driving through water and as soon as it is safe to do so e Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the brakes and to check that they work e Check that the horn works e Check that the exterior lights work e Turn the steering wheel to check that the steering power assist works FLOOR MATS WARNING Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle Only use floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Driving Hints 269 WARNING Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle Floor mats must be properly secured to both retention posts to make sure mats do not shift out of position T WARNING Never place floor mats or any other covering in the vehicle foot well that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from movi
502. s maximum braking level will not be sufficient an audible warning will sound while the system continues to brake This is accompanied by a heads up display a red warning bar illuminating on the windshield You should take immediate action To help you to pass the system may provide a small temporary acceleration when the you switch on your left turn indicator while following a lead car Setting the Gap Distance Note It is your responsibility to select a gap appropriate to the driving conditions distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you by pressing the GAP control up or down The selected gap will display in the information display as shown by the bars in the graphic Four gap distance settings are available i You can decrease or increase the 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 232 Cruise Control Graphic Following Following display bars distance distance at between 60 mph vehicles 100 km h Each time you restart your vehicle the system will select the last chosen gap for the current driver Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control Press the brake pedal or press CNCL to disengage the system Disengaging the system will not erase your previous set speed Overriding Adaptive Cruise Control WARNING Whenever the driver is overriding the ACC by pressing the accelerator pedal the ACC will not automatically apply the brakes to maintain separation from any veh
503. salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips e Always read the instructions before using the products CLEANING THE ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal When washing e Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage e Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Vehicle Care 323 e Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean In Canada use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo e Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running water in the running engine may cause internal damage e Never wash or rinse any ignition coil spark plug wire or spark plug well or the area in and around these locations e Cover the battery power distribution box and air filter assembly to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windows and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly If the wipers do not wipe properly substances on the vehicle s glass or the wiper blades may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield To clean these items follow these tips e The win
504. se or fast forward in the current track e Press play or pause to play or pause the audio e Press Replay to return to live audio if you have been using the feature to replay audio Scan Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of channels Options Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for Bass Midrange Treble Balance and Fade DSP Digital Signal Processing Occupancy Mode Speed Compensated Volume Note Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 463 Set Category for Seek Scan allows you to select a category of music you would like to search for You can then choose to either seek or scan for the stations playing that category Parental Lockout allows you to lock and unlock channels change or reset your PIN or unlock all channels To use this feature you need your initial PIN which is 1234 Artist Title Team Alerts allows you to select Artists Titles and Teams that you would like the system to alert you to when they are playing on other channels Press Edit Alerts to delete or turn off alerts You can also set all alerts to on or off When an alert appears on the screen you can choose to Tune to the channel to Cancel the alert or to Disable Alerts If you are listening to a sporting event you can save your favorite teams so that the system can alert you when they are playing on a satellite rad
505. seat upholstery Note In order to allow the seat to latch in the stowed position do not stow objects under the seat before stowing 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Seats 167 Unstowing the Third Row Seat 4 WARNING Make sure the seat is latched to vehicle floor by pushing and pulling on the seat If not latched the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop Note Make sure that there are no objects such as books purses or brief cases on the load floor before unstowing the seat Failure to remove all objects from the top of the load floor prior to unstowing it may cause damage to the seat Note Make sure the area under the forward portion of the load floor is free of objects before unstowing the third row seat 1 Unlatch and lift the seat out of the floor tub by squeezing and pulling up on the handle Once the seat is at a vertical position push the seat over letting it fall onto the latches gt 2 To return the seatback to the upright position pull the red strap Then while PI holding the red strap pull the long strap located on the seatback to raise the seatback eS 3 Pull the head restraints up to their normal adjusted positions PowerFold Third row Seat If Equipped The third row seat features a power one touch operation that allows you to adjust the left right or both seats into a NORMAL STOW FOLD or TAILGATE position with just o
506. services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services If this SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic form you may print one copy of such electronic documentation EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is subject to U S and European Union export jurisdiction You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE including the U S Export Administration Regulations as well as end user end use and destination restrictions issued by U S and other governments For additional information see http www microsoft com exporting TRADEMARKS This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY MS Microsoft Corporation third party software or service providers their affiliates or suppliers PRODUCT SUPPORT Product support for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS its parent corporation Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates or subsidiaries For product support please refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the DEVICE Should you have any questions concerning this EULA or if you desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason please refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE No Liability for Certain Damages EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW FORD MOTOR COMPA
507. servoir cap while the engine is running or hot You have limited engine power when in the fail safe mode so drive the vehicle with caution The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed operation and the engine will run rough Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage therefore 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine 2 Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer 3 If this is not possible wait a short period for the engine to cool 4 Check the coolant level and replenish if low 5 Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer Note Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 304 Maintenance TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK 6F50 6F55 Transmission WARNING The dipstick cap and surrounding components may be hot gloves are recommended WARNING Use gloves when moving the air filter assembly components will be hot Note Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed To obtain an accurate fluid check drive the vehicle until it is warmed up approximately 20 miles 80 km If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer the veh
508. shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage Correct fluid level The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 180 F 200 F 82 C 93 C on a level surface The normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles 30 km of driving DSSS The transmission fluid level should be C targeted within the cross hatch area if at normal operating temperature 180 F 200 F 82 C 98 C 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Maintenance 307 High fluid level SS MAX If the fluid level is above the MAX C MN poose dD SSS range of the dipstick remove fluid to 4 reach the hashmark level Note Fluid level above the MAX level may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer the vehicle should be turned off until normal operating temperatures are reached Depending on vehicle use cooling times could take up to 30 minutes or longer Adjusting Automatic Transmission Fluid Levels Before adding any fluid make sure the correct type is used The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the Technical specifications section in this chapter Note Use of a non approved automatic t
509. side Emergencies Connecting the Jumper Cables WARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative terminal of the battery to be jumped A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery Note Do not attach the negative cable to fuel lines engine rocker covers the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points Note In the illustration the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting boosting battery 1 Connect the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery 2 Connect the other end of the positive cable to the positive terminal of the assisting battery 3 Connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the assisting battery 4 Make the final connection of the negative cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle s engine away from the battery and the carburetor or fuel injection system Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades belts moving parts of both engines or any fuel delivery system parts 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Roadside Emergencies 275 Jump Starting 1 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at a moderately increased speed 2 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle 3 Once the disabled vehicle has been started run both engines for an additional three minutes before
510. sired selection is chosen press OK Note Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and deactivates all Bluetooth features Delete Device Delete a paired phone Press OK and scroll to select the device Press OK to confirm Delete All Devices Delete all previously paired phones and all information originally saved with those phones Press OK to select Exit the current menu This is a speed dependent feature Advanced Menu Options This menu allows you to access settings such as prompts languages defaults perform a master reset install an application and view system information 1 Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu 2 Scroll until System Settings appears and press OK 3 Scroll until Advanced appears and select OK 4 Scroll to select from the following options If you select Prompts Get help from SYNC by using questions helpful hints or asking you for a specific action To turn these prompts on or off 1 Press OK to select and scroll to select between on or off 2 Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 411 Languages Choose between English Espanol and Francais Once selected all of SYNC s radio displays and prompts are in the selected language 1 Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages 2 Press OK
511. sist feature See 911 Assist in the SYNC Services and Applications section Phone Ringer Select the ring tone you want to hear when you receive a call Choose from possible system ring tones your currently paired phone s ring tone beep text to speech or a silent notification Text Message Notification Select a text message notification if supported by your phone Choose from possible system alert tones text to speech or silent Internet Data Connection If your phone is compatible use this screen to adjust your internet data connection Select to make your connection profile with the personal area network or to turn off your connection You can also choose to adjust your settings or have the system always connect never connect when roaming or query on connect Press for more information Manage Phonebook Touch this button to access features such as automatic phonebook download re download your phonebook add contacts from your phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook Roaming Warning Touch this button to have the system alert you when your phone is in roaming mode 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 482 MyFord Touch If Equipped Phone Voice Commands ZEB Press the voice button on the steering wheel control After the i amp tone say any of the following commands PHONE Call lt name gt Listen to text message lt gt Call lt name gt a
512. source screen allows you to move through that source s presets USING VOICE RECOGNITION This system helps you control many features using voice commands This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front of you The system provides feedback through audible tones prompts questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction voice settings The system also asks short questions confirmation prompts when it is not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your request When using voice commands words and icons may appear in the lower left status bar indicating the status of the voice session such as Listening Success Failed Paused or Try Again 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 451 How to Use Voice Commands with Your System Press the voice icon After the tone speak your command i clearly What Can I Say To access the available voice commands for the current session do one of the following e During a voice session press the Help icon in the lower left status bar of the screen e Say What can I say for an on screen listing of the possible voice commands associated with your current voice session e Press the voice icon After the tone say Help to hear a list of possible voice commands Helpful Hints e Make sure the interior
513. sources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life Ford Motor Company however urges you to have all recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals and to record all vehicle service Hot climate oil change intervals Vehicles operating in the Middle East North Africa Sub Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates using an American Petroleum Institute API Certified for Gasoline Engines Certification mark oil of SM or SN quality the normal oil change interval is 5000 miles 8000 kilometers If the available API SM or SN oils are not available then the oil change service interval is 3000 miles 4800 kilometers 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 562 Scheduled Maintenance Engine air filter amp cabin air filter replacement Engine air filter and cabin air filter life is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions Vehicles operated in these conditions require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter ENGINE COOLANT CHANGE RECORD Initial change Six years or 100000 miles 160000 km whichever comes first After initial change Every three years or 50000 miles 80000 km Engine Coolant Change Log Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VAL
514. space available Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 250 Load Carrying Example only e TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTALS FRONT2 REAR3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs TIRE COLD TIRE PRESSURE me s forom SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL SPARE T145 80D16 420 KPA eo PSI INFORMATION P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXX XX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY 1 TFRONT REAR NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL 5 1AVANT 2 1 ARRIERE 3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed yoo K89 ogr Le poids total des occupants et du chargement na doit jamais d pesser kg ou PNEU PNEUS A FROID MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL mo P235 70R16 240 KPA 35 PSi INFORMATION REAR P235 70R16 240 KPA 35 Psi VORLEMANUEL SPARE POUR PLUS DE sedrs T145 90R17 415 KPA 60 PSI RENSEIGNEMENTS XXX XX XXXX XXXXA XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX CARGO Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional equipment When towing trailer tongue load weight is also part of cargo weight 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Load Carrying 251
515. speed or direction when you are driving in mud Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud As when you are driving over sand apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels If the vehicle does slide steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 208 All Wheel Drive If Equipped After driving through mud clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components Note Driving through deep water may damage the transmission If the front or rear axle is submerged in water the axle lubricant and PTU power transfer unit lubricant should be checked and changed if necessary Tread Lightly is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas Ford Motor Company joins the U S Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by treading lightly Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain Note Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills A danger lies in losing traction slipping sideways and possibly rolling over Whenever driving on a hill determine beforehand the route you will use Do not drive over the
516. squeal sound is present the brake linings may be worn out Have them inspected by an authorized dealer If your vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking have your vehicle inspected by an authorized dealer Note Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels even under normal driving conditions Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise See the Vehicle Care chapter for wheel cleaning instructions OLO See the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the aI brake system warning light Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency Gently press the brake pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry the brakes Brake Over Accelerator In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped apply steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow your vehicle and reduce engine power If you experience this condition apply the brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe stop Turn the engine off shift to park P and apply the parking brake Inspect the accelerator pedal and the area around it for any items or debris that may be obstructing its movement If none are found and the condition persists have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer Brake Assist Brake assist detects when you brake heavily by measuring the rate at which you press the brake pedal It provides maximum braking efficiency as long as you press t
517. st Settings Control Seats and Auto or Off Wheel or Seats 5 10 or 15 minutes System Remote Open Wipers Courtesy Wipe Rain Sensing 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Information Displays 123 MyKey Create Hold OK to Create MyKey 911 Assist Always On or User Selectable AdvanceTrac Always On or User Selectable Max Speed Speed Minder TRIP AND FUEL ECONOMY COMPUTER Resetting the Trip Computer Press and hold OK on the current screen to reset the respective trip distance time and fuel information Odometer Registers the total accumulated distance for the lifetime of the vehicle This value cannot be reset Trip Odometer Registers the distance of individual journeys Trip Timer Registers the total time of a trip Fuel Used Shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip Distance to E Indicates the approximate distance the vehicle will travel on the fuel remaining in the tank Changes in driving pattern may cause the value to vary Average Fuel Indicates the average fuel consumption since the function was last reset Information Messages See Information Messages later in this chapter for more information 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 124 Information Displays Information Display Controls Type 2 e Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu e Pr
518. st categories on the map at one time Starting point indicates the starting point of a planned route Waypoints indicates the location of a waypoint on the map The number inside the circle is different for each waypoint and represents the position of the waypoint in the route list Destination symbol indicates the ending point of a planned route Next maneuver point indicates the location of the next turn on the planned route No GPS symbol indicates that insufficient GPS satellite signals are available for accurate map positioning This icon may display under normal operation in an area with poor GPS access E EMAIT 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 519 Quick touch Buttons When in map mode touch anywhere on the map display to access more features Set as Dest Touch this button to select a scrolled location on the map as your destination You may scroll the map by pressing your index finger on the map display When you reach the desired location simply let go and then touch Set as Dest Set as Waypoint Touch this button to set the current location as a waypoint Save to Favorites Touch this button to save the current location to your favorites POI Icons Touch this button to select icons to display on the map You can select up to three icons to display on the map at the same time Turn these ON or OFF Cancel Route Touch this button to canc
519. stance is by using an admin key to clear your MyKey If the distance does not accumulate as expected then the intended user is not using the MyKey or an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a MyKey NUMBER OF MYKEY S Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted NUMBER OF ADMIN KEY S Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your vehicle Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted keys you have for your vehicle and detect if an additional MyKey has been programmed USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS MyKey is not compatible with non Ford approved aftermarket remote start systems If you choose to install a remote start system please see your Ford authorized dealer for a Ford approved remote start system 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyKey 73 MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING Potential causes I cannot create a e The key or fob used to start the vehicle MyKey does not have admin privileges e The key or fob used to start the vehicle is the only admin key there always has to be at least one admin key e Vehicles with push button start The intelligent access key is not in the backup slot The backup slot location information is in another chapter See Starting and Stopping the Vehicle e SecuriLock passive anti theft system is dis
520. steering wheel control When prompted say any of the commands in the following chart If you are not listening to a USB device or an SD card press the voice button and after the tone say USB or SD card then any of the commands in the following chart Play previous song Play similar music Play song lt name gt Play TV show name Play TV show episode lt name gt Play video lt name gt Play video podcast lt name gt Play audiobook lt name gt Play video podcast episode lt name gt Play video playlist name Previous Repeat all Repeat off Repeat one Shuffle off Play podcast episode lt name gt If you have said you would like to browse your USB or SD card the system prompts you to specify what you would like to browse When prompted see the following Browse chart This command is only available in USB mode and are device dependent BROWSE All video podcasts All albums All videos 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 472 MyFord Touch If Equipped All music videos Podcast lt name gt This command is only available in USB mode and are device dependent bJ All genres Genre lt name gt All movies Playlist lt name gt gt ok All playlists TV show
521. stem Migh DOR ss sevenevarharrayaciedss 98 101 autolock noniine fifi replacing bulbs 1 316 keypad erorian 83 Head restraints ee 150 locking and unlocking Heated st en heel 507 JOOLS stie thet DEDERE 84 ea i DU programming entry code 83 Heating eee 138 140 142 Keys ses 64 85 Help ett t e teet 506 positions of the ignition 182 Homelink wireless control SVSLOIT U outside eese 170 L Hood nuce irre 294 Lamps How to use voice commands 451 bulb replacement specifications chart 319 I headlamps flash to pass 98 interior lamps 104 Ignition eee 182 361 replacing bulbs 316 Illuminated visor mirror 110 LATCH anchors s 26 Information displays 120 Lift Bale isescsep steer RU 79 80 Inspection maintenance I M Lights warning and eSI tet atc testes LEES 198 indicator eects 114 Instrument panel Listening to music 454 cleaning terete 324 Load limits ss 248 cluster eere ite 114 Locks Intelligent Access Key 64 autolock see 77 Ghildproot 5 5 ems 37 J OOPS cczdextastadacszeuntesedcedegeageccates es 74 Jak siisii 353 Lubricant specifications 362 positioning eeeeeeeeee 353 Lig nuts sioe iere 359 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus I
522. sults to Ford where it is combined with scheduled maintenance information open recalls and other field service actions and unserviced vehicle inspection items from your authorized dealer Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice When you run a Vehicle Health Report Ford Motor Company may collect your cellular phone number to process your report request and diagnostic information about your vehicle Certain versions or updates to Vehicle Health Report may also collect additional vehicle information Ford may use the vehicle information it collects for any purpose If you do not want to disclose your cellular phone number or vehicle information do not run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile at www SYNCMyRide com See www SYNCMyRide com Vehicle Health Report Terms and Conditions and Privacy Statement for more information 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 417 SYNC Services Traffic Directions amp Information TDI If Equipped United States Only Note SYNC Services varies by trim level and model year and may require a subscription Traffic alerts and turn by turn directions available in select markets Message and data rates may apply Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change or discontinue this product service at any time without prior notification or incurring any future obligation Note SYNC Services requires activation prior to use Visit www SYNCMy
523. switch to the first detent and hold to close the window Rear Window Buffeting You may hear a pulsing noise when one or both of the rear windows are open This noise can be reduced by lowering a front window approximately 2 3 inches 5 8 centimeters One Touch Up or Down Front Windows This feature automatically opens or closes the window Press or lift the switch completely and release The window will fully open or close Press or lift it again to stop the window Bounce Back The window will stop automatically while closing and reverse some distance if there is an obstacle in the way Overriding the Bounce Back Feature WARNING When you override the bounce back feature the window will not reverse if it detects an obstacle Take care when closing the windows to avoid personal injury or damage to your vehicle Pull up the window switch and hold within two seconds of the window reaching the bounce back position The window will travel up with no bounce back protection The window will stop if you release the switch before the window is fully closed 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 106 Windows and Mirrors Window Lock A Unlock B Lock Press the control to lock or unlock the rear window controls Accessory Delay You can use the window switches for several minutes after you switch the ignition off or until you open either front door EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power Exteri
524. t different climate control modes when the vehicle is started using the remote start feature Front Seats Auto Off Duration 5 10 15 minutes System check enabled default uncheck disabled Courtesy Wipe check enabled Wipers default uncheck disabled Remote Start Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Information Displays 129 Settings cont d MyKey MyKey Status MyKeys Admin Keys Create Hold OK to Create MyKey 911 Assist Always On User Selectable Traction Always On User Selectable Control Max Speed Choose desired speed or off Speed Minder Limiter Disturb MyKey On Off Report Clear MyKeys Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set Settings cont d Display Distance Miles amp GAL 1 100km or km l Gauge Fuel Gauge Fuel Tach Display Language Select your applicable language Temperature Fahrenheit F Celsius C 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 130 Information Displays INFORMATION MESSAGES Note Depending on the vehicle options equipped with your vehicle not all of the messages will display or be available Certain messages may be abbreviated or shortened depending upon which cluster type you have Press the OK button to acknowledge and remove some messages from the information display Other messages will be removed automat
525. t 190 End user license agreement 528 running out of fuel 191 Engine sese 361 safety information relating to Cleaning 322 automotive fuels 189 coolant io D 298 Fuel and distance computer 123 fail safe cooling 302 outside temperature idle speed control 309 Indi Cator vus recte 123 lubrication specifications 362 to empty indicator 123 refill capacities 362 DTU STANCE MN ME 123 Service POINTS essent 296 trip reset button occ 123 Engine block heater 187 Fuses niii 284 285 Engine oil checking and adding 297 G JIDSUCK 4 iet 297 filter specifications 366 Garage door opener 170 refill dud p Gas cap see Fuel cap 194 BECCA arpei Gauges s 112 113 Event data recording 13 odometer eeeeees 123 Exhaust fumes 187 trip Odometer o n 123 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 566 Index H SUGTAS Os secet 353 Joining two calls Hazard flashers 272 multiparty conference call 401 iogTM HD Radio sees 458 Jump starting your vehicle 273 Headlamps AMINE iuis dieere tne pias 314 K bulb specifications 319 flash to PISO cad iteivedkexixeik dea ada 98 Keyless entry sy
526. t Printing October 2014 USA fus Vehicle Care 327 e Do not use hydrofluoric acid based or high caustic based wheel cleaners steel wool fuels or strong household detergent e If you intend on parking your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so This reduces the risk of increased corrosion of the brake discs VEHICLE STORAGE If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time 30 days or more read the following maintenance recommendations to make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for reliable regular driving Long term storage under various conditions may lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are taken to preserve the components General e Store all vehicles in a dry ventilated place e Protect from sunlight if possible e If vehicles are stored outside they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage Body e Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt grease oil tar or mud from exterior surfaces rear wheel housing and underside of front fenders Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations e Touch up raw or primed metal to prevent rust e Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration Re wax as necessary when the ve
527. t all dealers have extended hours or body shops Please contact your dealer for details 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Scheduled Maintenance 547 Protecting Your Investment Maintenance is an investment that will pay dividends in the form of improved reliability durability and resale value To maintain the proper performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems it is imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated intervals Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor IOLM system which displays a message in the information display at the proper oil change service interval this interval may be up to one year or 10000 miles 16000 kilometers When ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED appears in the information display it is time for an oil change the oil change must be done within two weeks or 500 miles 800 kilometers of the ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing The Intelligent Oil Life Monitor must be reset after each oil change see the Information Displays chapter If your information display is prematurely reset or becomes inoperative you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5000 miles 8000 kilometers from your last oil change Never exceed one year or 10000 miles 16000 kilometers between oil change intervals Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple comple
528. t home Listen to text messages Call lt name gt at work Messages ed Unmute call Po Heldon o po This command is only available during an active call If you have said Messages see the following Messages chart Reply to text messages e Listen to text messages 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 483 INFORMATION e If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation touch the i 2 Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab Under the Information menu you can access features such as A SYNC Services B Sirius Travel Link C Alerts D Calendar E SYNC Applications SYNC Services If Equipped United States Only Note SYNC Services varies by trim level and model year and may require a subscription Traffic alerts and turn by turn directions available in select markets Message and data rates may apply Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change or discontinue this product service at any time without prior notification or incurring any future obligation Note SYNC Services requires activation before use Visit www SYNCMyRide com to register and check your eligibility for complimentary services Standard phone and message rates may apply Subscription
529. t in sudden seat movement causing loss of control of your vehicle 4 WARNING Rock the seat backward and forward after releasing the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 154 Seats Recline Adjustment H A N WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to make sure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or crash Lumbar Adjustment If K Equipped POWER SEATS IF EQUIPPED WARNING Do not adjust the driver seat or seatback while the gt vehicle is moving This may result in sudden seat movement causing loss of control of your vehicle 4 WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Seats 155 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 156 Seats MEMORY FUNCTION IF EQUIPPED This memory control located on the driver door allows automatic 1 2 positioning of the driver seat and power mirrors to two programmable positions You may also have this feature for the steering column and power ad
530. t least monthly using an accurate tire gauge See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle The low tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low Once the light is illuminated your tires are under inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer s recommended tire pressure Even if the light turns on and a short time later turns off your tire pressure still needs to be checked When Your Temporary Spare Tire Is Installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare the system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel and tire assembly needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle To restore the full function of the tire pressure monitoring system have the damaged road wheel and tire assembly repaired and remounted on your vehicle 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Wheels and Tires 351 When You Believe Your System Is Not Operating Properly The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you when your tires need air It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended See the following chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring
531. t passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning To avoid activating the Belt Minder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat warnings will only be given to front seat occupants as determined by the front passenger sensing system If the Belt Minder warnings have expired warnings for about five minutes for one occupant driver or front passenger the other occupant can still activate the Belt Minder feature 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Safety Belts 45 You and the front seat The Belt Minder feature will not passenger buckle your safety activate belts before you switch the ignition on or less than 1 2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on You or the front seat passenger The Belt Minder feature activates the do not buckle your safety belts safety belt warning light illuminates before your vehicle reaches at and a warning tone sounds for least 6 mph 9 7 km h and 6 seconds every 25 seconds repeating 1 2 minutes elapse after you for about 5 minutes or until you and switch the ignition the front seat passenger buckle your safety belts The driver or front passenger The Belt Minder feature activates the safety belt becomes unbuckled safety belt warning light illuminates for about one minute while the and a warning tone sounds for vehicle is traveling at least 6 sec
532. t such high risk applications especially in more remote geographical areas TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE WHETHER STATUTORY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING CUSTOM OR TRADE AND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV SOFTWARE Certain jurisdictions do not permit the disclaimer of certain warranties so this limitation may not apply to you 5 Limitation of Liability TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES INCLUDING IN EACH CASE BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA LOSS OF DATA LOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 538 Appendices EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT TORT
533. t the transmission in position P 2 Plug the extension cable from the portable music player into the auxiliary input jack 3 Switch the radio on Select either a tuned FM station or a CD 4 Adjust the volume as desired 5 Switch your portable music player on and adjust its volume to half its maximum level 6 Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN appears in the display You should hear music from your device even if it is low 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Audio System 391 7 Adjust the volume on your portable music player until it reaches the volume level of the FM station or CD Do this by switching back and forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls USB PORT IF EQUIPPED WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving The USB port allows you to plug in media playing devices memory sticks and charge devices if supported See the SYNC chapter for more information MEDIA HUB IF EQUIPPED The media hub is located
534. tched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing fuel usage while coasting or decelerating When you take your foot off the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the engine while decelerating This fuel economy benefit may be perceived as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from the accelerator pedal P Park This position locks the transmission and prevents the front wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear e Press the brake pedal e Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Drive with overdrive The normal driving position for the best fuel economy Transmission operates in gears one through six The automatic transmission shift strategy has the ability to detect hilly terrain or mountainous areas and will provide a limited amount of grad
535. te If your battery has a cover or a shield make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced For longer trouble free operation keep the top of the battery clean and dry Also make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 310 Maintenance Battery relearn Because your vehicle s engine is electronically controlled by a computer some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance To begin this process 1 With the vehicle at a complete stop set the parking brake 2 Put the gearshift lever in P Park turn off all accessories and start the engine 3 Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute Turn the A C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute oO OF eA Drive the vehicle to com
536. tem then select from 9 the following Language Select to have the touchscreen display in Fahrenheit Volume system Touch Screen Button Select to have the system beep to confirm Beep choices made through the touchscreen Touch Panel Button Select to have the system beep to confirm Beep button choices made through the climate or audio system Keyboard Layout Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or ABC format 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 499 Install Applications _ Install any downloaded applications or view the current software licenses Master Reset Select to restore factory defaults This erases all personal settings and personal data Voice Control Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Voice Control then 9 select from the following Voice control Interaction Mode Standard interaction mode provides more detailed interaction and guidance Advanced mode has less audible interaction and more tone prompts Confirmation Have the system ask you short questions if it Prompts has not clearly heard or understood your request Note Even with confirmation prompts turned off the system may occasionally ask you to confirm settings Media Candidate Candidate lists are possible results from your Lists voice commands The system simply makes a best guess at your request with these turned off Phone Candidate Candidat
537. tenance instructions regularly inspect your vehicle and seek repair for any damage or problem you suspect Vehicle Health Report supplements but cannot replace normal maintenance and vehicle inspection Vehicle Health Report only monitors certain systems that are electronically monitored by the vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other system such as brake lining wear Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle damage and serious injury Note Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to use Visit www SYNCMyRide com to register There is no fee or subscription associated with Vehicle Health Report but you must register to use this feature Note This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your mobile phone Before running a report review the Vehicle Health Report privacy notice Note In order to allow a break in period for your vehicle you may not be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has reached 200 miles Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at www SYNCMyRide com After registering you can request a Vehicle Health Report inside your vehicle Return to your account at www SYNCMyRide com to view your report You can also choose for SYNC to automatically remind you to run reports at specific mileage intervals Cellular phone airtime usage m
538. tended Service Plan 373 Interest Free Finance Options Available Take advantage of our interest free installment payment plan Just a 10 down payment will provide you with an affordable no interest no fee payment program allowing you all the security and benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying over time You are pre approved with no credit checks no hassles To learn more call our Ford ESP specialists at 800 367 3377 Ford ESP P O Box 8072 Royal Oak MI 48068 0039 SERVICE PLANS CANADA ONLY You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended Service Plan Ford Extended Service Plan is the only service contract backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited Depending on the plan you purchase Ford Extended Service Plan provides benefits such as e Rental reimbursement e Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items e Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage expires e Roadside Assistance benefits There are several Ford Extended Service Plans available in various time distance and deductible combinations Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs including reimbursement for towing and rental When you purchase Ford Extended Service Plan you receive added peace of mind protection throughout Canada and the United States provided by a network of participating authorized Ford Motor Company dealers Note Repairs performed outside of Canada an
539. tery your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles 8 kilometers after you connect it This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine You may disregard any unusual driving characteristics during this period The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field or radio noise Do not press the accelerator pedal while starting the engine If you have difficulty starting the engine see Fazlure to start later in this section 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 182 Starting and Stopping the Engine IGNITION SWITCH IF EQUIPPED A Off The ignition is off Note When you switch the ignition off and leave your vehicle do not leave your key in the ignition This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge B Accessory Allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to operate while the engine is not running Note Do not leave the ignition key in this position for too long This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge C On All electrical circuits are operational and the warning lamps and indicators illuminate D Start Cranks the engine KEYLESS STARTING IF EQUIPPED Note The keyless starting system may not function if the key is close to metal objects or electronic devices such as cellular phones N
540. tgate open without first disabling the power function and securing the liftgate to the vehicle Note In case of operation in extreme cold 40 F 40 C or on extreme inclines manual operation of the liftgate is suggested You can enable or disable the power liftgate using the information display The remote control and instrument panel button will still operate the liftgate regardless of the setting Opening and Closing the Power Liftgate Note You can reverse the liftgate movement direction with a second press of the instrument panel button or the button on the liftgate or a second double press of the transmitter button The liftgate will only operate with the vehicle in P Three tones will sound as the liftgate begins to power close A single tone indicates a problem with the close request caused by any of the following e The ignition is on and the transmission is not in P e The battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage e The vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph 5 km h If the liftgate reverses and starts to close after an open request a fast continuous tone indicates excessive load on the gate or a possible strut failure Have the system checked by an authorized dealer if you still have a fast tone after removing the load 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Locks 81 To open or close from the instrument panel Press the instrument panel button sal To open or close w
541. th a music file to any third party YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT GRACENOTE DATA THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN You agree that your non exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions If your licenses terminate you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers Gracenote respectively reserve all rights in Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content including all ownership rights Under no circumstances will either Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide including any copyrighted material or music file information You agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights collectively or separately under this agreement against you directly in each company s own name Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who you are For more information see the web page at www gracenote com for the Gracenote Privacy Policy THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU AS IS NEITHER GRACEN
542. the passenger compartment recirculates This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior when used with A C and may also reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle Note Recirculated air may turn off automatically or be prevented from turning on in all airflow modes except MAX A C to reduce risk of fogging E MAX A C Turn the temperature control dial all the way past the full cool position to maximize cooling Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Climate Control 139 F Front temperature control Controls the temperature of the airflow in the front of your vehicle Adjust to select the desired temperature G Rear fan speed control Controls the volume of air circulated in the rear of your vehicle Press or to select the desired fan speed H Rear temperature control Controls the temperature of the airflow in the rear of your vehicle Press TEMP and TEMP to select the desired temperature I REAR CTRL Press to change control of the rear climate controls system from the front controls to the rear controls J Rear climate control system power Press the button to turn the rear climate system on and off K Front fan speed control Controls the volume of air circulated in your vehicle Adjust to select the desired fan speed
543. the SD card just push the card in and release it Do not attempt to pull the card out to remove it this could cause damage Your navigation system is comprised of two main features destination mode and map mode To set a destination press the green corner of your touchscreen then Dest when it appears See Setting a destination later in this chapter To view the navigation map and your vehicle s current location touch the green bar in the upper right hand corner of the touchscreen or press Dest gt Map See Map mode later in this chapter 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 511 Setting a Destination Press the green corner of your touchscreen then Dest when it appears Choose any of the following Destination selections My Home Favorites Previous Destinations Point of Interest Emergency 1 Enter the necessary information into the highlighted text fields in any order For address destination entry Go appears once you enter all the necessary information Pressing Go makes the address location appear on the map If you choose Previous Destination the last 20 destinations you have selected appear 2 Select Set as Dest to make this your destination You can also choose to set this as a waypoint have the system route to this point on the way to your current destination or save it as a favorite The system considers any Avoid Areas selections in its
544. the accelerator and or the brake pedal e How fast the vehicle was travelling e Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur Note EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data or information e g name gender age and crash location is recorded see limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic Directions and Information privacy below However parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have such special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing Octo
545. the device is connected to SYNC and that you have pressed play on your device e Make sure that all song details are populated e Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass storage to MTP class 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 435 Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services Traffic Directions and Information issues cause s I received a text e Your account that the Vehicle may not be Health Report is not activated website OR activated on the e This is a free feature but you must first register online to use it e Make sure that your VIN is correctly listed in your account e You may have the wrong VIN vehicle identification number listed I am unable to The preferred When you register your account retrieve the report dealer information you must list a preferred dealer If on the website or did not load one is already listed try selecting I receive a system correctly another dealer and logging out error Log back in and change it back to your preferred dealer and retrieve the report e Update your mobile number in your account on the website e Make sure you have full signal strength and that your Bluetooth e Bad signal volume level has been turned up strength OR e Try deleting your phone and e Your phone may performing a clean pairing not be activated on the website I heard a e The phone in commercial when I use is n
546. the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Introduction 17 EXPORT UNIQUE NON UNITED STATES CANADA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION For your particular global region your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this owner s manual A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book By referring to the market unique supplement if provided you can properly identify those features recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle This owner s manual is written primarily for the U S and Canadian Markets Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export See this owner s manual for all other required information and warnings 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 18 Child Safety GENERAL INFORMATION See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children WARNING Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height
547. the seatback until you hear a click locking it in the upright position Note The seatback will not raise if the rear latch hooks are not properly engaged to the floor striker If the seatback does not raise repeat steps 3 and 4 4 Make sure that the rear latch hooks are properly engaged with the floor striker Sn pq Note Make sure that the seat and seatback are latched securely in position Keep floor area free of objects that would prevent proper seat engagement 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 166 Seats Stowing the Third Row Seat 1 Remove all objects from the seat and stowage tub Objects in the seat or stowage tub may cause serious damage to the seat upholstery and cause improper seat function 2 From the rear of the vehicle stow the head restraints by pulling the strap located on the middle of the seatback just below the head restraint Then fold the seatback by pulling and holding the red strap while pushing the seatback forward Release the strap once the seatback starts rotating forward 3 Release the cushion latches by pulling the short black strap while pulling on the strap located at the top of the seatback This will tumble the seat all the way into the floor tub Note Do not use the seat anchors as cargo tie downs 3 Note Do not use the third row uw seatback as a load floor when the seat back is folded Sharp objects may result in damage to
548. the way back WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses as you could be seriously injured or killed Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING Several airbag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation as this may result in serious injury WARNING If the airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again and must be replaced immediately If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Supplementary Restraints System 51 The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries Airbags do not inflate slowly there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag Note You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys This is normal The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation After airbag deployment it is normal to notice a smoke like powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant This may consist of cornstarch talcum powder to lubricate the bag or sodium compounds for example baking soda that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may i
549. the way when folding or tumbling the second row seats Press the retainer on the safety belt onto the mating snap to stow To use the safety belt pull it away from the quarter trim panel CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks tears or cuts Replace if necessary All vehicle safety belt assemblies including retractors buckles front safety belt buckle assemblies buckle support assemblies slide bar if equipped shoulder belt height adjusters if equipped shoulder belt guide on seatback Gf equipped rear inflatable safety belts Gif equipped child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors and attaching hardware should be inspected after a crash See the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a crash be replaced However if the crash was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly they do not need to be replaced Safety belt assemblies not in use during a crash should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted For proper care of soiled safety b
550. thin 100 miles 160 kilometers after any wheel disturbance such as rotation flat tire wheel removal 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 360 Wheels and Tires Lug nut socket Wheel lug nut torque size Bolt size Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners Note Inspect the wheel pilot hole and mounting surface prior to installation Remove any visible corrosion or loose particles 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Capacities and Specifications 361 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS Engine 3 5L V6 engine 3 5L V6 EcoBoost engine See Octane i See Octane recommendations in Fuel recommendations in the Fuel and Refueling chapter the Fuel and Refueling chapter 1 25 1 35 mm 75 85 mm Compression 10 8 1 10 0 1 ratio Engine Drivebelt Routing 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Capacities and Specifications 362 V 261LOZIN TSM epeued TI OPTMSLAXO Cg 0D TO OPIMSLAX V L6TOCW dSM TO 06M08 AX AT NOOWSIIN V SE60 N SSM Cepeue gLAT OT4LXO CSM ONTO 0T4LX 9UON TIX q 660 TA VS GTX GV 8909 88A 0c Wd uorjeogioods pIo 4 19qumu Ied pao q jueoriqnT 9 xy Y onotuu amp g OFT MSL AVS 3J 121030 N jueorqn T 9 xy Jesy umrmurodq 06 M08 AVS 1J 1940 0 X NT NOO
551. ting and foreign material contamination should be inspected immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory trained technicians at your dealership Your vehicle s oils and fluids should be changed at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for many vehicle sub systems during scheduled maintenance It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system or using a Ford approved flushing chemical Owner Checks and Services Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed every month or at six month intervals Check every month Engine oil level Function of all interior and exterior lights Tires including spare for wear and proper pressure Windshield washer fluid level Check every six months Battery connections Clean if necessary Body and door drain holes for obstructions Clean if necessary Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength Door weatherstrips for wear Lubricate if necessary Hinges latches and outside locks for proper operation Lubricate if necessary Parking brake for proper operation Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function Safety warning lamps brake ABS airbag safety belt for operation Washer spray and wiper operation Clean or replace blades as necessary 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus
552. tion bracket over the threaded stud in 2015 Flex 471 the trunk floor and secure it with the plastic wing nut Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Wheels and Tires 359 If you are stowing the flat tire remove the L shaped bolt from the external pocket of the felt bag With the third row seat in the raised position stand the flat tire in the rear of the vehicle with the tire s valve stem facing the rear of the vehicle Fasten the flat tire to the vehicle by inserting the L shaped bolt through one of the lug bolt holes in the wheel Turn it clockwise into the threaded hole in the vehicle until the tire is secured If you are stowing the temporary spare tire place the tire over the jack and secure it with the large wing nut TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications WARNING When a wheel is installed always remove any corrosion dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel Installing wheels without correct metal to metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion resulting in loss of control Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque wi
553. tion is selected your current vehicle location is uploaded and route based on current traffic conditions is calculated and sent back to your vehicle After the route download is complete the 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 419 phone call is automatically ended You then receive audible and visual driving instructions as you travel toward your destination 3 While on an active route you can select or say Route summary or Route status to view the Route Summary turn list or the Route Status ETA You can also turn voice guidance on or off cancel the route or update the route If you miss a turn SYNC automatically asks if you want the route updated Just say Yes when prompted and a new route will be delivered to your vehicle Disconnecting from SYNC Services 1 Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel 2 Say Good bye from the SYNC Services main menu Personalizing You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker access to your most used or favorite information You can save address points such as work or home You can also save favorite information like sports teams or a news category To learn more log onto www SYNCMyRide com Push to interrupt Press the voice button at any time while you are connected to SYNC Services to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip such as a sports report wait for the listening tone and say y
554. tions made by this system should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices Route Safety Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver if you would be placed in an unsafe situation or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Appendices 535 Potential Map Inaccuracy Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads traffic controls or driving conditions Always use good judgment and common sense when following the suggested routes Emergency Services Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for these locations Not all emergency services such as police fire stations hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features TeleNav Software End User License Agreement Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the Telenav Software Your use of the Telenav Software indicates that you accept these terms and conditions If you do not accept these terms and conditions do not b
555. to holidays SYNC Owner Account Why do I need a SYNC owner account Required to activate Vehicle Health Report and to view the reports online e Required to activate the subscription based SYNC Services and to personalize your Saved Points and Favorites e Essential for keeping up with the latest software downloads available for SYNC e Access to customer support for any questions you may have Driving Restrictions For your safety certain features are speed dependent and restricted when your vehicle is traveling over 3 mph 5 k Safety Information WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving When using SYNC e Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken split or damaged Place cords and cables out of the way so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals seats compartments or safe driving abilities 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 394 SYNC e Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle
556. tomatic control climate control Adjust the fan speed to the Press the AUTO button highest speed setting 2 Adjust the temperature control Adjust the temperature control to the highest setting to the desired setting 3 Select the footwell air vents using the air distribution buttons Recommended Settings for Heating Vehicles with manual climate Vehicles with automatic ontrol climate control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the Press the AUTO button center setting Adjust the temperature control Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the hot to the desired setting Use 72 F settings 22 C as a starting point then adjust the setting as necessary Select the footwell air vents using the air distribution buttons Cooling the Interior Quickly Vehicles with manual climate Vehicles with automatic control climate control 1 Adjust the temperature control Press the MAX A C button to the MAX A C position 2 Drive with the windows open for 2 3 minutes 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 146 Climate Control Recommended Settings for Cooling Vehicles with manual climate Vehicles with automatic control climate control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the Press the AUTO button center setting 2 Adjust the temperature control Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the cold to the desired setting Use 72 F settings 22 C as a starting
557. ton while the power seat feature is already being performed may cause the first selected seat movement to be cancelled Allow the first seat movement to be completed before pressing button for another function Note Make sure that there are no objects such as books purses or brief cases on the load floor before unstowing the seat Failure to remove all objects from the top of the load floor prior to unstowing it may cause damage to the seat Note In order to allow the seat to complete the stowed position do not place objects under the seat before stowing Remove all objects from the seat and stowage tub Sharp objects may result in damage to the seat upholstery and improper seat function 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Seats 169 Note In the unlikely event that the third row power seat stops prematurely or travels to an unexpected position press the FOLD button C to reset the seat and return it to a normal position WARNING Do not drive the vehicle when the third row seat is rotated backwards During a sudden stop the safety belts are not functional in this position and the third row seat can rapidly tip back to the forward position all of which may result in serious injury Closing the Liftgate WARNING To avoid injury to third row occupants when closing the liftgate make sure that the head of any occupant is not in the path of the closing liftgate 2015 Flex 471
558. trol humidity sensor Refrigerator Restraints control module Not used spare Not used spare Climate control module turn signals 2 Breaker power windows 49 Delayed Body control module accessory relay 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Maintenance 293 GENERAL INFORMATION Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness and resale value There is a large network of Ford authorized dealers who are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise We believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to service your vehicle properly and expertly They are supported by a wide range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your vehicle To help you service your vehicle we provide Scheduled Maintenance Information which makes tracking routine service easy If your vehicle requires professional service your authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service Check your warranty information to find out which parts and services are covered Use only recommended fuels lubricants fluids and service parts conforming to specifications Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle Precautions e Do not work on a hot engine e Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts e Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space unl
559. ts Lifestyle e Ash cup coin holder eRoof racks and carriers eCargo organization and eCargo net management eSUV camping tent e Conversation mirror e Trailer hitches wiring harnesses eRoof rails and accessories 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 370 Accessories Peace of mind eRemote start e Wheel locks e Locking fuel plug e Vehicle security eFull vehicle covers eBumper and hitch mounted parking sensors The accessory manufacturer designs develops and therefore warrants Ford Licensed Accessories and does not design or test these accessories to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements Contact an authorized Ford dealer for the manufacturer s limited warranty details and request a copy of the Ford Licensed Accessories product limited warranty from the accessory manufacturer For maximum vehicle performance keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle e When adding accessories equipment passengers and luggage to your vehicle do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label Ask an authorized dealer for specific weight information e The Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulate the use of mobile communications systems that are equipped with radio trans
560. tting The wipers will continue to wipe as long as moisture is detected Keep the outside of the windshield clean especially the area around the interior mirror where the sensor is located or sensor performance may be affected 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Wipers and Washers 97 WINDSHIELD WASHERS Note Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out Always use the windshield washer before wiping a dry windshield Note Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty This may cause the washer pump to overheat Press the end of the stalk to activate the washer e A brief press causes a single wipe without washer fluid e A quick press and hold causes the wipers to swipe three times with washer fluid e A long press and hold will activate the wipers and washer fluid for up to 10 seconds A wipe will occur a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining washer fluid You can switch this feature on and off in the information display REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHERS Rotate the control to select 2 Intermittent operation shortest pause between wipes 1 Intermittent operation longest pause between wipes 0 Off Rotate and hold the control to either the top or bottom position to activate the rear washer The control will return to the 2 or 0 position
561. ty At a minimum most cellular phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions e Answering an incoming call e Ending a call e Using privacy mode e Dialing a number Redialing Call waiting notification e Caller ID Other features such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download are phone dependent features To check your phone s compatibility see your phone s user manual and visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca Pairing a Phone for the First Time Note SYNC can support downloading up to approximately 1000 entries per Bluetooth enabled cellular phone Note Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and the transmission is in position P Note To scroll through the menus press the up and down arrows on your audio system Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC allows you to make and receive hands free calls 1 Press the phone button when the display indicates no phone is paired press OK 2 When Find SYNC appears in the display press OK 3 Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode See your phone s user guide if necessary 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 398 SYNC 4 When prompted on your phone s display enter the six digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display 5 The display indicates when the pairing is successful Depending on your phone s capability and your
562. u should replace the cabin air filter see the Scheduled Maintenance chapter For additional cabin air filter information or to replace the filter see an authorized dealer REMOTE START IF EQUIPPED The remote start feature allows you to pre condition the interior of your vehicle The climate control system works to achieve comfort according to your previous settings Note You cannot adjust the system during remote start operation Turn the ignition on to return the system to its previous settings You can now make adjustments normally but you need to turn certain vehicle dependent features back on such as Heated seats Cooled seats Heated steering wheel Heated mirrors e Heated rear window You can adjust the default remote start settings using the information display controls See the Information Displays chapter Manual Climate Systems In hot weather the climate control system is set to MAX A C In moderate weather the system either heats or cools based on previous settings The rear defroster and heated mirrors are not automatically turned on In cold weather maximum heat is provided in floor defrost mode The rear defroster and heated mirrors are automatically turned on Automatic Settings In hot weather the system is set to 72 F 22 C The cooled seats are set to high if available and selected to AUTO in the information display In moderate weather the system either heats or cools based on
563. uch FCC ID KMHSYNCG2 IC 1422A SYNCG2 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The term IC before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 546 Scheduled Maintenance GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION Why Maintain Your Vehicle Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with your vehicle We have established regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle based upon rigorous testing It is important that you have your vehicle serviced at the proper times These intervals serve two purposes one is to maintain the reliability of yo
564. ulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a crash Note For the bench seat only make sure the center safety belt is unbuckled before folding the seatback Lift the handle to adjust the seatback rearward or forward You can also fold the seatback forward until it is flat Moving the Seats Backward and Forward Six Passenger Vehicles Only Lift the control to adjust the seat forward or backward 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 162 Seats Power Fold and Tumble Seat WARNING Make sure that the seat is unoccupied when folding it down Folding the seat while occupied could result in occupant injury or damage to the seat This feature is available for the right hand seat on seven passenger vehicles and on both sides for six passenger vehicles Press the control located at the back of the rear door opening one time to fold the seatback down and 4 tumble the seat forward for access to the third row Note When the ignition is turned off the power fold feature will work until the battery saver turns it off after 10 minutes You can reactivate the power seats by pressing the unlock button on the remote entry key fob or by using the unlock procedure on the keyless entry keypad See the Locks chapter Keep the key in the accessory or run position to prevent the feature from timing out Third Row Seats Accessing the Seat WARNING Before returning the seatback to its ori
565. um stances sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic Data any of which may lead to incorrect results No Warranty This Data is provided to you as is and you agree to use it at your own risk HERE and its licensors and their licensors and suppliers make no guarantees representations or warranties of any kind express or implied arising by law or otherwise including but not limited to content quality accuracy completeness effectiveness reliability fitness for a particular purpose usefulness use or results to be obtained from this Data or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error free Disclaimer of Warranty HERE AND ITS LICENSORS INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED OF QUALITY PERFORMANCE MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGEMENT Some States Territories and Countries do not allow certain warranty exclusions so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you Disclaimer of Liability HERE AND ITS LICENSORS INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM DEMAND OR ACTION IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS INJURY OR DAMAGES DIRECT OR INDIRECT WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 542 Appendices THIS DATA OR
566. und menu where you can adjust settings such as Bass Treble Midrange Balance and Fade THX Deep Note Demo DSP Digital Signal Processing Occupancy Mode and Speed Compensated Volume Your vehicle may not have all of these sound options Hazard flasher Switch the hazard flashers off and on Cleaning the Touchscreen Display Use a clean soft cloth such as one used for cleaning glasses If dirt or fingerprints are still visible apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the display Do not use detergent or any type of solvent to clean the display 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 446 MyFord Touch If Equipped Support The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you aren t able to answer on your own Monday Saturday 8 30 am 8pm EST In the United States call 1 888 270 1055 In Canada call 1 800 565 3673 Times are subject to change due to holidays Safety information WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local
567. under high outside temperatures use a low gear when possible Lower gear operation will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability Under severe operating conditions the A C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine Basic operating principles in special conditions e Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle e Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand water gravel snow or ice If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the Pavement e If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement slow down but avoid severe brake application ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface e It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly e It often may be less risky to strike small objects such as highway reflectors with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or rollover Remember your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gears
568. ur vehicle and the second is to keep your cost of owning your vehicle down It is your responsibility to have all scheduled maintenance performed and to make sure that the materials used meet the specifications identified in the Capacities and Specifications chapter of this owner s manual Failure to perform scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership Factory Trained Technicians Service technicians participate in extensive factory sponsored certification training to help them become experts on the operation of your vehicle Ask your dealership about the training and certification their technicians have received Genuine Ford and Motorcraft Replacement Parts Dealerships stock Ford Motorcraft and Ford authorized branded re manufactured replacement parts These parts meet or exceed our specifications Parts installed at your dealership carry a nationwide 24 month or unlimited miles kilometers parts and labor limited warranty If you do not use Ford authorized parts they may not meet our specifications and depending on the part it could affect emissions compliance Convenience Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle from general maintenance to collision repairs Note No
569. urbs and other obstacles When Towing a Trailer e Do not drive faster than 70 mph 113 km h during the first 500 miles 800 kilometers e Do not make full throttle starts e Check your hitch electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after you have traveled 50 miles 80 kilometers e When stopped in congested or heavy traffic during hot weather place the gearshift in position P to aid engine and transmission cooling and to help air conditioning performance e Turn off the speed control with heavy loads or in hilly terrain The speed control may turn off automatically when you are towing on long steep grades e Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill Do not apply the brakes continuously as they may overheat and become less effective e If your transmission is equipped with a Grade Assist or Tow Haul feature use this feature when towing This provides engine braking and helps eliminate excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel economy and transmission cooling e Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached Anticipate stops and brake gradually 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Towing 263 e Avoid parking on a grade However if you must park on a grade 1 Turn the steering wheel to point your vehicle tires away from traffic flow Set your vehicle parking brake Place the automatic transmission in position P Place wheel c
570. ure The keypad will go into an anti scan mode if you enter the wrong code seven times 35 consecutive button presses This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash The anti scan feature will turn off after e one minute of keypad inactivity e pressing the unlock button on the remote control e switching the ignition on e unlocking the vehicle using intelligent access Unlocking and Locking the Doors To unlock the driver door Enter the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code You must press each number within five seconds of each other The interior lamps will illuminate Note All doors will unlock if the two stage unlocking feature is disabled Refer to Locking and Unlocking earlier in this chapter To unlock all doors Enter the factory set code or your personal code then press 3e4 within five seconds To lock all doors Press and hold 7e8 and 990 at the same time with the driver door closed You do not need to enter the keypad code first Displaying the Factory Set Code with Integrated Keyhead Transmitters Note You will need to have two programmed Integrated Keyhead Transmitters for this procedure To display the factory set code in the information display 1 Place the first programmed key in the ignition 2 Turn the ignition off and remove the first programmed key 3 Place the second programmed key in the ignition You will see the factory set code in the message center The code
571. urs Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Scheduled Maintenance 557 SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions you need to perform additional maintenance as indicated If you occasionally operate your vehicle under any of these conditions it is not necessary to perform the additional maintenance For specific recommendations see your dealership service advisor or technician Perform the services shown in the following tables when specified or within 3000 miles 4800 kilometers of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing in the information display Example 1 The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at 28751 miles 46270 kilometers perform the 30000 mile 48000 kilometer automatic transmission fluid replacement Example 2 The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on but the odometer reads 30000 miles 48000 kilometers perform the engine air filter replacement For example the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor was reset at 25000 miles 40000 kilometers Towing a trailer or using a ca
572. us Safety Belts 47 The rear inflatable safety belt consists of the following e An inflatable bag located in the shoulder safety belt webbing e Lap safety belt webbing with automatic locking mode DE Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness PAN indicator See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator in the Supplemental Restraint System chapter How Does the Rear Inflatable Safety Belt System Work WARNING If the rear inflatable safety belt has deployed it will not function again The rear inflatable safety belt system must be replaced by an authorized dealer e The rear inflatable safety belts will function like standard restraints in everyday usage e During a crash of sufficient force the inflatable belt will inflate from inside the webbing e The fully inflated belt s increased diameter more effectively holds the occupant in the appropriate seating position and spreads crash forces over more area of the body than regular safety belts This helps reduce pressure on the chest and helps control head and neck motion for passengers E 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 48 Safety Belts Stowing the Rear Inflatable Safety Belt The rear inflatable safety belt has a snap retainer for stowing the safety belt against the quarter trim panel when it is not in use This will prevent the safety belt tongue from rattling against the side of the seat and keep it out of
573. us injury or death WARNING To reduce the risk of injury make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided Failure to properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death WARNING Do not allow people to travel in any area of your vehicle that does not have seats and safety belts Riding in a cargo area inside or outside of the vehicle is extremely dangerous In a crash people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Make sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt correctly Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt WARNING Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3 Never use a single belt for more than one person 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Safety Belts 39 WARNING W
574. ut from the lamp assembly Install new bulb s in reverse order BULB SPECIFICATION CHART Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D O T for North America and an E for Europe to ensure lamp performance light brightness and pattern and safe visibility The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time Number of bulbs D3 HID optional 3157NA Front sidemarker lamp N 2 2 5 12V6W Dome reading lamps ED 78 Tail brake turn signal lamp A ED 578 O Supplemental taillamp Rear sidemarker C5WL High mount brake lamp N To replace all instrument panel lights see your authorized dealer To replace these lamps see your authorized dealer 2 2 2 2 2 A A A A 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 320 Vehicle Care GENERAL INFORMATION Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes CLEANING PRODUCTS For best results use the following products or products of equivalent quality Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser United States only ZC 20 Motorcraft Engine Shamp
575. vehicle s option package software and market ENTERTAINMENT Press to select any of the following FM SIRIUS CD USB BT Stereo SD Card A V In 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus MyFord Touch If Equipped 445 Using the Touch sensitive Controls on Your System To turn a feature on and off just touch the graphic with your finger To get the best performance from the touch sensitive controls Do not press hard on the controls They are sensitive to light touch Use your bare finger to touch the center of a touch control graphic Touching off center of the graphic may affect operation of a nearby control Make sure your hands are clean and dry Keep metal and other conductive material away from the surface of the touchscreen as this may cause electronic interference for example inadvertently turning on a feature other than the one you meant to turn on Depending on your vehicle and option package you may also have these controls on your bezel Power Switch the media or climate features off and on VOL Control the volume of playing media Fan Control the speed of the climate system fan Climate Control the temperature and settings of the climate control system Seek and Tune Use as you normally would in media modes Eject Eject a CD from the entertainment system SOURCE Touch the word repeatedly to see all available media modes SOUND Touch the word to access the So
576. vicing If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Park Brake Engaged Displayed when the parking brake is set the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph 5 km h If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Collision Warning Action Description System Messages Collision Warning Not Displayed when there is a system malfunction Available with the collision warning system The system will be disabled Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Collision Warning Not Displayed when the collision warning system Available Sensor radar is blocked because of poor radar Blocked See Manual visibility due to bad weather or ice mud water in front of the radar Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 134 Information Displays System Messages Collision Warning Displayed when there is a system malfunction Malfunction with the collision warning system The system will be disabled Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Action Description X Door Ajar Displayed when a door is not completely closed Liftgate Ajar Displayed when the liftgate is not completely closed Displayed when the engine is on the driver door has been opene
577. water solution or cleaning product to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area Allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes 5 Remove the soaked cloth then with a clean damp cloth use a rubbing motion for 60 seconds on the soiled area 6 Following this wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth CLEANING LEATHER SEATS IF EQUIPPED Note Follow the same procedure as cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather instrument panels and leather interior trim surfaces For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth and a mild soap and water solution Dry the area with a clean soft cloth For cleaning and removing spots and stains such as dye transfer use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available leather cleaning product for automotive interiors Note Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous area 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 326 Vehicle Care You should e Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner e Clean and treat spills and stains as soon as possible Do not use the following products as these may damage the leather e Oil and petroleum or silicone based leather conditioners e Household cleaners e Alcohol solutions e Solvents or cleaners intended specifically for rubber vinyl and plastics Motorcraft Note Do not use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner Z
578. when you switch the vehicle off It turns back on to the last mode when you restart the vehicle 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 180 Storage Compartments Cleaning and Maintenance Note Condensation on the inside walls of the refrigerator is normal under certain conditions This feature is maintenance free but you can clean the inside of the unit and the cover with a mild soap and water solution when needed OVERHEAD CONSOLE The appearance of the overhead console will vary according to your option package Press near the rear edge of the door to open it 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus Starting and Stopping the Engine 181 GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system creating the risk of fire or other damage WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire WARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas Exhaust fumes can be toxic Always open the garage door before you start the engine WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes If you disconnect the bat
579. which can burn skin eyes and clothing if contacted Do not attempt to push start your automatic transmission vehicle Automatic transmissions do not have push start capability Attempting to push start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy As a result the transmission may exhibit a combination of firm and soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation Preparing Your Vehicle Note Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle Note Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle s electrical system 1 Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts 2 Check all battery terminals Remove the positive terminal cover if equipped and any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables Ensure that vent caps are tight and level 3 Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges Turn all other accessories off 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 274 Road
580. with AdvanceTrac I maintaining control on a slippery V surface E Na 1 E Yay USING ADVANCETRAC WITH RSC The system automatically activates when you start your engine The AdvanceTrac with RSC system cannot be completely turned off but the electronic stability control and roll stability control portions of the system are disabled when the transmission is in reverse R You can turn the traction control portion of the system off independently See the Traction Control chapter 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 216 Parking Aids SENSING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED WARNING To help avoid personal injury please read and understand the limitations of the system as contained in this section Sensing is only an aid for some generally large and fixed objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds Traffic control systems inclement weather air brakes and external motors and fans may also affect the function of the sensing system this may include reduced performance or a false activation WARNING To help avoid personal injury always use caution when in R Reverse and when using the sensing system WARNING This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging the vehicle The syst
581. with vehicles to the rear or sides of the vehicle Note The collision warning system is active at speeds above approximately 5 mph 8 km h This system is designed to alert the CH driver of certain collision risks A radar detects if your vehicle is rapidly approaching another vehicle traveling in the same direction as yours If it is a red warning light e illuminates and an audible warning chime sounds The brake support system assists the driver in reducing the collision speed by charging the brakes If the risk of collision further increases after the warning light illuminates the brake support prepares the brake system for rapid braking This may be apparent to the driver The system does not automatically activate the brakes but if the brake pedal is pressed full force braking is applied even if the brake pedal is lightly pressed Using the Collision Warning System AN WARNING The collision warning system s brake support can only help reduce the speed at which a collision occurs if the driver applies the vehicle s brakes The brake pedal must be pressed just like any typical braking situation The warning system sensitivity can be adjusted to one of three possible settings by using the information display control Refer to the Information Displays chapter Note If collision warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing then the warning sensitivity can be reduced though the manufacturer recommends
582. x performance systems Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features That is why it is important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance information Ford strongly recommends the use of only genuine Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized remanufactured replacement parts because they are engineered for your vehicle Additives and Chemicals Ford Motor Company recommended additives and chemicals are listed in the owner manual and in the Ford Workshop Manual Additional chemicals or additives not approved by Ford Motor Company are not recommended as part of normal maintenance Please consult your warranty information 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 548 Scheduled Maintenance Oils Fluids and Flushing In many cases fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and by itself does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed However discolored fluids that also show signs of overhea
583. y conditions that require tire chains or cables then it is critical that you drive cautiously Keep speeds down allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can lead to serious injury or death If the rear end of the vehicle slides while cornering steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle Note Excessive tire slippage can cause transmission damage AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop Avoid sudden braking as well Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice it won t stop any faster because as in other vehicles braking occurs at all four wheels Do not become overconfident as to road conditions 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 210 All Wheel Drive If Equipped Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears In emergency stopping situations apply the brake steadily Since
584. y how much fuel is left in the fuel tank The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade When the fuel level becomes low the level indicator will change to amber When the fuel level becomes critically low the level indicator will change to red Note When a MyKey is in use low fuel warnings will display earlier The fuel icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located e Bar Round tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine During SelectShift Automatic transmission SST use the currently selected gear will appear in the display e Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates engine coolant temperature At normal operating temperature the level indicator will be in the normal range If the engine coolant temperature exceeds the normal range stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and let the engine cool 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 126 Information Displays Trip 1 amp 2 Choose between the following trip displays Trip 1 amp 2 Average fuel economy TaD aoe Elapsed trip time Hold OK to Reset Estimated amount of fuel consumed Total odometer lower left corner Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed trip information e Trip distance shows the accumu
585. y time the ignition is on for the current ignition cycle only Use the information display to do so e During the countdown before engine shutdown you are prompted to press OK or RESET depending on your type of information display to temporarily switch the feature off for the current ignition cycle only 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 186 Starting and Stopping the Engine Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle Is Stationary 1 Move the transmission selector lever to position P 2 If your vehicle has an ignition key turn the key to the off position If your vehicle has a keyless start system press the button once 3 Apply the parking brake Note This switches off the ignition all electrical circuits warning lamps and indicators Note If the engine is idling for 30 minutes the ignition and engine automatically shut down Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle Is Moving WARNING Switching off the engine when the vehicle is still moving will result in a loss of brake and steering assistance The steering will not lock but higher effort will be required When the ignition is switched off some electrical circuits including air bags warning lamps and indicators may also be off If the ignition was turned off accidentally you can shift into Neutral and restart the engine 1 If your vehicle has an ignition key move the transmission selector lever to position N and use the brak
586. yFord Touch If Equipped 517 3D map mode provides an elevated perspective of the map This viewing angle can be adjusted and the map can be rotated 180 degrees by touching the map twice and then dragging your finger along the shaded bar with arrows at the bottom of the map View switches between full map street list and exit view in route guidance Menu displays a pop up box that allows direct access to navigation settings View Edit Route Sirius Travel Link Guidance Mute and Cancel Route Press the speaker button on the map to mute route guidance ES X When the light on the button illuminates the feature is on The speaker button appears on the map only when route guidance is active Re center the map by pressing this icon whenever you scroll g the map away from your vehicle s current location Auto Zoom Press the green bar to access map mode then select the or zoom button to bring up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the touchscreen When you press Auto Auto Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the bottom left corner of the screen in the map scale The map zoom level then synchronizes with vehicle speed The slower your vehicle is traveling the farther in the map zooms in the faster your vehicle is traveling the farther the map zooms out To turn the feature off just press the or button again In 3D mode rotate the map view by swiping your finger across the shaded bar with the arrows The ETA box unde
587. you may also see Title and Artist fields on screen Multicast indicator appears in FM mode only if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content is available HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts Other multicast stations HD2 through HD7 are only available digitally TAG allows you to save a song to download later when you are on an acquired HD Radio station and the feature is on To turn the feature on and use it 1 Press AM or FM gt Options gt TAG button gt On 2 When you hear a song you like touch TAG 3 The system automatically saves the song s information and transfers it to your portable music player if supported when you connect it to the system The system automatically transfers the tag to your player if already connected and a pop up confirms the transfer 4 When you access iTunes with your portable music player the tags appear to you as a reminder The system allows you to tag up to approximately 100 songs For a list of devices that support tagging see www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca When HD Radio broadcasts are active you can access the following functions e Scan allows you to hear a brief sampling of all available stations This feature still works when HD Radio reception is on although it does not scan for HD2
588. ystem or the vehicle we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to the vehicle s SYNC module Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent a court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada For further privacy information see the sections on 911 Assist Vehicle Health Report and Traffic Directions and Information 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus SYNC 395 USING VOICE RECOGNITION This system helps you control many features using voice commands This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front of you Initiating a Voice Session EE Push the voice icon a tone sounds and Listening appears in the us display Say any of the following Say If you want to Phone USB Access the device connected to your USB port Bluetooth Audio Stream audio from your phone Line in Access the device connected to the auxiliary input jack Cancel Cancel the requested action SYNC Return to the main menu Voice settings Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedba
589. ystem uses radar sensors which are located behind the N bumper fascia on each side of the vehicle Do not allow these areas to become obstructed by mud snow or bumper stickers as this can cause degraded system performance 2015 Flex 471 Owners Guide gf 1st Printing October 2014 USA fus 240 Driving Aids If the system detects a degraded performance condition a blocked sensor warning or low visibility warning will appear in the information display and the alert indicator illuminates in the appropriate mirror s The information display warning can be cleared but the alert indicator remains illuminated When the blockage is removed the system can be reset in two ways 1 when at least two objects are detected while driving or 2 turn the ignition key from on to off then back on If the blockage is still present after the key cycle the system senses again that it is blocked after driving in traffic dirty or obstructed remove the obstruction The radar surface is Drive normally in traffic for a few minutes to not dirty or obstructed allow the radar to detect passing vehicles so it can clear the blocked state Heavy rainfall snowfall No action required The system automatically interferes with the resets to an unblocked state once the radar signals rainfall snowfall rate decreases or stops Do not use BLIS and or CTA in these conditions System Limitations The BLIS and CTA systems do have their l
590. zards and maintaining a safe distance and speed even when the system is in use Note The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle supervising the system and intervening if required The system detects an available parallel parking space and automatically steers the vehicle into the space hands free while you control the accelerator gearshift and brakes The system visually and or audibly instructs the driver to park the vehicle The system may not function correctly if something passes between the front bumper and the parking space i e a pedestrian or cyclist or if the edge of the neighboring parked vehicle is high from the ground i e a bus tow truck or flatbed truck Note The sensors may not detect objects in heavy rain or other conditions that cause disruptive reflections Note The sensors may not detect objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves Note After a tire change the system will go through a relearning procedure During this time the system performance may deteriorate The system should not be used if e a foreign object i e bike rack or trailer is attached to the front or rear of the vehicle or at another location close to the sensors e an overhanging object i e surfboard is attached to the roof e the front bumper or side sensors are damaged i e in a collision or obstructed by a foreign object i e front bumper cover e a mini spare tire is in use 2015 Flex 471

2015 FLEX Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents